Dismiss Notice
You are browsing this site as a guest. It takes 2 minutes to CREATE AN ACCOUNT and less than 1 minute to LOGIN

Engineers

Discussion in 'Jukwaa la Elimu (Education Forum)' started by JUNK MASTER, Aug 23, 2012.

  1. J

    JUNK MASTER Member

    #1
    Aug 23, 2012
    Joined: Aug 14, 2012
    Messages: 76
    Likes Received: 12
    Trophy Points: 15
    Wakubwa naomba mnisaidie tofauti kati ya Bachelor of science in civil engineering na Bachelor of civil engineering
     
  2. pmwasyoke

    pmwasyoke JF-Expert Member

    #2
    Aug 23, 2012
    Joined: May 27, 2010
    Messages: 3,505
    Likes Received: 101
    Trophy Points: 160
    Civil engineering ni application ya science. Ndiyo maana vyuo vingine huiita Bachelor of Science in civil engineering. Vyuo vingine huiita directly bachelor of civil engineering. Kozi yenyewe ni ileile.
     
  3. J

    JUNK MASTER Member

    #3
    Aug 23, 2012
    Joined: Aug 14, 2012
    Messages: 76
    Likes Received: 12
    Trophy Points: 15
    Hivyo curriculum ni moja ama yaweza kutofautiana maana kuna marumbana kati Bachelor ya engineering UDSM na zile zinazotolewa na MIST,DIT,ST.JOSEPH etc. Kwamba ni tofauti
     
  4. f

    furaha2008 Member

    #4
    Aug 23, 2012
    Joined: May 31, 2012
    Messages: 25
    Likes Received: 0
    Trophy Points: 0
    Good qn hata mimi niliplan niulize xo nasubiri majibu kwa wadau.
     
  5. Jangakuu

    Jangakuu JF-Expert Member

    #5
    Aug 23, 2012
    Joined: Apr 24, 2012
    Messages: 497
    Likes Received: 0
    Trophy Points: 0
    SYLLABUS YA ST. JOSEPH UNIVERSITY(B.E CIVIL ENGINEERING)


    CURRICULUM AND SYLLABI

    with effect academic from year 2007 .
    B.E. CIVIL ENGINEERING
    SEMESTER II
    SL.
    No.
    COURSE
    CODE
    COURSE TITLE L T P C
    THEORY
    1. 186202 Technical English – II * 3 1 0 4
    2. 181202 Mathematics – II * 3 1 0 4
    3. 182202 Engineering Physics – II * 3 0 0 3
    4. 183202 Engineering Chemistry – II * 3 0 0 3
    5. 113201 Engineering Mechanics 3 1 0 4
    6. 185203 Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering 4 0 0 4
    PRACTICAL
    7. 185253 Computer Practice Laboratory – II * 0 1 2 2
    8. 184252 Physics and Chemistry Laboratory – II * 0 0 3 2
    9. 113251 Computer Aided Drafting and Modeling
    Laboratory
    0 1 2 2
    TOTAL : 28 CREDITS
    10. - English Language Laboratory
    +
    0 0 2 -
    * Common to all B.E. / B.Tech. Programmes
    + Offering English Language Laboratory as an additional subject (with no marks) during
    2
    nd
    semester may be decided by the respective Colleges affiliated to Anna University of
    Technology Chennai.
    2
    186202 TECHNICAL ENGLISH II L T P C
    3 1 0 4
    AIM:
    To encourage students to actively involved in participative learning of English and to help
    them acquire Communication Skills.
    OBJECTIVES:
    1. To help students develop listening skills for academic and professional purposes.
    2. To help students acquire the ability to speak effectively in English in real-life situations.
    3. To inculcate reading habit and to develop effective reading skills.
    4. To help students improve their active and passive vocabulary.
    5. To familiarize students with different rhetorical functions of scientific English.
    6. To enable students write letters and reports effectively in formal and business
    situations.
    UNIT I 12
    Technical Vocabulary - meanings in context, sequencing words, Articles- Prepositions,
    intensive reading& predicting content, Reading and interpretation, extended definitions,
    Process description
    Suggested activities:
    1. Exercises on word formation using the prefix ‘self' - Gap filling with preposition.
    2. Exercises - Using sequence words.
    3. Reading comprehension exercise with questions based on inference – Reading
    headings
    4. and predicting the content – Reading advertisements and interpretation.
    5. Writing extended definitions – Writing descriptions of processes – Writing paragraphs
    based on discussions – Writing paragraphs describing the future.
    UNIT II 12
    Phrases / Structures indicating use / purpose – Adverbs-Skimming – Non-verbal
    communication - Listening – correlating verbal and non-verbal communication -Speaking in
    group discussions – Formal Letter writing – Writing analytical paragraphs.
    Suggested activities:
    1. Reading comprehension exercises with questions on overall content – Discussions
    analyzing stylistic features (creative and factual description) - Reading
    comprehension exercises with texts including graphic communication - Exercises in
    interpreting non-verbal communication.
    2. Listening comprehension exercises to categorise data in tables.
    3. Writing formal letters, quotations, clarification, complaint – Letter seeking permission
    for Industrial visits– Writing analytical paragraphs on different debatable issues.
    UNIT III 12
    Cause and effect expressions – Different grammatical forms of the same word - Speaking –
    stress and intonation, Group Discussions - Reading – Critical reading - Listening, - Writing –
    using connectives, report writing – types, structure, data collection, content, form,
    recommendations .
    3
    Suggested activities:
    1. Exercises combining sentences using cause and effect expressions – Gap filling
    exercises using the appropriate tense forms – Making sentences using different
    grammatical forms of the same word. ( Eg: object –verb / object – noun )
    2. Speaking exercises involving the use of stress and intonation – Group discussions–
    analysis of problems and offering solutions.
    3. Reading comprehension exercises with critical questions, Multiple choice question.
    4. Sequencing of jumbled sentences using connectives – Writing different types of
    reports like industrial accident report and survey report – Writing recommendations.
    UNIT IV 12
    Numerical adjectives – Oral instructions – Descriptive writing – Argumentative paragraphs
    – Letter of application - content, format (CV / Bio-data) - Instructions, imperative forms -
    Checklists, Yes/No question form – E-mail communication.
    Suggested Activities:
    1. Rewriting exercises using numerical adjectives.
    2. Reading comprehension exercises with analytical questions on content – Evaluation
    of content.
    3. Listening comprehension – entering information in tabular form, intensive listening
    exercise and completing the steps of a process.
    4. Speaking - Role play – group discussions – Activities giving oral instructions.
    5. Writing descriptions, expanding hints – Writing argumentative paragraphs – Writing
    formal letters – Writing letter of application with CV/Bio-data – Writing general and
    safety instructions – Preparing checklists – Writing e-mail messages.
    UNIT V 9
    Speaking - Discussion of Problems and solutions - Creative and critical thinking – Writing an
    essay, Writing a proposal.
    Suggested Activities:
    1. Case Studies on problems and solutions
    2. Brain storming and discussion
    3. Writing Critical essays
    4. Writing short proposals of 2 pages for starting a project, solving problems, etc.
    5. Writing advertisements.
    TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOK:
    1. Chapters 5 – 8. Department of Humanities & Social Sciences, Anna University,
    ‘English for Engineers and Technologists' Combined Edition (Volumes 1 & 2),
    Chennai: Orient Longman Pvt. Ltd., 2006. Themes 5 – 8 (Technology,
    Communication, Environment, Industry).
    REFERENCES:
    1. P. K. Dutt, G. Rajeevan and C.L.N Prakash, ‘A Course in Communication
    Skills', Cambridge University Press, India 2007.
    2. Krishna Mohan and Meera Banerjee, ‘Developing Communication Skills',
    Macmillan India Ltd., (Reprinted 1994 – 2007).
    3. Edgar Thorpe, Showick Thorpe, ‘Objective English', Second Edition, Pearson
    Education, 2007.
    4
    Extensive Reading:
    1. Robin Sharma, ‘The Monk Who Sold His Ferrari', Jaico Publishing House, 2007
    Note:
    The book listed under Extensive Reading is meant for inculcating the reading habit of
    the students. They need not be used for testing purposes.
    5
    181202 MATHEMATICS – II L T P C
    3 1 0 4
    UNIT I ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12
    Higher order linear differential equations with constant coefficients – Method of variation of
    parameters – Cauchy's and Legendre's linear equations – Simultaneous first order linear
    equations with constant coefficients.
    UNIT II VECTOR CALCULUS 12
    Gradient Divergence and Curl – Directional derivative – Irrotational and solenoidal vector
    fields – Vector integration – Green's theorem in a plane, Gauss divergence theorem and
    stokes' theorem (excluding proofs) – Simple applications involving cubes and rectangular
    parallelpipeds.
    UNIT III ANALYTIC FUNCTIONS 12
    Functions of a complex variable – Analytic functions – Necessary conditions, Cauchy –
    Riemann equation and Sufficient conditions (excluding proofs) – Harmonic and orthogonal
    properties of analytic function – Harmonic conjugate – Construction of analytic functions –
    Conformal mapping : w= z+c, cz, 1/z, and bilinear transformation.
    UNIT IV COMPLEX INTEGRATION 12
    Complex integration – Statement and applications of Cauchy's integral theorem and
    Cauchy's integral formula – Taylor and Laurent expansions – Singular points – Residues –
    Residue theorem – Application of residue theorem to evaluate real integrals – Unit circle and
    semi-circular contour(excluding poles on boundaries).
    UNIT V LAPLACE TRANSFORM 12
    Laplace transform – Conditions for existence – Transform of elementary functions – Basic
    properties – Transform of derivatives and integrals – Transform of unit step function and
    impulse functions – Transform of periodic functions.
    Definition of Inverse Laplace transform as contour integral – Convolution theorem (excluding
    proof) – Initial and Final value theorems – Solution of linear ODE of second order with
    constant coefficients using Laplace transformation techniques.
    TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOK:
    1. Bali N. P and Manish Goyal, "Text book of Engineering Mathematics", 3
    rd
    Edition,
    Laxmi Publications (p) Ltd., (2008).
    2. Grewal. B.S, "Higher Engineering Mathematics", 40
    th
    Edition, Khanna Publications,
    Delhi, (2007).
    REFERENCES:
    1. Ramana B.V, "Higher Engineering Mathematics",Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
    Company, New Delhi, (2007).
    2. Glyn James, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics", 3
    rd
    Edition, Pearson Education,
    (2007).
    3. Erwin Kreyszig, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics", 7
    th
    Edition, Wiley India,
    (2007).
    4. Jain R.K and Iyengar S.R.K, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics", 3
    rd
    Edition,
    Narosa Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., (2007).
    6
    182202 ENGINEERING PHYSICS – II L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    UNIT I CONDUCTING MATERIALS 9
    Conductors – classical free electron theory of metals – Electrical and thermal conductivity –
    Wiedemann – Franz law – Lorentz number – Draw backs of classical theory – Quantum
    theory – Fermi distribution function – Effect of temperature on Fermi Function – Density of
    energy states – carrier concentration in metals.
    UNIT II SEMICONDUCTING MATERIALS 9
    Intrinsic semiconductor – carrier concentration derivation – Fermi level – Variation of Fermi
    level with temperature – electrical conductivity – band gap determination – extrinsic
    semiconductors – carrier concentration derivation in n-type and p-type semiconductor –
    variation of Fermi level with temperature and impurity concentration – compound
    semiconductors – Hall effect –Determination of Hall coefficient – Applications.
    UNIT III MAGNETIC AND SUPERCONDUCTING MATERIALS 9
    Origin of magnetic moment – Bohr magneton – Dia and para magnetism – Ferro magnetism
    – Domain theory – Hysteresis – soft and hard magnetic materials – anti – ferromagnetic
    materials – Ferrites – applications – magnetic recording and readout – storage of magnetic
    data – tapes, floppy and magnetic disc drives.
    Superconductivity : properties - Types of super conductors – BCS theory of
    superconductivity(Qualitative) - High Tc superconductors – Applications of superconductors
    – SQUID, cryotron, magnetic levitation.
    UNIT IV DIELECTRIC MATERIALS 9
    Electrical susceptibility – dielectric constant – electronic, ionic, orientational and space
    charge polarization – frequency and temperature dependence of polarisation – internal field
    – Claussius – Mosotti relation (derivation) – dielectric loss – dielectric breakdown – uses of
    dielectric materials (capacitor and transformer) – ferroelectricity and applications.
    UNIT V MODERN ENGINEERING MATERIALS 9
    Metallic glasses: preparation, properties and applications.
    Shape memory alloys (SMA): Characteristics, properties of NiTi alloy, application,
    advantages and disadvantages of SMA
    Nanomaterials: synthesis –plasma arcing – chemical vapour deposition – sol-gels –
    electrodeposition – ball milling - properties of nanoparticles and applications.
    Carbon nanotubes: fabrication – arc method – pulsed laser deposition – chemical vapour
    deposition - structure – properties and applications.
    TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS:
    1. Charles Kittel ‘ Introduction to Solid State Physics', John Wiley & sons,
    7
    th
    edition, Singapore (2007)
    2. Charles P. Poole and Frank J.Ownen, 'Introduction to Nanotechnology', Wiley
    India(2007) (for Unit V)
    REFERENCES:
    1. Rajendran, V, and Marikani A, ‘Materials science'Tata McGraw Hill publications,
    (2004) New delhi.
    2. Jayakumar, S. ‘Materials science', R.K. Publishers, Coimbatore, (2008).
    3. Palanisamy P.K, ‘Materials science', Scitech publications(India) Pvt. LTd., Chennai,
    second Edition(2007)
    4. M. Arumugam, ‘Materials Science' Anuradha publications, Kumbakonam, (2006).
    7
    183202 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY – II L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    AIM
    To impart a sound knowledge on the principles of chemistry involving the different
    application oriented topics required for all engineering branches.
    OBJECTIVES
    • The student should be conversant with the principles electrochemistry,
    electrochemical cells, emf and applications of emf measurements.
    • Principles of corrosion control
    • Chemistry of Fuels and combustion
    • Industrial importance of Phase rule and alloys
    • Analytical techniques and their importance.
    UNIT I ELECTROCHEMISTRY 9
    Electrochemical cells – reversible and irreversible cells – EMF – measurement of emf –
    Single electrode potential – Nernst equation (problem) – reference electrodes –Standard
    Hydrogen electrode -Calomel electrode – Ion selective electrode – glass electrode and
    measurement of pH – electrochemical series – significance – potentiometer titrations (redox
    - Fe²
    +
    vs dichromate and precipitation – Ag
    +
    vs CI
    -
    titrations) and conduct metric titrations
    (acid-base – HCI vs, NaOH) titrations,
    UNIT II CORROSION AND CORROSION CONTROL 9
    Chemical corrosion – Pilling – Bedworth rule – electrochemical corrosion – different types –
    galvanic corrosion – differential aeration corrosion – factors influencing corrosion – corrosion
    control – sacrificial anode and impressed cathodic current methods – corrosion inhibitors –
    protective coatings – paints – constituents and functions – metallic coatings – electroplating
    (Au) and electroless (Ni) plating.
    UNIT III FUELS AND COMBUSTION 9
    Calorific value – classification – Coal – proximate and ultimate analysis metallurgical coke –
    manufacture by Otto-Hoffmann method – Petroleum processing and fractions – cracking –
    catalytic cracking and methods-knocking – octane number and cetane number – synthetic
    petrol – Fischer Tropsch and Bergius processes – Gaseous fuels- water gas, producer gas,
    CNG and LPG, Flue gas analysis – Orsat apparatus – theoretical air for combustion.
    UNIT IV PHASE RULE AND ALLOYS 9
    Statement and explanation of terms involved – one component system – water system –
    condensed phase rule – construction of phase diagram by thermal analysis – simple eutectic
    systems (lead-silver system only) – alloys – importance, ferrous alloys – nichrome and
    stainless steel – heat treatment of steel, non-ferrous alloys – brass and bronze.
    UNIT V ANALYTICAL TECHNIQUES 9
    Beer-Lambert's law (problem) – UV-visible spectroscopy and IR spectroscopy – principles –
    instrumentation (problem) (block diagram only) – estimation of iron by colorimetry – flame
    photometry – principle – instrumentation (block diagram only) – estimation of sodium by
    flame photometry – atomic absorption spectroscopy – principles – instrumentation (block
    diagram only) – estimation of nickel by atomic absorption spectroscopy.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    8
    TEXT BOOKS:
    1. P.C.Jain and Monica Jain, "Engineering Chemistry" Dhanpat Rai Pub, Co., New
    Delhi (2002).
    2. S.S.Dara "A text book of Engineering Chemistry" S.Chand & Co.Ltd., New Delhi
    (2006).
    REFERENCES:
    1. B.Sivasankar "Engineering Chemistry" Tata McGraw-Hill Pub.Co.Ltd, New Delhi
    (2008).
    2. B.K.Sharma "Engineering Chemistry" Krishna Prakasan Media (P) Ltd., Meerut
    (2001).
    9
    113201 ENGINEERING MECHANICS L T P C
    3 1 0 4
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of this course the student should be able to understand the vectorial and scalar
    representation of forces and moments, static equilibrium of particles and rigid bodies both in
    two dimensions and also in three dimensions. Further, he should understand the principle of
    work and energy. He should be able to comprehend the effect of friction on equilibrium. He
    should be able to understand the laws of motion, the kinematics of motion and the
    interrelationship. He should also be able to write the dynamic equilibrium equation. All these
    should be achieved both conceptually and through solved examples.
    UNIT I BASICS & STATICS OF PARTICLES 12
    Introduction – Units and Dimensions – Laws of Mechanics – Lame's theorem, Parallelogram
    and triangular Law of forces – Vectors – Vectorial representation of forces and moments –
    Vector operations: additions, subtraction, dot product, cross product – Coplanar Forces –
    Resolution and Composition of forces – Equilibrium of a particle – Forces in space –
    Equilibrium of a particle in space – Equivalent systems of forces – Principle of
    transmissibility – Single equivalent force.
    UNIT II EQUILIBRIUM OF RIGID BODIES 12
    Free body diagram – Types of supports and their reactions – requirements of stable
    equilibrium – Moments and Couples – Moment of a force about a point and about an axis –
    Vectorial representation of moments and couples – Scalar components of a moment –
    Varignon's theorem – Equilibrium of Rigid bodies in two dimensions – Equilibrium of Rigid
    bodies in three dimensions – Examples
    UNIT III PROPERTIES OF SURFACES AND SOLIDS 12
    Determination of Areas and Volumes – First moment of area and the Centroid of sections –
    Rectangle, circle, triangle from integration – T section, I section, - Angle section, Hollow
    section by using standard formula – second and product moments of plane area –
    Rectangle, triangle, circle from integration – T section, I section, Angle section, Hollow
    section by using standard formula – Parallel axis theorem and perpendicular axis theorem –
    Polar moment of inertia – Principal moments of inertia of plane areas – Principal axes of
    inertia – Mass moment of inertia – Derivation of mass moment of inertia for rectangular
    section, prism, sphere from first principle – Relation to area moments of inertia.
    UNIT IV DYNAMICS OF PARTICLES 12
    Displacements, Velocity and acceleration, their relationship – Relative motion – Curvilinear
    motion – Newton's law – Work Energy Equation of particles – Impulse and Momentum –
    Impact of elastic bodies.
    UNIT V FRICTION AND ELEMENTS OF RIGID BODY DYNAMICS 12
    Frictional force – Laws of Coloumb friction – simple contact friction – Rolling resistance –
    Belt friction.
    Translation and Rotation of Rigid Bodies – Velocity and acceleration – General Plane
    motion.
    TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOK:
    1. Beer, F.P and Johnson Jr. E.R. "Vector Mechanics for Engineers", Vol. 1 Statics and
    Vol. 2 Dynamics, McGraw-Hill International Edition, (1997).
    10
    REFERENCES:
    1. Rajasekaran, S, Sankarasubramanian, G., "Fundamentals of Engineering
    Mechanics", Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., (2000).
    2. Hibbeller, R.C., "Engineering Mechanics", Vol. 1 Statics, Vol. 2 Dynamics, Pearson
    Education Asia Pvt. Ltd., (2000).
    3. Palanichamy, M.S., Nagam, S., "Engineering Mechanics – Statics & Dynamics", Tata
    McGraw-Hill, (2001).
    4. Irving H. Shames, "Engineering Mechanics – Statics and Dynamics", IV Edition –
    Pearson Education Asia Pvt. Ltd., (2003).
    5. Ashok Gupta, "Interactive Engineering Mechanics – Statics – A Virtual Tutor
    (CDROM)", Pearson Education Asia Pvt., Ltd., (2002).
    11
    185203 BASIC ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING L T P C
    (Common to branches under Civil, Mechanical and Technology faculty) 3 0 0 3
    UNIT I ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS & MEASURMENTS 12
    Ohm's Law – Kirchoff's Laws – Steady State Solution of DC Circuits – Introduction to AC
    Circuits – Waveforms and RMS Value – Power and Power factor – Single Phase and Three
    Phase Balanced Circuits.
    Operating Principles of Moving Coil and Moving Iron Instruments (Ammeters and
    Voltmeters), Dynamometer type Watt meters and Energy meters.
    UNIT II ELECTRICAL MECHANICS 12
    Construction, Principle of Operation, Basic Equations and Applications of DC Generators,
    DC Motors, Single Phase Transformer, single phase induction Motor.
    UNIT III SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AND APPLICATIONS 12
    Characteristics of PN Junction Diode – Zener Effect – Zener Diode and its Characteristics –
    Half wave and Full wave Rectifiers – Voltage Regulation.
    Bipolar Junction Transistor – CB, CE, CC Configurations and Characteristics – Elementary
    Treatment of Small Signal Amplifier.
    UNIT IV DIGITAL ELECTRONICS 12
    Binary Number System – Logic Gates – Boolean Algebra – Half and Full Adders – Flip-Flops
    – Registers and Counters – A/D and D/A Conversion (single concepts)
    UNIT V FUNDAMENTALS OF COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING 12
    Types of Signals: Analog and Digital Signals – Modulation and Demodulation: Principles of
    Amplitude and Frequency Modulations.
    Communication Systems: Radio, TV, Fax, Microwave, Satellite and Optical Fibre (Block
    Diagram Approach only).
    TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS:
    1. V.N. Mittle "Basic Electrical Engineering",Tata McGraw Hill Edition, New Delhi, 1990.
    2. R.S. Sedha, "Applied Electronics" S. Chand & Co., 2006.
    REFERENCES:
    1. Muthusubramanian R, Salivahanan S and Muraleedharan K A, "Basic Electrical,
    Electronics and Computer Engineering",Tata McGraw Hill, Second Edition, (2006).
    2. Nagsarkar T K and Sukhija M S, "Basics of Electrical Engineering", Oxford press
    (2005).
    3. Mehta V K, "Principles of Electronics", S.Chand & Company Ltd, (1994).
    4. Mahmood Nahvi and Joseph A. Edminister, "Electric Circuits", Schaum' Outline
    Series, McGraw Hill, (2002).
    5. Premkumar N, "Basic Electrical Engineering", Anuradha Publishers, (2003).
    12
    185253 COMPUTER PRACTICE LABORATORY – II L T P C
    0 1 2 2
    LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
    1. UNIX COMMANDS 15
    Study of Unix OS - Basic Shell Commands - Unix Editor
    2. SHELL PROGRAMMING 15
    Simple Shell program - Conditional Statements - Testing and Loops
    3. C PROGRAMMING ON UNIX 15
    Dynamic Storage Allocation-Pointers-Functions-File Handling
    TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
    HARDWARE / SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
    Hardware
    1 UNIX Clone Server
    33 Nodes (thin client or PCs)
    Printer – 3 Nos.
    Software
    OS – UNIX Clone (33 user license or License free Linux)
    Compiler - C
    13
    184252 PHYSICS LABORATORY – II L T P C
    0 0 3 2
    LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
    1. Determination of Young's modulus of the material – non uniform bending.
    2. Determination of Band Gap of a semiconductor material.
    3. Determination of specific resistance of a given coil of wire – Carey Foster
    Bridge.
    4. Determination of viscosity of liquid – Poiseuille's method.
    5. Spectrometer dispersive power of a prism.
    6. Determination of Young's modulus of the material – uniform bending.
    7. Torsional pendulum – Determination of rigidity modulus.
    • A minimum of FIVE experiments shall be offered.
    • Laboratory classes on alternate weeks for Physics and Chemistry.
    • The lab examinations will be held only in the second semester.
    14
    184252 CHEMISTRY LABORATORY – II L T P C
    0 0 3 2
    LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
    1. Conduct metric titration (Simple acid base)
    2. Conduct metric titration (Mixture of weak and strong acids)
    3. Conduct metric titration using BaCl
    2
    vs Na
    2
    SO
    4
    4. Potentiometric Titration (Fe
    2+
    / KMnO
    4
    or K
    2
    Cr
    2
    O
    7
    )
    5. PH titration (acid & base)
    6. Determination of water of crystallization of a crystalline salt (Copper sulphate)
    7. Estimation of Ferric iron by spectrophotometry.
    • A minimum of FIVE experiments shall be offered.
    • Laboratory classes on alternate weeks for Physics and Chemistry.
    • The lab examinations will be held only in the second semester.
    15
    113251 COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING AND MODELING LABORATORY
    L T P C
    0 1 2 2
    List of Exercises using software capable of Drafting and Modeling
    1. Study of capabilities of software for Drafting and Modeling – Coordinate systems
    (absolute, relative, polar, etc.) – Creation of simple figures like polygon and general
    multi-line figures.
    2. Drawing of a Title Block with necessary text and projection symbol.
    3. Drawing of curves like parabola, spiral, involute using Bspline or cubic spline.
    4. Drawing of front view and top view of simple solids like prism, pyramid, cylinder,
    cone, etc, and dimensioning.
    5. Drawing front view, top view and side view of objects from the given pictorial views
    (eg. V-block, Base of a mixie, Simple stool, Objects with hole and curves).
    6. Drawing of a plan of residential building ( Two bed rooms, kitchen, hall, etc.)
    7. Drawing of a simple steel truss.
    8. Drawing sectional views of prism, pyramid, cylinder, cone, etc,
    9. Drawing isometric projection of simple objects.
    10. Creation of 3-D models of simple objects and obtaining 2-D multi-view drawings from
    3-D model.
    Note: Plotting of drawings must be made for each exercise and attached to the
    records written by students.
    List of Equipments for a batch of 30 students:
    1. Pentium IV computer or better hardware, with suitable graphics facility -30 No.
    2. Licensed software for Drafting and Modeling. – 30 Licenses
    3. Laser Printer or Plotter to print / plot drawings – 2 No.
    16
    ENGLISH LANGUAGE LABORATORY (Optional) L T P C
    0 0 2 -
    1. Listening: 5
    Listening & answering questions – gap filling – Listening and Note taking- Listening to
    telephone conversations
    2. Speaking: 5
    Pronouncing words & sentences correctly – word stress – Conversation practice.
    Classroom Session 20
    1. Speaking: Introducing oneself, Introducing others, Role play, Debate-
    Presentations: Body language, gestures, postures.
    Group Discussions etc
    2. Goal setting – interviews – stress time management – situational reasons
    Evaluation
    (1) Lab Session – 40 marks
    Listening – 10 marks
    Speaking – 10 marks
    Reading – 10 marks
    Writing – 10 marks
    (2) Classroom Session – 60 marks
    Role play activities giving real life context – 30 marks
    Presentation – 30 marks
    Note on Evaluation
    1. Examples for role play situations:
    a. Marketing engineer convincing a customer to buy his product.
    b. Telephone conversation – Fixing an official appointment / Enquiry on
    availability of flight or train tickets / placing an order. etc.
    2. Presentations could be just a Minute (JAM activity) or an Extempore on simple
    topics or visuals could be provided and students could be asked to talk about it.
    REFERENCES:
    1. Hartley, Peter, Group Communication, London: Routledge, (2004).
    2. Doff, Adrian and Christopher Jones, Language in Use – (Intermediate level),
    Cambridge University Press, (1994).
    3. Gammidge, Mick, Speaking Extra – A resource book of multi-level skills activities,
    Cambridge University Press, (2004).
    4. Craven, Miles, Listening Extra - A resource book of multi-level skills activities,
    Cambridge, Cambridge University Press, (2004).
    5. Naterop, Jean & Rod Revell, Telephoning in English, Cambridge University Press,
    (1987).
    17
    LAB REQUIREMENTS
    1. Teacher – Console and systems for students
    2. English Language Lab Software
    3. Tape Recorders.
    1
    AFFILIATED INSTITUTIONS
    ANNA UNIVERSITY OF TECHNOLOGY CHENNAI :: CHENNAI 600 113
    REGULATIONS 2010
    B.E. CIVIL ENGINEERING
    CURRICULA AND SYLLABI FOR III & IV SEMESTERS
    SEMESTER III
    (Applicable to the students admitted from the Academic year 2010 – 2011 onwards)
    COURSE
    CODE
    COURSE TITLE L T P C
    THEORY
    181301 Transforms and Partial Differential Equations 3 1 0 4
    185301 Environmental Science and Engineering 3 0 0 3
    187301 Applied Geology 3 0 0 3
    101301 Mechanics of Solids 3 1 0 4
    101302 Mechanics of Fluids 3 1 0 4
    101303
    Construction Techniques, Equipment and
    Practice
    4 0 0 4
    101304 Surveying– I 3 0 0 3
    PRACTICAL
    101351 Survey Practical – I 0 0 4 2
    101352 Computer Aided Building Drawing 0 0 4 2
    TOTAL 22 3 8 29
    2
    181301 TRANSFORMS AND PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 3 1 0 4
    (Common to all B.E. / B.Tech. Degree Programmes)
    OBJECTIVES
    The course objective is to develop the skills of the students in the areas of Transforms and Partial
    Differtial Equations. This will be necessary for their effective studies in a large number of
    engineering subjects like heat conduction, communication systems, electro-optics and
    electromagnetic theory. The course will also serve as a prerequisite for post graduate and
    specialized studies and research.
    1. FOURIER SERIES 9 + 3
    Dirichlet's conditions – General Fourier series – Odd and even functions – Half range sine series
    – Half range cosine series – Complex form of Fourier Series – Parseval's identify – Harmonic
    Analysis.
    2. FOURIER TRANSFORMS 9 + 3
    Fourier integral theorem (without proof) – Fourier transform pair – Sine and
    Cosine transforms – Properties – Transforms of simple functions – Convolution theorem –
    Parseval's identity.
    3. PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9 +3
    Formation of partial differential equations – Lagrange's linear equation – Solutions of standard
    types of first order partial differential equations - Linear partial differential equations of second
    and higher order with constant coefficients.
    4. APPLICATIONS OF PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9 + 3
    Solutions of one dimensional wave equation – One dimensional equation of heat conduction –
    Steady state solution of two-dimensional equation of heat conduction (Insulated edges excluded)
    – Fourier series solutions in cartesian coordinates.
    5. Z -TRANSFORMS AND DIFFERENCE EQUATIONS 9 + 3
    Z-transforms - Elementary properties – Inverse Z-transform – Convolution theorem -Formation of
    difference equations – Solution of difference equations using Z-transform.
    TOTAL (L:45+T:15): 60 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Grewal, B.S, "Higher Engineering Mathematic", 40th Edition, Khanna publishers, Delhi,
    (2007)
    REFERENCES
    1. Bali.N.P and Manish Goyal, "A Textbook of Engineering Mathematic", 7th Edition, Laxmi
    Publications(P) Ltd. (2007)
    2. Ramana.B.V., "Higher Engineering Mathematics", Tata Mc-GrawHill Publishing Company
    limited, New Delhi (2007).
    3. Glyn James, "Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics", 3rd Edition, Pearson Education
    (2007).
    4. Erwin Kreyszig, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics", 8th edition, Wiley India (2007).
    3
    185301 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING 3 0 0 3
    (Common to Civil, CSE, IT & Biomedical Degree Programmes)
    AIM
    The aim of this course is to create awareness in every engineering graduate about the
    importance of environment, the effect of technology on the environment and ecological balance
    and make them sensitive to the environment problems in every professional endeavour that they
    participates.
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of this course the student is expected to understand what constitutes the environment,
    what are precious resources in the environment, how to conserve these resources, what is the
    role of a human being in maintaining a clean environment and useful environment for the future
    generations and how to maintain ecological balance and preserve bio-diversity. The role of
    government and non-government organization in environment managements.
    UNIT I ENVIRONMENT, ECOSYSTEMS AND BIODIVERSITY 14
    Definition, scope and importance of environment – need for public awareness - concept of an
    ecosystem – structure and function of an ecosystem – producers, consumers and decomposers –
    energy flow in the ecosystem – ecological succession – food chains, food webs and ecological
    pyramids – Introduction, types, characteristic features, structure and function of the (a) forest
    ecosystem (b) grassland ecosystem (c) desert ecosystem (d) aquatic ecosystems (ponds,
    streams, lakes, rivers, oceans, estuaries) – Introduction to biodiversity definition: genetic, species
    and ecosystem diversity – biogeographical classification of India – value of biodiversity:
    consumptive use, productive use, social, ethical, aesthetic and option values – Biodiversity at
    global, national and local levels – India as a mega-diversity nation – hot-spots of biodiversity –
    threats to biodiversity: habitat loss, poaching of wildlife, man-wildlife conflicts – endangered and
    endemic species of India – conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and ex-situ conservation of
    biodiversity.
    Field study of common plants, insects, birds
    Field study of simple ecosystems – pond, river, hill slopes, etc.
    UNIT II ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION 8
    Definition – causes, effects and control measures of: (a) Air pollution (b) Water pollution (c) Soil
    pollution (d) Marine pollution (e) Noise pollution (f) Thermal pollution (g) Nuclear hazards – soil
    waste management: causes, effects and control measures of municipal solid wastes – role of an
    individual in prevention of pollution – pollution case studies – disaster management: floods,
    earthquake, cyclone and landslides.
    Field study of local polluted site – Urban / Rural / Industrial / Agricultural.
    UNIT III NATURAL RESOURCES 10
    Forest resources: Use and over-exploitation, deforestation, case studies- timber extraction,
    mining, dams and their effects on forests and tribal people – Water resources: Use and overutilization
    of surface and ground water, floods, drought, conflicts over water, dams-benefits and
    problems – Mineral resources: Use and exploitation, environmental effects of extracting and using
    mineral resources, case studies – Food resources: World food problems, changes caused by
    agriculture and overgrazing, effects of modern agriculture, fertilizer-pesticide problems, water
    logging, salinity, case studies – Energy resources: Growing energy needs, renewable and non
    renewable energy sources, use of alternate energy sources. case studies – Land resources: Land
    as a resource, land degradation, man induced landslides, soil erosion and desertification – role of
    an individual in conservation of natural resources – Equitable use of resources for sustainable
    lifestyles.
    Field study of local area to document environmental assets – river / forest / grassland / hill /
    mountain.
    4
    UNIT IV SOCIAL ISSUES AND THE ENVIRONMENT 7
    From unsustainable to sustainable development – urban problems related to energy – water
    conservation, rain water harvesting, watershed management – resettlement and rehabilitation of
    people; its problems and concerns, case studies – role of non-governmental organizationenvironmental
    ethics: Issues and possible solutions – climate change, global warming, acid rain,
    ozone layer depletion, nuclear accidents and holocaust, case studies. – wasteland reclamation –
    consumerism and waste products – environment protection act – Air (Prevention and Control of
    Pollution) act – Water (Prevention and control of Pollution) act – Wildlife protection act – Forest
    conservation act – enforcement machinery involved in environmental legislation- central and state
    pollution control boards- Public awareness.
    UNIT V HUMAN POPULATION AND THE ENVIRONMENT 6
    Population growth, variation among nations – population explosion – family welfare programme –
    environment and human health – human rights – value education – HIV / AIDS – women and
    child welfare – role of information technology in environment and human health – Case studies.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Gilbert M.Masters, "Introduction to Environmental Engineering and
    Science", 2nd Edition, Pearson Education ,2004.
    2. Benny Joseph, "Environmental Science and Engineering", Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi,
    2006.
    REFERENCE BOOKS
    1. R.K. Trivedi, "Handbook of Environmental Laws, Rules, Guidelines, Compliances and
    Standards", Vol. I and II, Enviro Media.
    2. Cunningham, W.P. Cooper, T.H. Gorhani, "Environmental Encyclopedia", Jaico Publ.,
    House, Mumbai, 2001.
    3. Dharmendra S. Sengar, "Environmental law", Prentice hall of India PVT LTD, New Delhi,
    2007.
    4. Rajagopalan, R, "Environmental Studies-From Crisis to Cure", Oxford University Press
    (2005)
    5
    187301 APPLIED GEOLOGY 3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of this course the student shall be able to understand about geological formations,
    classification and morphology of rocks, and the importance of the study of geology for civil
    engineers with regard to founding structures like dams, bridges, buildings, etc. The student shall
    also be able to appreciate the importance of geological formation in causing earthquakes and
    land slides.
    UNIT I GENERAL GEOLOGY 9
    Geology in Civil Engineering – Branches of geology – Earth Structures and composition –
    Elementary knowledge on continental drift and plate technologies. Earth processes – Weathering
    – Work of rivers, wind and sea and their engineering importance – Earthquake belts in India.
    Groundwater – Mode of occurrence – prospecting – importance in civil engineering
    UNIT II MINERALOGY 9
    Elementary knowledge on symmetry elements of important crystallographic systems – physical
    properties of minerals – study of the following rock forming minerals – Quartz family. Feldpar
    family, Augite, Hornblende, Biotite, Muscovite, Calcite, Garnet – properties, behaviour and
    engineering significance of clay minerals – Fundamentals of process of formation of ore minerals
    – Coal and petroleum – Their origin and occurrence in India.
    UNIT III PETROLOGY 9
    Classification of rocks – distinction between igneous, sedimentary and metamorphic rocks.
    Description occurrence, engineering properties and distribution of following rocks. Igneous rocks
    – Granite, Syenite, Diorite, Gabbro, Pegmatite, Dolerite and Basalt Sedimentary rocks sandstone,
    Limestone, shale conglo, Conglomerate and breccia. Metamorphic rocks. Quartizite, Marble,
    Slate, Phyllite, Gniess and Schist.
    UNIT IV STRUCTURAL GEOLOGY AND GEOPHYSICAL METHOD 9
    Attitude of beds – Outcrops – Introduction to Geological maps – study of structures – Folds, faults
    and joints – Their bearing on engineering construction. Seismic and Electrical methods for Civil
    Engineering investigations
    UNIT V GEOLOGICAL INVESTIGATIONS IN CIVIL ENGINEERING 9
    Remote sensing techniques – Study of air photos and satellite images – Interpretation for Civil
    Engineering projects – Geological conditions necessary for construction of Dams, Tunnels,
    Buildings, Road cuttings, Land slides – Causes and preventions. Sea erosion and coastal
    protection.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Parbin Singh, "Engineering and General Geology", Katson Publication House, 1987.
    2. Krynine and Judd, "Engineering Geology and Geotechniques", McGraw-Hill Book
    Company, 1990
    REFERENCES
    1. Legeet, "Geology and Engineering", McGraw-Hill Book Company 1998
    2. Blyth, "Geology for Engineers", ELBS, 1995
    6
    101301 MECHANICS OF SOLIDS 3 1 0 4
    OBJECTIVE
    The subject of Mechanics of Solids cuts broadly across all branches of engineering profession. At
    the end of this course, the student will have knowledge about behaviour of members subjected to
    various type of forces. The subject can be mastered best by solving numerous problems.
    UNIT I STRESS STRAIN AND DEFORMATION OF SOLIDS, STATES OF STRESS 9+3
    Rigid bodies and deformable solids – stability, strength, stiffness – tension, compression and
    shear stresses – strain, elasticity, Hooke's law, limit of proportionately, modules of elasticity,
    stress-strain curve, lateral strain – temperature stresses – deformation of simple and compound
    bars – shear modulus, bulk modulus, relationship between elastic constants – biaxial state of
    stress – stress at a point – stress on inclined plane – principal stresses and principal planes –
    Mohr's circle of stresses.
    UNIT II ANALYSIS OF PLANE TRUSS, THIN CYLINDERS / SHELLS 9+3
    Stability and equilibrium of plane frames – types of trusses – analysis of forces in truss members
    method of joints, method of sections, method of tension coefficients – thin cylinders and shells –
    under internal pressure – deformation of thin cylinders and shells.
    UNIT III TRANSVERSE LOADING ON BEAMS 9+3
    Beams – types of supports – simple and fixed, types of load – concentrated, uniformly distributed,
    varying distributed load, combination of above loading – relationship between bending moment
    and shear force – bending moment, shear force diagram for simply supported, cantilever and
    over hanging beams – Theory of simple bending – analysis of stresses – load carrying capacity of
    beams – proportioning of sections
    UNIT IV DEFLECTION OF BEAMS AND SHEAR STRESSES 9+3
    Deflection of beams – double integration method – Macaulay's method – slope and deflection
    using moment area method, Conjugate Beam method – variation of shear stress – shear stress
    distribution in rectangular, I sections, solid circular sections, hollow circular sections, angle and
    channel sections – shear flow – shear centre.
    UNIT V TORSION AND SPRINGS 9+3
    Stresses and deformation in circular (solid and hollow shafts) – stepped shafts – shafts fixed at
    both ends – leaf springs – stresses in helical springs – deflection of springs.
    TOTAL (L:45+T:15): 60 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Egor P Popov, Engineering Mechanics of Solids, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2003
    2. Bansal R.K. Strength of materials, Laxmi Publications, New Delhi - 2007
    REFERENCES
    1. Subramanian R., Strength of materials, Oxford university press, New Delhi - 2005
    2. William A.Nash, Theory and Problems of Strength of Materials, Schaum's Outline Series,
    Tata McGraw-Hill publishing co., New Delhi – 2007.
    3. Srinath L.S, Advanced Mechanics of Solids, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi,
    2003.
    7
    101302 MECHANICS OF FLUIDS 3 1 0 4
    OBJECTIVE
    The student is introduced to the definition and properties of fluid. Principles of fluid statics,
    kinematics and dynamics are dealt with subsequently. The application of similitude and model
    study are covered subsequently. After undergoing this course, the student would have learnt fluid
    properties and application to real situations of fluid flow.
    UNIT I DEFINITIONS AND FLUID PROPERTIES 5+2
    Definitions – Fluid and fluid mechanics – Dimensions and units – Fluid properties – Continuum
    Concept of system and control volume
    UNIT II FLUID STATICS & KINEMATICS 10+4
    Pascal's Law and Hydrostatic equation – Forces on plane and curved surfaces – Buoyancy –
    Meta centre – Pressure measurement – Fluid mass under relative equilibrium
    Fluid Kinematics
    Stream, streak and path lines – Classification of flows – Continuity equation (one, two and three
    dimensional forms) – Stream and potential functions – flow nets – Velocity measurement (Pilot
    tube, current meter, Hot wire and hot film anemometer, float technique, Laser Doppler
    velocimetry)
    UNIT III FLUID DYNAMICS 10+3
    Euler and Bernoulli's equations – Application of Bernoulli's equation – Discharge measurement –
    Laminar flows through pipes and between plates – Hagen Poiseuille equation – Turbulent flow –
    Darcy-Weisbach formula – Moody diagram – Momentum Principle
    UNIT IV BOUNDARY LAYER AND FLOW THROUGH PIPES 10+3
    Definition of boundary layer – Thickness and classification – Displacement and momentum
    thickness – Development of laminar and turbulent flows in circular pipes – Major and minor losses
    of flow in pipes – Pipes in series and in parallel – Pipe network
    UNIT V SIMILITUDE AND MODEL STUDY 10+3
    Dimensional Analysis – Rayleigh's method, Buckingham's Pi-theorem – Similitude and models –
    Scale effect and distorted models.
    TOTAL (L:45+T:15): 60 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Kumar, K.L., "Engineering Fluid Mechanics", Eurasia Publishing House (P) Ltd., New
    Delhi, 1995.
    2. Garde, R.J. and Mirajgaoker, A.G., "Engineering Fluid Mechanics", Nem Chand Bros.,
    Roorkee
    3. Rajput, R.K., "A text book of Fluid Mechanics" , S.Chand and Co.,New Delhi - 2007
    4. Fox, Robert, W. and Macdonald, Alan,T., "Introduction to Fluid Mechanics", John Wiley &
    Sons, 1995
    5. Modi, P.N. & Seth, S.M Hydraulics & fluid Mechanics, Standard book house , New Delhi -
    2005.
    8
    REFERENCES
    1. Streeter, Victor, L. and Wylie, Benjamin E., "Fluid Mechanics", McGraw-Hill Ltd., 1998.
    2. E. John Finnemore and Joseph B. Franzini, "Fluid Mechanics with Engineering
    Applications", McGraw-Hill International Edition, 2001.
    3. Pernard Messay, "Mechanics of Fluids" 7th Edition, Nelson Thornes Ltd. U. K. 1998.
    9
    101303 CONSTRUCTION TECHNIQUES, EQUIPMENT AND PRACTICES 4 0 0 4
    OBJECTIVE
    The main objective of this course is to make the student aware of the various construction
    techniques, practices and the equipment needed for different types of construction activities. At
    the end of this course the student shall have a reasonable knowledge about the various
    construction procedures for sub to super structure and also the equipment needed for
    construction of various types of structures from foundation to super structure.
    UNIT I CONCRETE TECHNOLOGY 12
    Cements – Grade of cements - manufacture of cement – concrete chemicals and Applications –
    Mix design concept – mix design as per BIS & ACI methods – manufacturing of concrete –
    Batching – mixing – transporting – placing – compaction of concrete – curing and finishing.
    Testing of fresh and hardened concrete – quality of concrete - Non – destructive testing.
    UNIT II CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES 13
    Specifications, details and sequence of activities and construction co-ordination – Site Clearance
    – Marking – Earthwork - masonry – stone masonry – Bond in masonry - concrete hollow block
    masonry – flooring – damp proof courses – construction joints – movement and expansion joints
    – pre cast pavements – Building foundations – basements – temporary shed – centering and
    shuttering – slip forms – scaffoldings – de-shuttering forms – Fabrication and erection of steel
    trusses – frames – braced domes – laying brick –– weather and water proof – roof finishes –
    acoustic and fire protection.
    UNIT III SUB STRUCTURE CONSTRUCTION 13
    Techniques of Box jacking – Pipe Jacking -under water construction of diaphragm walls and
    basement-Tunneling techniques – Piling techniques - well and caisson - sinking cofferdam - cable
    anchoring and grouting-driving diaphragm walls, sheet piles - shoring for deep cutting - well
    points -Dewatering and stand by Plant equipment for underground open excavation.
    UNIT IV SUPER STRUCTURE CONSTRUCTION 12
    Launching girders, bridge decks, off shore platforms – special forms for shells - techniques for
    heavy decks – in-situ pre-stressing in high rise structures, Material handling - erecting light weight
    components on tall structures - Support structure for heavy Equipment and conveyors -Erection
    of articulated structures, braced domes and space decks.
    UNIT V CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT 10
    Selection of equipment for earth work - earth moving operations - types of earthwork equipment -
    tractors, motor graders, scrapers, front end waders, earth movers – Equipment for foundation and
    pile driving. Equipment for compaction, batching and mixing and concreting - Equipment for
    material handling and erection of structures - Equipment for dredging, trenching, tunneling,
    TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Peurifoy, R.L., Ledbetter, W.B. and Schexnayder, C., "Construction Planning, Equipment and
    Methods", 5th Edition, McGraw Hill, Singapore, 1995.
    2. Arora S.P. and Bindra S.P., Building Construction, Planning Techniques and Method of
    Construction, Dhanpat Rai and Sons, 1997.
    3. Varghese , P.C. Building construction, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2007.
    4. Sheety, M.S, Concrete Technology, Theory and Practice, S. Chand and Company Ltd, New
    Delhi, 2005.
    10
    REFERENCES
    1. Jha J and Sinha S.K., Construction and Foundation Engineering, Khanna Publishers, 1993.
    2. Sharma S.C. "Construction Equipment and Management", Khanna Publishers New Delhi,
    1988.
    3. Deodhar, S.V. "Construction Equipment and Job Planning", Khanna Publishers, New Delhi,
    1988.
    4. Dr. Mahesh Varma, "Construction Equipment and its Planning and Application", Metropolitan
    Book Company, New Delhi-, 1983.
    5. Gambhir, M.L, Concrete Technology, Tata McGraw – Hill Publishing Company Ltd, New
    Delhi, 2004
    11
    101304 SURVEYING I 3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of the course the student will posses knowledge about Chain surveying, Compass
    surveying, Plane table surveying, Levelling, Theodolite surveying and Engineering surveys.
    1. INTRODUCTION AND CHAIN SURVEYING 8
    Definition - Principles - Classification - Field and office work - Scales - Conventional signs -
    Survey instruments, their care and adjustment - Ranging and chaining - Reciprocal ranging -
    Setting perpendiculars - well - conditioned triangles - Traversing - Plotting - Enlarging and
    reducing figures.
    2. COMPASS SURVEYING AND PLANE TABLE SURVEYING 7
    Prismatic compass - Surveyor's compass - Bearing - Systems and conversions - Local attraction -
    Magnetic declination - Dip - Traversing - Plotting - Adjustment of errors - Plane table instruments
    and accessories - Merits and demerits - Methods - Radiation - Intersection - Resection -
    Traversing.
    3. LEVELLING AND APPLICATIONS 12
    Level line - Horizontal line - Levels and Staves - Spirit level - Sensitiveness - Bench marks -
    Temporary and permanent adjustments - Fly and check levelling - Booking - Reduction -
    Curvature and refraction - Reciprocal levelling - Longitudinal and cross sections - Plotting -
    Calculation of areas and volumes - Contouring - Methods - Characteristics and uses of contours -
    Plotting - Earth work volume - Capacity of reservoirs.
    4. THEODOLITE SURVEYING 8
    Theodolite - Vernier and microptic - Description and uses - Temporary and permanent
    adjustments of vernier transit - Horizontal angles - Vertical angles - Heights and distances -
    Traversing - Closing error and distribution - Gale's tables - Omitted measurements.
    5. ENGINEERING SURVEYS 10
    Reconnaissance, preliminary and location surveys for engineering projects - Lay out - Setting out
    works - Route Surveys for highways, railways and waterways - Curve ranging - Horizontal and
    vertical curves - Simple curves - Setting with chain and tapes, tangential angles by theodolite,
    double theodolite - Compound and reverse curves - Transition curves - Functions and
    requirements - Setting out by offsets and angles - Vertical curves - Sight distances - Mine
    Surveying - instruments - Tunnels - Correlation of under ground and surface surveys - Shafts -
    Adits.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Bannister A. and Raymond S., Surveying, ELBS, Sixth Edition, 1992.
    2. Kanetkar T.P., Surveying and Levelling, Vols. I and II, United Book Corporation, Pune,
    1994.
    3. Punmia B.C. Surveying, Vols. I, II and III, Laxmi Publications, 1989
    REFERENCES
    1. Clark D., Plane and Geodetic Surveying, Vols. I and II, C.B.S. Publishers and
    Distributors, Delhi, Sixth Edition, 1971.
    2. James M.Anderson and Edward M.Mikhail, Introduction to Surveying, McGraw-Hill Book
    Company, 1985.
    3. Heribert Kahmen and Wolfgang Faig, Surveying, Walter de Gruyter, 1995.
    12
    101351 SURVEY PRACTICAL I 0 0 4 2
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of the course the student will posses knowledge about Survey field techniques
    1. Study of chains and its accessories
    2. Aligning, Ranging and Chaining
    3. Chain Traversing
    4. Compass Traversing
    5. Plane table surveying: Radiation
    6. Plane table surveying: Intersection
    7. Plane table surveying: Traversing
    8. Plane table surveying: Resection – Three point problem
    9. Plane table surveying: Resection – Two point problem
    10. Study of levels and levelling staff
    11. Fly levelling using Dumpy level
    12. Fly levelling using tilting level
    13. Check levelling
    14. LS and CS
    15. Contouring
    16. Study of Theodolite
    TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
    SURVEY PRACTICAL I & SURVEY PRACTICAL II
    LIST OF EQUIPMENTS
    (For a batch of 30 students)
    Sl. No. Description of Equipments Quantity
    1. Total Station 3 Nos
    2. Theodolites Atleast 1 for every 10 students
    3. Dumpy level Atleast 1 for every 10 students
    4. Plain table Atleast 1 for every 10 students
    5. Pocket stereoscope 1
    6. Ranging rods
    1 for a set of 5 students
    7. Levelling staff
    8. Cross staff
    9. Chains
    10. Tapes
    11. Arrows
    13
    101352 COMPUTER AIDED BUILDING DRAWING 0 0 4 2
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of this course the student should be able to draft on computer building
    drawings (Plan, elevation and sectional views) in accordance with development and control
    rules satisfying orientation and functional requirements for the following:
    1. Buildings with load bearing walls (Flat and pitched roof) – Including details of doors and
    windows 15
    2. RCC framed structures 15
    3. Industrial buildings – North light roof structures – Trusses 15
    4. Perspective view of one and two storey buildings 15
    TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Civil Engg. Drawing & House Planning – Varma B.P., Khanna publishers, Delhi
    2. Building drawing & detailing – Balagopal & T.S. Prabhu, Spades Publishers, Calicut.
    REFERENCES
    1. Building drawing – Shah.M.G., Tata McGraw-Hill,1992
    2. Building planning & Drawing – Kumaraswamy N., Kameswara Rao A., Charotar
    Publishing
    3. Shah, Kale and Patki, Building Drawing with integrated approach to built environment,
    Tata McGraw-Hill.
    Examination Guideline
    30% of the end semester examination paper shall deal with planning, while the rest 70%
    shall be based on the drafting skill.
    LIST OF EQUIPMENTS
    (For a batch of 30 students)
    Sl.
    No.
    Description of Equipments Quantity
    1. Computer system of Pentium IV or equivalent 1 for each student
    2.
    Licensed version of any reputed Analysis, Design
    & Drafting software
    1 copy for a set of
    3 students
    1
    AFFILIATED INSTITUTIONS
    ANNA UNIVERSITY OF TECHNOLOGY CHENNAI :: CHENNAI 600 113
    REGULATIONS 2010
    B.E. CIVIL ENGINEERING
    CURRICULA AND SYLLABI FOR IV SEMESTER
    SEMESTER IV
    (Applicable to the students admitted from the Academic year 2010 – 2011 onwards)
    COURSE
    CODE
    COURSE TITLE L T P C
    THEORY
    181401 Numerical Methods 3 1 0 4
    101401 Soil Mechanics 3 0 0 3
    101402 Strength of Materials 3 1 0 4
    101403 Applied Hydraulic Engineering 3 1 0 4
    101404 Surveying – II 3 0 0 3
    101405 Highway Engineering 3 0 0 3
    PRACTICAL
    101451 Strength of Materials Lab 0 0 3 2
    101452 Hydraulic Engineering Laboratory 0 0 3 2
    101453 Survey Practical – II 0 0 4 2
    TOTAL 18 3 10 27
    2
    101352 COMPUTER AIDED BUILDING DRAWING 0 0 4 2
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of this course the student should be able to draft on computer building drawings (Plan,
    elevation and sectional views) in accordance with development and control rules satisfying
    orientation and functional requirements for the following:
    1. Buildings with load bearing walls (Flat and pitched roof) –
    Including details of doors and windows 15
    2. RCC framed structures 15
    3. Industrial buildings – North light roof structures – Trusses 15
    4. Perspective view of one and two storey buildings 15
    TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Civil Engg. Drawing & House Planning – Varma B.P., Khanna publishers, Delhi
    2. Building drawing & detailing – Balagopal & T.S. Prabhu, Spades Publishers, Calicut.
    REFERENCES
    1. Building drawing – Shah.M.G., Tata McGraw-Hill,1992
    2. Building planning & Drawing –Kumaraswamy N., Kameswara Rao A., Charotar
    Publishing
    3. Shah, Kale and Patki, Building Drawing with integrated approach to built environment,
    Tata McGraw-Hill.
    Examination Guideline
    30% of the end semester examination paper shall deal with planning, while the rest 70%
    shall be based on the drafting skill.
    LIST OF EQUIPMENTS
    (For a batch of 30 students)
    Sl. No. Description of Equipments Quantity
    1. Computer system of Pentium IV or equivalent 1 for each student
    2.
    Licensed version of any reputed Analysis, Design
    & Drafting software
    1 copy for a set of 3 students
    3
    181401 NUMERICAL METHODS 3 1 0 4
    (Common to Civil, Aero, Manu, EEE, ECE, CSE, IT, Chemical &Plastic)
    AIM
    With the present development of the computer technology, it is necessary to develop
    efficient algorithms for solving problems in science, engineering and technology. This
    course gives a complete procedure for solving different kinds of problems occur in
    engineering numerically.
    OBJECTIVES
    At the end of the course, the students would be acquainted with the basic concepts in
    numerical methods and their uses are summarized as follows:
    i. The roots of nonlinear (algebraic or transcendental) equations, solutions of large
    system of linear equations and eigen value problem of a matrix can be obtained
    numerically where analytical methods fail to give solution.
    ii. When huge amounts of experimental data are involved, the methods discussed on
    interpolation will be useful in constructing approximate polynomial to represent the
    data and to find the intermediate values.
    iii. The numerical differentiation and integration find application when the function in the
    analytical form is too complicated or the huge amounts of data are given such as
    series of measurements, observations or some other empirical information.
    iv. Since many physical laws are couched in terms of rate of change of one/two or more
    independent variables, most of the engineering problems are characterized in the
    form of either nonlinear ordinary differential equations or partial differential equations.
    The methods introduced in the solution of ordinary differential equations and partial
    differential equations will be useful in attempting any engineering problem.
    1. SOLUTION OF EQUATIONS AND EIGENVALUE PROBLEMS 9+3
    Solution of equation –Fixed point iteration: x=g(x) method - Newton's method – Solution
    of linear system by Gaussian elimination and Gauss-Jordon method– Iterative method -
    Gauss-Seidel method - Inverse of a matrix by Gauss Jordon method – Eigen value of a
    matrix by power method and by Jacobi method for symmetric matrix.
    2. INTERPOLATION AND APPROXIMATION 9+3
    Lagrangian Polynomials – Divided differences – Interpolating with a cubic spline –
    Newton's forward and backward difference formulas.
    3. NUMERICAL DIFFERENTIATION AND INTEGRATION 9+3
    Differentiation using interpolation formulae –Numerical integration by trapezoidal and
    Simpson's 1/3 and 3/8 rules – Romberg's method – Two and Three point Gaussian
    quadrature formulae – Double integrals using trapezoidal and Simpsons's rules.
    4. INITIAL VALUE PROBLEMS FOR ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9+3
    Single step methods: Taylor series method – Euler method for first order equation –
    Fourth order Runge – Kutta method for solving first and second order equations –
    Multistep methods: Milne's and Adam's predictor and corrector methods.
    4
    5. BOUNDARY VALUE PROBLEMS IN ORDINARY AND PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL
    EQUATIONS 9+3
    Finite difference solution of second order ordinary differential equation – Finite difference
    solution of one dimensional heat equation by explicit and implicit methods – One
    dimensional wave equation and two dimensional Laplace and Poisson equations.
    TOTAL (L:45+T:15): 60 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Veerarjan, T and Ramachandran, T., "Numerical methods with programming in C",
    Second Editiion, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing.Co.Ltd, 2007.
    2. Sankara Rao K, "Numerical Methods for Scientisits and Engineers", 3rd Edition, Printice
    Hall of India Private Ltd, New Delhi, 2007.
    REFERENCE BOOKS
    1. Chapra, S. C and Canale, R. P., "Numerical Methods for Engineers", 5th Edition, Tata
    McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2007.
    2. Gerald, C. F. and Wheatley, P.O., "Applied Numerical Analysis", 6th Edition, Pearson
    Education, Asia, New Delhi, 2006.
    3. Grewal, B.S. and Grewal,J.S., " Numerical methods in Engineering and Science", 6th
    Edition, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2004.
    5
    101401 SOIL MECHANICS 3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    After undergoing this course, the student gains adequate knowledge on engineering properties of
    soil.
    1. INTRODUCTION 10
    Nature of Soil - Problems with soil - phase relation - sieve analysis - sedimentation analysis –
    Atterberg limits - classification for engineering purposes - BIS Classification system - Soil
    compaction - factors affecting compaction – field compaction methods and monitoring.
    2. SOIL WATER AND WATER FLOW 8
    Soil water – Various forms – Influence of clay minerals – Capillary rise – Suction - Effective stress
    concepts in soil – Total, neutral and effective stress distribution in soil - Permeability – Darcy's
    Law- Permeability measurement in the laboratory – quick sand condition - Seepage – Laplace
    Equation - Introduction to flow nets –properties and uses - Application to simple problems.
    3. STRESS DISTRIBUTION, COMPRESSIBILITY AND SETTLEMENT 10
    Stress distribution in soil media – Boussinesque formula – stress due to line load and Circular
    and rectangular loaded area - approximate methods - Use of influence charts – Westergaard
    equation for point load - Components of settlement - Immediate and consolidation settlement -
    Terzaghi's one dimensional consolidation theory – governing differential equation - laboratory
    consolidation test – Field consolidation curve – NC and OC clays - problems on final and time
    rate of consolidation
    4. SHEAR STRENGTH 9
    Shear strength of cohesive and cohesionless soils - Mohr - Coulomb failure theory – Saturated
    soil - Strength parameters - Measurement of shear strength, direct shear, Triaxial compression,
    UCC and Vane shear tests –Types of shear tests based on drainage and their applicability -
    Drained and undrained behaviour of clay and sand – Stress path for conventional triaxial test.
    5. SLOPE STABILITY 8
    Slope failure mechanisms - Modes - Infinite slopes - Finite slopes – Total and effective stress
    analysis - Stability analysis for purely cohesive and C-f soils - Method of slices – Modified
    Bishop's method - Friction circle method - stability number – problems – Slope protection
    measures.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS:
    1. Punmia P.C., "Soil Mechanics and Foundations", Laximi Publications Pvt. Ltd., New
    Delhi, 1995.
    2. Gopal Ranjan and Rao A.S.R., "Basic and applied soil mechanics", New Age
    International Publishers, New Delhi, 2000.
    3. Venkatramaiah, C. "Geotechnical Engineering", New Age International Publishers, New
    Delhi, 1995
    4. Khan I.H., "A text book of Geotechnical Engineering", Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi,
    1999.
    6
    REFERENCES
    1. Coduto, D.P., "Geotechnical Engineering Principles and Practices", Prentice Hall of India
    Private Limited, New Delhi, 2002.
    2. McCarthy D.F., "Essentials of Soil Mechanics and Foundations Basic Geotechniques",
    Sixth Edition, Prentice-Hall, New Jersey, 2002.
    3. Das, B.M, "Principles of Geotechnical Engineering", (fifth edition), Thomas Books/ cole,
    2002
    4. Muni Budhu, "Soil Mechanics and Foundations", John Willey & Sons, Inc, New York,
    2000.
    7
    101402 STRENGTH OF MATERIALS 3 1 0 4
    OBJECTIVE
    This subject is useful for a detailed study of forces and their effects along with some suitable
    protective measures for the safe working condition. This knowledge is very essential for an
    engineer to enable him in designing all types of structures and machines.
    1. ENERGY PRINCIPLES 9+3
    Strain energy and strain energy density – strain energy in traction, shear in flexure and torsion –
    castigliano's theorems – principle of virtual work – application of energy theorems for computing
    deflections in beams and trusses – Maxwell's reciprocal theorems
    2. INDETERMINATE BEAMS 9+3
    Propped cantilever and fixed beams-fixed end moments and reactions for concentrated load
    (central, non central), uniformly distributed load, triangular load (maximum at centre and
    maximum at end) – theorem of three moments – analysis of continuous beams – shear force and
    bending moment diagrams for continuous beams – slope & deflections in continuous beams
    (qualitative study only)
    3. COLUMNS 9+3
    Eccentrically loaded short columns – middle third rule – core section – columns of unsymmetrical
    sections – (angle channel sections) – Euler's theory of long columns – critical loads for prismatic
    columns with different end conditions; Rankine-Gordon formula for eccentrically loaded columns
    – thick cylinders – compound cylinders.
    4. STATE OF STRESS IN THREE DIMENSIONS 9+3
    Spherical and deviatory components of stress tensor - determination of principal stresses and
    principal planes – volumetric strain – dilatation and distortion – theories of failure – principal
    stress dilatation – principal strain – shear stress – strain energy and distortion energy theories –
    application in analysis of stress, load carrying capacity and design of members – residual
    stresses
    5. ADVANCED TOPICS IN BENDING OF BEAMS 9+3
    Unsymmetrical bending of beams of symmetrical and unsymmetrical sections – curved beams –
    Winkler Bach formula – stress concentration – fatigue and fracture.
    TOTAL (L:45+T:15): 60 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Egor P Popov, "Engineering Mechanics of Solids", Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2003
    2. Rajput R.K. Strength of Materials, S.Chand&company Ltd., New Delhi - 2006
    REFERENCES
    1. Kazimi S.M.A, "Solid Mechanics", Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi, 2003
    2. William A .Nash, "Theory and Problems of Strength of Materials", Schaum's Outline
    Series, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing company Ltd, 2007.
    3. Srinath, L.S. Advanced mechanics and solids, Tata-McGraw Hill publishing
    company ltd, 2005.
    4. Punmia B.C.Theory of Structures (SMTS) Vol 1&II, Laxmi publishing Pvt Ltd,New Delhi
    ,2004.
    8
    101403 APPLIED HYDRAULIC ENGINEERING 3 1 0 4
    OBJECTIVE
    Student is introduced to open channel flow characteristics including hydraulic jump and surges.
    Hydraulic machines viz flow through turbines and pumps including their performance
    characteristics and design aspects are taught. Student, at the end of the semester will have the
    abilities to analyse flow characteristics in open channel and design hydraulic machines.
    1. OPEN CHANNEL FLOW 9+3
    Open channel flow – Types and regimes of flow – Velocity distribution in open channel – Wide
    open channel – Specific energy – Critical flow and its computation – channel transition.
    2. UNIFORM FLOW 8+3
    Uniform flow – Velocity measurement – Manning's and Chezy's formula – Determination of
    roughness coefficients – Determination of normal depth and velocity – Most economical sections
    – Non-erodible channels
    3. VARIED FLOW 9+3
    Dynamic equations of gradually varied flow – Assumptions – Characteristics of flow profiles –
    Draw down and back water curves – Profile determination – Graphical integration, direct step and
    standard step method – Flow through transitions - Hydraulic jump – Types – Energy dissipation –
    Surges.
    4. PUMPS 9+3
    Centrifugal pump - minimum speed to start the pump – multistage Pumps – Jet and submersible
    pumps - Positive displacement pumps - reciprocating pump - negative slip - flow separation
    conditions - air vessels -indicator diagram and its variation - savings in work done - rotary pumps.
    5. TURBINES 10+3
    Turbines - draft tube and cavitations – Application of momentum principle – Impact of jets on
    plane and curved plates - turbines - classification - radial flow turbines - axial flow turbines –
    Impulse and Reaction
    TOTAL (L:45+T:15): 60 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Subramanya K., "Flow in Open channels", Tata McGraw-Hill PublishingCompany,
    1994.
    2. Modi, P.N, and Seth S.M. Hydraulic and Fluid Mechanics Standard Book House, 2000.
    3. Bansal R.K, Fluid mechanics & Hydraulic machines, Laxmi Publishing Pvt Ltd, New
    Delhi - 2007
    REFERENCES
    1. Jain A.K., "Fluid Mechanics (including Hydraulic Machines)", Khanna Publishers,
    8th edition, 1995.
    2. Ranga Raju, K.G., "Flow through Open Channels", Tata McGraw-Hill, 1985
    9
    101404 SURVEYING II 3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of the course the student will posses knowledge about Tachometric surveying, Control
    surveying, Survey adjustments, Astronomical surveying and Photogrametry.
    1. TACHEOMETRIC SURVEYING 6
    Tacheometric systems - Tangential, stadia and subtense methods - Stadia systems - Horizontal
    and inclined sights - Vertical and normal staffing - Fixed and movable hairs - Stadia constants -
    Anallactic lens - Subtense bar.
    2. CONTROL SURVEYING 8
    Working from whole to part - Horizontal and vertical control methods - Triangulation - Signals -
    Base line - Instruments and accessores - Corrections - Satellite station - Reduction to centre -
    Trignometric levelling - Single and reciprocal observations - Modern trends – Bench marking
    3. SURVEY ADJUSTMENTS 8
    Errors - Sources, precautions and corrections - Classification of errors - True and most probable
    values - weighted observations - Method of equal shifts - Principle of least squares - Normal
    equation - Correlates - Level nets - Adjustment of simple triangulation networks.
    4. ASTRONOMICAL SURVEYING 11
    Celestial sphere - Astronomical terms and definitions - Motion of sun and stars - Apparent altitude
    and corrections - Celestial co-ordinate systems - Different time systems - use of Nautical almanac
    - Star constellations - calculations for azimuth of a line.
    5. HYDROGRAPHIC AND ADVANCE SURVEYING 12
    Hydrographic Surveying - Tides - MSL - Sounding methods - Location of soundings and methods
    - Three point problem - Strength of fix - Sextants and station pointer - River surveys -
    Measurement of current and discharge - Photogrammetry - Introduction – Basic concepts of
    Terrestial and aerial Photographs - Stereoscopy – Definition of Parallax. Electromagnetic
    distance measurement – Basic principles - Instruments – Trilateration. Basic concepts of
    Cartography and Cadastral surveying.
    TOTAL : 45
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Bannister A. and Raymond S., Surveying, ELBS, Sixth Edition, 1992.
    2. Punmia B.C., Surveying, Vols. I, II and III, Laxmi Publications, 1989.
    3. Kanetkar T.P., Surveying and Levelling, Vols. I and II, United Book Corporation, Pune,
    1994.
    REFERENCES
    1. Clark D., Plane and Geodetic Surveying, Vols. I and II, C.B.S. Publishers and
    Distributors, Delhi, Sixth Edition, 1971.
    2. James M.Anderson and Edward M.Mikhail, Introduction to Surveying, McGraw-Hill Book
    Company, 1985.
    3. Wolf P.R., Elements of Photogrammetry, McGraw-Hill Book Company, Second Edition,
    1986.
    4. Robinson A.H., Sale R.D. Morrison J.L. and Muehrche P.C., Elements of Cartography,
    John Wiley and Sons, New York, Fifth Edition, 1984.
    5. Heribert Kahmen and Wolfgang Faig, Surveying, Walter de Gruyter, 1995.
    10
    101405 HIGHWAY ENGINEERING 3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    The objective of the course is to educate the students on the various components of Highway
    Engineering. It exposes the students to highway planning, engineering surveys for highway
    alignment, Design of Geometric Elements of Highways and Urban roads, Rigid and Flexible
    pavements design. The students further learn the desirable properties of highway materials and
    various practices adopted for construction. This course enables the students to develop skill on
    evaluation of the pavements and to decide appropriate types of maintenance.
    1. HIGHWAY PLANNING AND ALIGNMENT 9
    History of Road Construction, Highway Development in India - Jayakar Committee
    Recommendations and Realisations, Twenty-year Road Development Plans, Concepts of Ongoing
    Highway Development Programmes at National Level, Institutions for Highway
    Development at National level - Indian Roads Congress, Highway Research Board, National
    Highway Authority of India, Ministry of Road Transport and Highways (MORTH) and Central
    Road Research Institute. Requirements of Ideal Alignment, Factors Controlling Highway
    Alignment Engineering Surveys for Alignment - Conventional Methods and Modern Methods
    (Remote Sensing, GIS and GPS techniques) Classification and Cross Section of Urban and Rural
    Roads (IRC), Highway Cross Sectional Elements – Right of Way, Carriage Way, Camber, Kerbs,
    Shoulders and Footpaths [IRC Standards], Cross sections of different Class of Roads - Principles
    of Highway Financing
    2. GEOMETRIC DESIGN OF HIGHWAYS 9
    Design of Horizontal Alignment – Horizontal Curves Super elevation, Widening of Pavements on
    Horizontal Curves and Transition Curves Design of Vertical Alignments – Rolling, Limiting,
    Exceptional and Minimum Gradients, Summit and Valley Curves-Sight Distances - Factors
    affecting Sight Distances, PIEV theory, Stopping Sight Distance (SSD), Overtaking Sight
    Distance (OSD), Sight Distance at Intersections, Intermediate Sight Distance and Illumination
    Sight Distance [Derivations and Problems in SSD and OSD] -Geometric Design of Hill Roads
    [IRC Standards Only]
    3. FLEXIBLE AND RIGID PAVEMENTS 9
    Rigid and Flexible Pavements- Components and their Functions -Design Principles of Flexible
    and Rigid Pavements, Factors affecting the Design of Pavements - ESWL, Climate, Sub-grade
    Soil and Traffic - Design Practice for Flexible Pavements [IRC Method and Recommendations-
    Problems] - Design Practice for Rigid Pavements – IRC Recommendations - concepts only.
    4. HIGHWAY MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION PRACTICE 9
    Desirable Properties and Testing of Highway Materials: Soil – California Bearing Ratio Test,
    Field Density Test - Aggregate - Crushing, Abrasion, Impact Tests, Water absorption, Flakiness
    and Elongation indices and Stone polishing value test - Bitumen - Penetration, Ductility, Viscosity,
    Binder content and Softening point Tests. - Construction Practice - Water Bound Macadam Road,
    Bituminous Road and Cement Concrete Road [as per IRC and MORTH specifications] - Highway
    Drainage [IRC Recommendations]
    5. HIGHWAY MAINTENANCE 9
    Types of defects in Flexible pavements – Surface defects, Cracks, Deformation, Disintegration –
    Symptoms, Causes and Treatments. - Types of Pavement, Failures in Rigid Pavements –
    Scaling, Shrinkage, Warping, Structural Cracks Spalling of Joints and Mud Pumping – and
    Special Repairs. - Pavement Evaluation – Pavement Surface Conditions and Structural
    Evaluation, Evaluation of pavement Failure and strengthening - Overlay design by Benkelman
    Beam Method [Procedure only],
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    11
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Khanna K and Justo C E G, Highway Engineering, Khanna Publishers, Roorkee, 2001.
    2. Kadiyali L R, Principles and Practice of Highway Engineering, Khanna Technical
    Publications, Delhi, 2000.
    REFERENCES
    1. Transportation Engineering & Planning, C.S. Papacostas, P.D. Prevedouros, Prentice
    Hall of India Pvt ltd, 2006.
    2. IRC Standards (IRC 37 - 2001 & IRC 58 -1998)
    3. Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS) Publications on Highway Materials
    4. Specifications for Road and Bridges, MORTH (India)
    12
    101451 STRENGTH OF MATERIALS LABORATORY 0 0 3 2
    OBJECTIVE
    The experimental work involved in this laboratory should make the student understand the
    fundamental modes of loading of the structures and also make measurements of loads,
    displacements and strains. Relating these quantities, the student should be able to obtain the
    strength of the material and stiffness properties of structural elements.
    LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
    1. Test involving axial compression to obtain the stress – strain curve
    2. Test involving axial tension to obtain the stress – strain curve and the strength
    3. Test involving torsion to obtain the torque vs. angle of twist and hence the
    stiffness
    4. Test involving flexure to obtain the load deflection curve and hence the stiffness
    5. Tests on springs
    6. Hardness tests
    7. Shear test
    8. Test for impact resistance
    9. Tests on Cement
    The student should learn the use of deflectometer, extensometer, compressometer and strain
    gauges.
    LIST OF EQUIPMENTS
    (For a batch of 30 students)
    Sl. No. Description of Equipments Quantity
    1. UTM of minimum 400 KN capacity 1
    2. Torsion testing machine for steel rods 1
    3. Izod impact testing machine 1
    4.
    Hardness testing machine
    Rockwell
    Vicker's (any 2)
    Brinnel
    1 each
    5. Beam deflection test apparatus 1
    6. Extensometer 1
    7. Compressometer 1
    8. Dial gauges Few
    9 Le Chatelier's apparatus 2
    10 Vicat's apparatus 2
    11 Mortar cube moulds 10
    13
    101452 HYDRAULIC ENGINEERING LAB 0 0 3 2
    OBJECTIVE
    Student should be able to verify the principles studied in theory by conducting the experiments.
    LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
    1. Determination of co-efficient of discharge for orifice
    2. Determination of co-efficient of discharge for notches
    3. Determination of co-efficient of discharge for venturimeter
    4. Determination of co-efficient of discharge for orifice meter
    5. Study of impact of jet on flat plate (normal / inclined)
    6. Study of friction losses in pipes
    7. Study of minor losses in pipes
    8. Study on performance characteristics of Pelton turbine.
    9. Study on performance characteristics of Francis turbine
    10. Study on performance characteristics of Kaplan turbine
    11. Study on performance characteristics of Centrifugal pumps (Constant speed / variable
    speed)
    12. Study on performance characteristics of reciprocating pump.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    LIST OF EQUIPMENTS
    1. Bernoulli's theorem – Verification Apparatus - 1 No.
    2. Calculation of Metacentric height
    water tank - 1 No.
    Ship model with accessories - 1 No.
    3. Measurement of velocity
    Pitot tube assembly - 1 No.
    4. Flow measurement
    open channel flow
    (i) Channel with provision for fixing notches
    (rectangular, triangular & trapezoidal forms) - 1 Unit
    (ii) Flume assembly with provisions for conducting
    experiments on Hydraulic jumps, generation of
    surges etc. - 1 Unit
    5. Flow measurement in pipes
    (i) Venturimeter, U tube manometer fixtures like
    Valves, collecting tank - 1 Unit
    (ii) Orifice meter, with all necessary fittings in
    pipe lines of different diameters - 1 Unit
    (iii) Calibration of flow through orifice tank with
    Provisions for fixing orifices of different shapes,
    collecting tank - 1 Unit
    (iv) Calibration of flow through mouth piece
    Tank with provisions for fixing mouth pieces
    Viz external mouth pieces & internal mouth piece
    Borda's mouth piece - 1 Unit
    6. Losses in Pipes
    14
    Major loss – Friction loss
    Pipe lengths (min. 3m) of different diameters with
    Valves and pressure rapping & collecting tank - 1 Unit
    Minor Losses
    Pipe line assembly with provisions for having
    Sudden contractions in diameter, expansions
    Bends, elbow fitting, etc. - 1 Unit
    7. Pumps
    (i) Centrifugal pump assembly with accessories
    (single stage) - 1 Unit
    (ii) Centrifugal pump assembly with accessories
    (multi stage) - 1 Unit
    (iii) Reciprocating pump assembly with accessories - 1 Unit
    (iv) Deep well pump assembly set with accessories - 1 Unit
    8. Turbine
    (i) Impulse turbine assembly with fittings
    & accessories - 1 Unit
    (ii) Francis turbine assembly with fittings
    & accessories - 1 Unit
    (iii) Kaplan turbine assembly with fittings
    & accessories - 1 Unit
    101453 SURVEY PRACTICAL II 0 0 4 2
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of the course the student will posses knowledge about Survey field techniques.
    1. Study of theodolite
    2. Measurement of horizontal angles by reiteration and repetition and vertical angles
    3. Theodolite survey traverse
    4. Heights and distances - Triangulation - Single plane method.
    5. Tacheometry - Tangential system - Stadia system - Subtense system.
    6. Setting out works - Foundation marking - Simple curve (right/left-handed) - Transition
    curve.
    7. Field observation for and Calculation of azimuth
    8. Field work using Total Station.
    TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
    AFFILIATED INSTITUTIONS
    ANNA UNIVERSITY OF TECHNOLOGY CHENNAI :: CHENNAI 600 113
    REGULATIONS 2010
    B.E. CIVIL ENGINEERING
    CURRICULA AND SYLLABI FOR V SEMESTER
    SEMESTER V
    (Applicable to the students admitted from the Academic year 2010 – 2011 onwards)
    Code No. Course Title L T P C
    THEORY
    101501 Irrigation Engineering 3 0 0 3
    101502 Structural Analysis I 3 1 0 4
    101503 Railways, Airport and Harbour Engineering 4 0 0 4
    101504 Environmental Engineering I 3 0 0 3
    101505 Foundation Engineering 3 0 0 3
    101506 Design of RC Elements 3 1 0 4
    PRACTICAL
    186551 Communication Skills Laboratory** 0 0 4 2
    101551 Concrete and Highway Engineering Lab 0 0 3 2
    101552 Soil Mechanics Laboratory 0 0 3 2
    TOTAL 19 2 10 27
    101501 IRRIGATION ENGINEERING L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of the semester, the student shall understand the need and mode of irrigation.
    The student also shall know the irrigation management practices of the past, present
    and future. The structures involved the elementary hydraulic design of different
    structures and the concepts of maintenance shall also form part. Finally, the student
    shall be in a position to conceive and plan any type of irrigation project.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
    Irrigation – Need and mode of irrigation – Merits and demerits of irrigation – Crop and
    crop seasons – consumptive use of water – Duty – Factors affecting duty – Irrigation
    efficiencies – Planning and Development of irrigation projects.
    UNIT II IRRIGATION METHODS 8
    Canal irrigation – Lift irrigation – Tank irrigation – Flooding methods – Merits and
    demerits – Sprinkler irrigation – Drip irrigation
    UNIT III DIVERSION AND IMPOUNDING STRUCTURES 10
    Weirs – elementary profile of a weir – weirs on pervious foundations - Types of
    impounding structures - Percolation ponds – Tanks, Sluices and Weirs – Gravity dams –
    Earth dams – Arch dams – Spillways – Factors affecting location and type of dams –
    Forces on a dam – Hydraulic design of dams.
    UNIT IV CANAL IRRIGATION 10
    Alignment of canals – Classification of canals – Canal drops – Hydraulic design of drops
    – Cross drainage works – Hydraulic design of cross drainage works – Canal Head works
    – Canal regulators – River Training works.
    UNIT V IRRIGATION WATER MANAGEMENT 8
    Need for optimisation of water use – Minimising irrigation water losses – On farm
    development works - Participatory irrigation management – Water users associations –
    Changing paradigms in water management – Performance evaluation.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Asawa, G.L., "Irrigation Engineering", New Age International Publishers, 2000
    2. Punima B.C. & Pande B.B .Lal Irrigation and Water Power Engineering, Laxmi
    Publishing, New Delhi 2007
    3. Michael, A.M, Irrigation Theory and Practical, Vikas Publishing Pvt Ltd, 2006
    4. Gupta, B.L, & Amir Gupta, "Irrigation Engineering", Satya Praheshan, New Delhi
    REFERENCES
    1. Dilip Kumar Majumdar, "Irrigation Water Management (Principles & Practices)",
    Prentice Hall of India (P), Ltd, 2000
    2. Basak, N.N, "Irrigation Engineering", Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co. New Delhi,
    1999
    3. Sharma R.K.. "Irrigation Engineering", S.Chand & Co. 2007.
    101505 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS I L T P C
    3 1 0 4
    OBJECTIVE
    The members of a structure are subjected to internal forces like axial forces, shearing
    forces, bending and torsional moments while transferring the loads acting on it.
    Structural analysis deals with analysing these internal forces in the members of the
    structures. At the end of this course students will be conversant with classical method of
    analysis.
    UNIT I DEFLECTION OF DETERMINATE STRUCTURES 12
    Principles of virtual work for deflections – Deflections of pin-jointed plane frames and
    rigid plane frames – Willot diagram - Mohr's correction
    UNIT II MOVING LOADS AND INFLUENCE LINES 12
    (DETERMINATE & INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES WITH
    REDUNDANCY RESTRICTED TO ONE)
    Influence lines for reactions in statically determinate structures – influence lines for
    members forces in pin-jointed frames – Influence lines for shear force and bending
    moment in beam sections – Calculation of critical stress resultants due to concentrated
    and distributed moving loads. Muller Breslau's principle – Influence lines for continuous
    beams and single storey rigid frames – Indirect model analysis for influence lines of
    indeterminate structures – Beggs deformeter
    UNIT III ARCHES 12
    Arches as structural forms – Examples of arch structures – Types of arches – Analysis
    of three hinged, two hinged and fixed arches, parabolic and circular arches – Settlement
    and temperature effects.
    UNIT IV SLOPE DEFLECTION METHOD 12
    Continuous beams and rigid frames (with and without sway) – Symmetry and
    antisymmetry – Simplification for hinged end – Support displacements
    UNIT V MOMENT DISTRIBUTION METHOD 12
    Distribution and carry over of moments – Stiffness and carry over factors – Analysis of
    continuous beams – Plane rigid frames with and without sway – Naylor's simplification.
    TUTORIAL: 15 TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Vaidyanadhan, R and Perumal, P, "Comprehensive Structural Analysis – Vol. 1 &
    Vol. 2", Laxmi Publications, New Delhi, 2003.
    2. L.S. Negi & R.S. Jangid, "Structural Analysis", Tata McGraw-Hill Publications,
    New Delhi, Sixth Edition, 2003.
    3. Punmia B.C., Theory of Structures (SMTS ) Vol II Laxmi Publishing Pvt ltd, New
    Delhi, 2004.
    4. BhavaiKatti, S.S, Structural Analysis – Vol. 1 & Vol. 2, Vikas Publishing Pvt Ltd.,
    New Delhi, 2008
    REFERENCE
    1. Analysis of Indeterminate Structures – C.K. Wang, Tata McGraw-Hill, 1992.
    101503 RAILWAYS, AIRPORTS AND HARBOUR ENGINEERING L T P C
    4 0 0 4
    OBJECTIVE
    This course imparts the student's knowledge of planning, design, construction and
    maintenance of railway tracks. The students acquire proficiency in the application of
    modern techniques such as GIS, GPS and remote sensing in Railway Engineering. The
    student develops skills on airport planning and design with the prime focus on runway
    and taxiway geometrics. Students become conversant with the definition, purpose,
    location and materials of coastal structures such as piers, breakwaters, wharves, jetties,
    quays and spring fenders. The students acquire knowledge on site reconnaissance for
    location and planning of harbours.
    UNIT I RAILWAY PLANNING AND DESIGN 12
    Role of Indian Railways in National Development – Railways for Urban Transportation –
    LRT & MRTS - Engineering Surveys for Track Alignment – Obligatory points -
    Conventional and Modern methods (Remote Sensing, GIS & GPS, EDM and other
    equipments) - Permanent Way, its Components and their Functions: Rails - Types of
    Rails, Rail Fastenings, Concept of Gauges, Coning of Wheels, Creeps and kinks -
    Sleepers – Functions, Materials, Density – Functions, Materials, Ballastless Tracks -
    Geometric Design of Railway Tracks – Gradients and Grade Compensation, Super-
    Elevation, Widening of Gauges in Curves, Transition Curves, Horizontal and Vertical
    Curves.
    UNIT II RAILWAY TRACK CONSTRUCTION, MAINTENANCE AND
    OPERATION 12
    Points and Crossings - Design of Turnouts, Working Principle - Signalling, Interlocking
    and Track Circuiting - Construction & Maintenance – Conventional, Modern methods
    and Materials, Track Drainage - Track Modernisation– Automated maintenance and
    upgrading, Re-laying of Track, Lay outs of Railway Stations and Yards, Rolling Stock,
    Tractive Power, Track Resistance, Level Crossings.
    UNIT III AIRPORT PLANNING AND DESIGN 12
    Role of Air Transport, Components of Airports - Airport Planning – Air traffic potential,
    Site Selection, Design of Components, Cost Estimates, Evaluation and Institutional
    arrangements Runway Design- Orientation, Cross wind Component, Wind rose Diagram
    (Problems), Geometric Design and Corrections for Gradients (Problems), Drainage -
    Taxiway Design – Geometric Design Elements, Minimum Separation Distances, Design
    Speed, Airport Drainage - Airport Zoning - Clear Zone, Approach Zone, Buffer Zone,
    Turning Zone, Clearance over Highways and Railways
    UNIT IV AIRPORT LAYOUTS, VISUAL AIDS, AND AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL 12
    Airport Layouts – Apron, Terminal Building, Hangars, Motor Vehicle Parking Area and
    Circulation Pattern, Case studies of Airport Layouts - Airport Buildings – Primary
    functions, Planning Concept, Principles of Passenger Flow, Passenger Facilities -
    Visual Aids – Runway and Taxiway Markings, Wind Direction Indicators, Runway and
    Taxiway Lightings - Air Traffic Control – Basic Actions, Air Traffic Control Network -
    Helipads, Hangars, Service Equipments.
    UNIT V HARBOUR ENGINEERING 12
    Definition of Terms - Harbours, Ports, Docks, Tides and Waves, Littoral Drift, Sounding,
    Area, Depth, Satellite Ports - Requirements and Classification of Harbours - Site
    Selection & Selection Investigation – Speed of water, Dredging, Range of Tides, Waves
    and Tidal Currents, Littoral Transport with Erosion and Deposition, Soundings,
    Anchoring Grounds, Geological Characteristics, Winds & Storms, Position and Size of
    Shoals - Shore Considerations- Proximity to Towns/Cities, Utilities, Construction
    Materials, Coast Lines - Dry and Wet Docks, Planning and Layouts - Entrance, Position
    of Light Houses, Navigating - Terminal Facilities – Port Buildings, Warehouse, Transit
    Sheds, Inter-modal Transfer Facilities, Mooring Accessories, Navigational Aids - Coastal
    Structures- Piers, Breakwaters, Wharves, Jetties, Quays, Spring Fenders - Coastal
    Shipping, Inland Water Transport and Container Transportation.
    TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Saxena Subhash C and Satyapal Arora, A Course in Railway Engineering,
    Dhanpat Rai and Sons, Delhi, 1998.
    2. Khanna S K, Arora M G and Jain S S, Airport Planning and Design, Nemchand
    and Brothers, Roorkee, 1994.
    3. S P Bindra, A Course in Docks and Harbour Engineering, Dhanpat Rai and Sons,
    New Delhi, 1993.
    REFERENCES
    1. Rangwala, Railway Engineering, Charotar Publishing House, 1995.
    2. Rangwala, Airport Engineering, Charotar Publishing House, 1996.
    3. Oza.H.P. and Oza.G.H., "A course in Docks & Harbour Engineering". Charotar
    Publishing Co.1976.
    4. J.S. Mundrey, "A course in Railway Track Engineering". Tata McGraw Hill, 2000.
    101504 ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING – I L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    To make the students conversant with principles of water supply, treatment and
    distribution
    UNIT I PLANNING FOR WATERSUPPLY SYSTEM 9
    Public water supply system -Planning -Objectives -Design period -Population forecasting
    -Water demand -Sources of water and their characteristics -Surface and Groundwater-
    Impounding Reservoir Well hydraulics -Development and selection of source - Water
    quality -Characterization -Water quality standards.
    UNIT II CONVEYANCE SYSTEM 9
    Water supply -intake structures -Functions and drawings -Pipes and conduits for water-
    Pipe materials -Hydraulics of flow in pipes -Transmission main design -Laying, jointing
    and testing of pipes -Drawings appurtenances - Types and capacity of pumps -Selection
    of pumps and pipe materials.
    UNIT III WATER TREATMENT 9
    Objectives -Unit operations and processes -Principles, functions design and drawing of
    Flash mixers, fiocculators, sedimentation tanks and sand filters -Disinfection- Residue
    Management.
    UNIT IV ADVANCED WATER TREATMENT 9
    Aerator- Iron and manganese removal, Defluoridation and demineralization -Water
    softening - Desalination -Membrane Systems -Construction and Operation &
    Maintenance aspects of Water Treatment Plants -Recent advances -Membrane
    Processes
    UNIT V WATER DISTRIBUTION AND SUPPLY TO BUILDINGS 9
    Requirements of water distribution -Components -Service reservoirs -Functions and
    drawings -Network design -Economics -Computer applications -Analysis of distribution
    networks -Appurtenances -operation and maintenance -Leak detection, Methods.
    Principles of design of water supply in buildings -House service connection -Fixtures and
    fittings -Systems of plumbing and drawings of types of plumbing.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Garg, S.K., Environmental Engineering, Vol.1 Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2005.
    2. Modi, P.N. Water Supply Engineering, Vol. I Standard Book House, New Delhi,
    2005.
    3. Punmia, B.C., Ashok K Jain and Arun K Jain, Water Supply Engineering, Laxmi
    Publications (P) Ltd., New Delhi, 2005
    REFERENCES
    1. Manual on Water Supply and Treatment, CPHEEO, Ministry of Urban Development,
    Government of India, New Delhi, 2003
    2. Syed R.Qasim and Edward M.Motley Guang Zhu, Water Works Engineering
    Planning, Design and Operation, Prentice Hall of India Private Limited, New Delhi –
    2006.
    101505 FOUNDATION ENGINEERING L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of this course student acquires the capacity to assess the soil condition at a
    given location in order to sugest suitable foundation and also gains the knowledge to
    design various foundations.
    UNIT I SITE INVESTIGATION AND SELECTION OF FOUNDATION 9
    Scope and objectives – Methods of exploration-auguring and boring – Water boring and
    rotatory drilling – Depth of boring – Spacing of bore hole - Sampling – Representative
    and undisturbed sampling – sampling techniques – Split spoon sampler, Thin tube
    sampler, Stationary piston sampler – Bore log report – Penetration tests (SPT and
    SCPT) – Data interpretation (Strength parameters and Liquefaction potential) –
    Selection of foundation based on soil condition.
    UNIT II SHALLOW FOUNDATION 9
    Introduction – Location and depth of foundation – codal provisions – bearing capacity of
    shallow foundation on homogeneous deposits – Terzaghi's formula and BIS formula –
    factors affecting bearing capacity – problems - Bearing Capacity from insitu tests (SPT,
    SCPT and plate load) – Allowable bearing pressure, Settlement – Components of
    settlement – Determination of settlement of foundations on granular and clay deposits –
    Allowable settlements – Codal provision – Methods of minimising settlement, differential
    settlement.
    UNIT III FOOTINGS AND RAFTS 9
    Types of foundation – Contact pressure distribution below footings and raft - Isolated
    and combined footings – Types and proportioning - Mat foundation– Types, applications uses
    and proportioning-- floating foundation.
    UNIT IV PILES 9
    Types of piles and their function – Factors influencing the selection of pile – Carrying
    capacity of single pile in granular and cohesive soil - Static formula - dynamic formulae
    (Engineering news and Hiley's) – Capacity from insitu tests (SPT and SCPT) – Negative
    skin friction – uplift capacity – Group capacity by different methods (Feld's rule,
    Converse Labarra formula and block failure criterion) – Settlement of pile groups –
    Interpretation of pile load test – Forces on pile caps – under reamed piles – Capacity
    under compression and uplift.
    UNIT V RETAINING WALLS 9
    Plastic equilibrium in soils – active and passive states – Rankine's theory – cohesionless
    and cohesive soil - Coloumb's wedge theory – condition for critical failure plane - Earth
    pressure on retaining walls of simple configurations – Graphical methods (Rebhann and
    Culmann) - pressure on the wall due to line load – Stability of retaining walls.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Murthy, V.N.S, "Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering", UBS Publishers
    Distribution Ltd, New Delhi, 1999.
    2. Gopal Ranjan and Rao, A.S.R. "Basic and Applied Soil Mechanics", Wiley
    Eastern
    Ltd., New Delhi (India), 2003.
    REFERENCES
    1. Das, B.M. "Principles of Foundation Engineering (Fifth edition), Thomson Books /
    COLE, 2003
    2. Bowles J.E, "Foundation analysis and design", McGraw-Hill, 1994
    3. Punmia, B.C., "Soil Mechanics and Foundations", Laxmi publications pvt. Ltd.,
    New Delhi, 1995.
    4. Venkatramaiah,C."Geotechnical Engineering", New Age International Publishers,
    New Delhi, 1995
    101506 DESIGN OF RC ELEMENTS L T P C
    3 1 0 4
    OBJECTIVE
    This course covers the different types of philosophies related to Design of Reinforced
    Concrete Structures with emphasis on Limit State Method. The design of Basic elements
    such as slab, beam, column and footing which form part of any structural system with
    reference to Indian standard code of practice for Reinforced Concrete Structures and
    Design Aids are included. At the end of course the student shall be in a position to
    design the basic elements of reinforced concrete structures.
    UNIT I METHODS OF DESIGN OF CONCRETE STRUCTURES 12
    Concept of Elastic method, ultimate load method and limit state method – Advantages of
    Limit State Method over other methods – Design codes and specification – Limit State
    philosophy as detailed in IS code – Design of flexural members and slabs by working
    stress method – Principles of Design of Liquid retaining structures – Properties of uncracked
    section – Calculation of thickness and reinforcement for Liquid retaining
    structure
    UNIT II LIMIT STATE DESIGN FOR FLEXURE 12
    Analysis and design of one way and two way rectangular slab subjected to uniformly
    distributed load for various boundary conditions and corner effects – Analysis and design
    of singly and doubly reinforced rectangular and flanged beams
    UNIT III LIMIT STATE DESIGN FOR BOND, ANCHORAGE SHEAR & TORSI12
    Behaviour of RC members in bond and Anchorage - Design requirements as per
    current code - Behaviour of RC beams in shear and torsion - Design of RC members for
    combined bending shear and torsion.
    UNIT IV LIMIT STATE DESIGN OF COLUMNS 12
    Types of columns – Braced and unbraced columns – Design of short column for axial,
    uniaxial and biaxial bending – Design of long columns.
    UNIT V LIMIT STATE DESIGN OF FOOTING AND DETAILING 12
    Design of wall footing – Design of axially and eccentrically loaded rectangular footing –
    Design of combined rectangular footing for two columns only – Standard method of
    detailing RC beams, slabs and columns – Special requirements of detailing with
    reference to erection process.
    TUTORIAL: 15 TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Varghese, P.C., "Limit State Design of Reinforced Concrete", Prentice Hall of
    India, Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi 2002.
    2. Krishna Raju, N., "Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures", CBS Publishers &
    Distributors, New Delhi,2003.
    REFERENCES
    1. Jain, A.K., "Limit State Design of RC Structures", Nemchand Publications,
    Rourkee
    2. Sinha, S.N., "Reinforced Concrete Design", Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing
    Company Ltd., New Delhi.
    3. Unnikrishna Pillai, S., Devdas Menon, "Reinforced Concrete Design", Tata
    McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi.
    186551 COMMUNICATION SKILLS LABORATORY L T P C
    (Fifth / Sixth Semester) 0 0 4 2
    Globalisation has brought in numerous opportunities for the teeming millions, with more
    focus on the students' overall capability apart from academic competence. Many
    students, particularly those from non-English medium schools, find that they are not
    preferred due to their inadequacy of communication skills and soft skills, despite
    possessing sound knowledge in their subject area along with technical capability.
    Keeping in view their pre-employment needs and career requirements, this course on
    Communication Skills Laboratory will prepare students to adapt themselves with ease to
    the industry environment, thus rendering them as prospective assets to industries. The
    course will equip the students with the necessary communication skills that would go a
    long way in helping them in their profession.
    OBJECTIVES
     To equip students of engineering and technology with effective speaking and
    listening skills in English.
     To help them develop their soft skills and interpersonal skills, which will make the
    transition from college to workplace smoother and help them excel in their job.
     To enhance the performance of students at Placement Interviews, Group
    Discussions and other recruitment exercises.
    A. ENGLISH LANGUAGE LAB (18 Periods)
    1. LISTENING COMPREHENSION: (6)
    Listening and typing – Listening and sequencing of sentences – Filling in the blanks -
    Listening and answering questions
    2. READING COMPREHENSION: (6)
    Filling in the blanks - Close exercises – Vocabulary building - Reading and answering
    questions.
    3. SPEAKING: (6)
    Phonetics: Intonation – Ear training - Correct Pronunciation – Sound recognition
    exercises – Common Errors in English.
    Conversations: Face to Face Conversation – Telephone conversation – Role play
    activities (Students take on roles and engage in conversation)
    I. PC based session (Weightage 40%) 24 periods
    B. DISCUSSION OF AUDIO-VISUAL MATERIALS (6 PERIODS)
    (Samples are available to learn and practice)
    1. RESUME / REPORT PREPARATION / LETTER WRITING (1)
    Structuring the resume / report - Letter writing / Email Communication - Samples.
    2. PRESENTATION SKILLS: (1)
    Elements of effective presentation – Structure of presentation - Presentation
    tools – Voice Modulation – Audience analysis - Body language – Video samples
    3. SOFT SKILLS: (2)
    Time management – Articulateness – Assertiveness – Psychometrics –
    Innovation and Creativity - Stress Management & Poise - Video Samples
    4. GROUP DISCUSSION: (1)
    Why is GD part of selection process? - Structure of GD – Moderator – led and
    other GDs - Strategies in GD – Team work - Body Language - Mock GD -Video
    samples
    5. INTERVIEW SKILLS: (1)
    Kinds of interviews – Required Key Skills – Corporate culture – Mock interviews-
    Video samples.
    1. Resume / Report Preparation / Letter writing: Students prepare their
    (3)
    Own resume and report.
    2. Presentation Skills: Students make presentations on given topics.
    (12)
    3. Group Discussion: Students participate in group discussions.
    (9)
    4. Interview Skills: Students participate in Mock Interviews
    (12)
    REFERENCES
    1. Anderson, P.V, Technical Communication, Thomson Wadsworth , Sixth
    Edition, New Delhi, 2007.
    2. Prakash, P, Verbal and Non-Verbal Reasoning, Macmillan India Ltd., Second
    II. Practice Session (Weightage – 60%) 36 periods
    Edition, New Delhi, 2004.
    3. John Seely, The Oxford Guide to Writing and Speaking, Oxford University
    Press, New Delhi, 2004.
    4. Evans, D, Decisionmaker, Cambridge University Press, 1997.
    5. Thorpe, E, and Thorpe, S, Objective English, Pearson Education,
    Second Edition, New Delhi, 2007.
    6. Turton, N.D and Heaton, J.B, Dictionary of Common Errors, Addision Wesley
    Longman Ltd., Indian reprint 1998.
    LAB REQUIREMENTS
    1. Teacher console and systems for students.
    2. English Language Lab Software
    3. Career Lab Software
    GUIDELINES FOR THE COURSE
    186551 COMMUNICATION SKILLS LABORATORY
    1. A batch of 60 / 120 students is divided into two groups – one group for the PCbased
    session and the other group for the Class room session.
    2. The English Lab (2 Periods) will be handled by a faculty member of the English
    Department. The Career Lab (2 Periods) may be handled by any competent
    teacher, not necessarily from English Department
    3. Record Notebook: At the end of each session of English Lab, review exercises
    are given for the students to answer and the computer evaluated sheets are to
    be compiled as record notebook. Similar exercises for the career lab are to be
    compiled in the record notebook.
    4. Internal Assessment: The 15 marks (the other 5 marks for attendance) allotted
    for the internal assessment will be based on the record notebook compiled by the
    candidate. 10 marks may be allotted for English Lab component and 5 marks for
    the Career Lab component.
    5. End semester Examination: The end-semester examination carries 40%
    weightage for English Lab and 60% weightage for Career Lab.
    Each candidate will have separate sets of questions assigned by the teacher
    using the teacher-console enabling PC–based evaluation for the 40% of marks
    allotted.
    The Career Lab component will be evaluated for a maximum of 60% by a
    local examiner & an external examiner drafted from other Institutions,
    similar to any other lab examination conducted by Anna University.
    101551 CONCRETE AND HIGHWAY ENGINEERING LAB L T P C
    0 0 3 2
    OBJECTIVE
    To learn the principles and procedures of testing Concrete and Highway materials
    I. TESTS ON FRESH CONCRETE
    1. Slump cone test
    2. Flow table
    3. Compaction factor
    4. Vee bee test.
    II. TESTS ON HARDENED CONCRETE
    1. Compressive strength - Cube & Cylinder
    2. Flexure test
    3. Modulus Of Elastics
    III. TESTS ON BITUMEN
    1. Penetration
    2. Softening Point
    3. Ductility
    4. Viscosity
    5. Elastic Recovery
    6. Storage Stability
    IV. TESTS ON AGGREGATES
    1. Stripping
    2. Soundness
    3. Proportioning of Aggregates
    4. Water Absorption
    V. TESTS ON BITUMINOUS MIXES
    1. Determination of Binder Content
    2. Marshall Stability and Flow values
    3. Specific Gravity
    4. Density.
    (EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS)
    SL.NO DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENTS QUANTITY
    1. Concrete cube moulds 6
    2. Concrete cylinder moulds 3
    3. Concrete Prism moulds 3
    4. Sieves 1set
    5. Concrete Mixer 1
    6. Slump cone 3
    7. Flow table 1
    8. Vibrator 1
    9. Trovels and planers 1 set
    10. UTM – 400 KN capacity 1
    11. Vee Bee Consistometer 1
    12. Aggregate impact testing machine 1
    13. CBR Apparatus 1
    14. Blains Apparatus 1
    101552 SOIL MECHANICS LABORATORY L T P C
    0 0 3 2
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of this course, the student acquires the capacity to test the soil to assess its
    Engineering and Index properties.
    1. Grain size distribution - Sieve analysis
    2. Grain size distribution - Hydrometer analysis
    3. Specific gravity of soil grains
    4. Relative density of sands
    5. Atterberg limits test
    6. Determination of moisture - Density relationship using standard Proctor test.
    7. Permeability determination (constant head and falling head methods)
    8. Determination of shear strength parameters.
    1. Direct shear test on cohesionless soil
    2. Unconfined compression test on cohesive soil
    3. Triaxial compression test (demonstration only)
    9. One dimensional consolidation test (Demonstration only)
    10. Field density test (Core cutter and sand replacement methods)
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    LIST OF EQUIPMENT
    (For a batch of 30 students)
    SL.NO. DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENTS QUANTITY
    1. Sieves 2 sets
    2. Hydrometer 2 sets
    3. Liquid and plastic limit apparatus 2 sets
    4. Shinkage limit apparatus 3 sets
    5. Proctor compaction apparatus 2 sets
    6. UTM of minimum of 20KN capacity 1
    7. Direct shear apparatus 1
    8. Thermeometer 2
    9. Field density measuring device 2
    10. Triaxial shear apparatus 1
    11. Three gang consolidation test device 1
    1
    AFFILIATED INSTITUTIONS
    ANNA UNIVERSITY OF TECHNOLOGY CHENNAI :: CHENNAI 600 113
    CURRICULUM 2010
    CURRICULA AND SYLLABI FOR VI SEMESTER
    B.E. CIVIL ENGINEERING
    SEMESTER VI
    Code No. Course Title L T P C
    THEORY
    188601 Principles of Management 3 0 0 3
    101601 Structural Analysis – II 3 1 0 4
    101602 Design of Steel Structures 3 1 0 4
    101603 Construction Planning & Scheduling 3 0 0 3
    101604 Environmental Engineering II 3 0 0 3
    E1 Elective – I 3 0 0 3
    PRACTICAL
    101651
    Environmental and Irrigation Engineering
    Drawing
    0 0 4 2
    101652 Environmental Engineering Laboratory 0 0 3 2
    101653 Survey Camp - - - 3
    TOTAL 18 2 7 27
    LIST OF ELECTIVES for B.E. CIVIL ENGINEERING
    SEMESTER VI
    Code No. Course Title L T P C
    101665 Hydrology 3 0 0 3
    101666 Cartography 3 0 0 3
    101667 Electronic Surveying 3 0 0 3
    101668 Remote Sensing Techniques and GIS 3 0 0 3
    101669 Architecture 3 0 0 3
    185665 Professional Ethics in Engineering 3 0 0 3
    185666 Total Quality Management 3 0 0 3
    185667 Fundamentals of Nanoscience 3 0 0 3
    185668 Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) 3 0 0 3
    185669 Indian Constitution and Society 3 0 0 3
    2
    188601 PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT L T P C
    (Common to all Branches) 3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    Knowledge on the principles of management is essential for all kinds of people in all kinds of
    organizations. After studying this course, students will be able to have a clear understanding of
    the managerial functions like planning, organizing, staffing, leading and controlling. Students will
    also gain some basic knowledge on international aspect of management.
    UNIT I HISTORICAL DEVELOPMENT 9
    Definition of Management – Science or Art – Management and Administration – Development of
    Management Thought – Contribution of Taylor and Fayol – Functions of Management – Types
    of Business Organisation.
    UNIT II PLANNING 9
    Nature & Purpose – Steps involved in Planning – Objectives – Setting Objectives – Process of
    Managing by Objectives – Strategies, Policies & Planning Premises- Forecasting – Decisionmaking.
    UNIT III ORGANISING 9
    Nature and Purpose – Formal and informal organization – Organization Chart – Structure and
    Process – Departmentation by difference strategies – Line and Staff authority – Benefits and
    Limitations – De-Centralization and Delegation of Authority – Staffing – Selection Process -
    Techniques – HRD – Managerial Effectiveness.
    UNIT IV DIRECTING 9
    Scope – Human Factors – Creativity and Innovation – Harmonizing Objectives – Leadership –
    Types of Leadership Motivation – Hierarchy of needs – Motivation theories – Motivational
    Techniques – Job Enrichment – Communication – Process of Communication – Barriers and
    Breakdown – Effective Communication – Electronic media in Communication.
    UNIT V CONTROLLING 9
    System and process of Controlling – Requirements for effective control – The Budget as Control
    Technique – Information Technology in Controlling – Use of computers in handling the
    information – Productivity – Problems and Management – Control of Overall Performance –
    Direct and Preventive Control – Reporting – The Global Environment – Globalization and
    Liberalization – International Management and Global theory of Management.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS:
    1. Harold Kooritz & Heinz Weihrich "Essentials of Management", Tata McGraw-Hill, 1998
    2. Joseph L Massie "Essentials of Management", Prentice Hall of India,
    (Pearson) Fourth Edition, 2003.
    REFERENCES
    1. Tripathy PC And Reddy PN, "Principles of Management", Tata McGraw-Hill, 1999.
    2. Decenzo David, Robbin Stephen A, "Personnel and Human Reasons Management",
    Prentice Hall of India, 1996
    3. JAF Stomer, Freeman R. E and Daniel R Gilbert Management, Pearson Education, Sixth
    Edition,2004.
    4. Fraidoon Mazda, "Engineering Management", Addison Wesley, 2000.
    3
    101601 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS – II L T P C
    3 1 0 4
    OBJECTIVE:
    This course is in continuation of Structural Analysis – Classical Methods. Here in advanced
    method of analysis like Matrix method and Plastic Analysis are covered. Advanced topics such
    as FE method and Space Structures are covered.
    UNIT I FLEXIBILITY METHOD 12
    Equilibrium and compatibility – Determinate vs Indeterminate structures – Indeterminacy -
    Primary structure – Compatibility conditions – Analysis of indeterminate pin-jointed plane
    frames, continuous beams, rigid jointed plane frames (with redundancy restricted to two).
    UNIT II STIFFNESS MATRIX METHOD 12
    Element and global stiffness matrices – Analysis of continuous beams – Co-ordinate
    transformations – Rotation matrix – Transformations of stiffness matrices, load vectors and
    displacements vectors – Analysis of pin-jointed plane frames and rigid frames( with redundancy
    vertical to two)
    UNIT III FINITE ELEMENT METHOD 12
    Introduction – Discretisation of a structure – Displacement functions – Truss element – Beam
    element – Plane stress and plane strain - Triangular elements
    UNIT IV PLASTIC ANALYSIS OF STRUCTURES 12
    Statically indeterminate axial problems – Beams in pure bending – Plastic moment of resistance
    – Plastic modulus – Shape factor – Load factor – Plastic hinge and mechanism – Plastic
    analysis of indeterminate beams and frames – Upper and lower bound theorems
    UNIT V SPACE AND CABLE STRUCTURES 12
    Analysis of Space trusses using method of tension coefficients – Beams curved in plan
    Suspension cables – suspension bridges with two and three hinged stiffening girders
    TUTORIAL: 15 TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1 Vaidyanathan, R. and Perumal, P., "Comprehensive structural Analysis – Vol. I & II",
    Laxmi Publications, New Delhi, 2003
    2 L.S. Negi & R.S. Jangid, "Structural Analysis", Tata McGraw-Hill Publications, New Delhi,
    2003.
    3 BhaviKatti, S.S, "Structural Analysis – Vol. 1 Vol. 2", Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.,
    New Delhi, 2008
    REFERENCES
    1. Ghali.A, Nebille,A.M. and Brown,T.G. "Structural Analysis" A unified classical and Matrix
    approach" –5th edition. Spon Press, London and New York, 2003.
    2. Coates R.C, Coutie M.G. and Kong F.K., "Structural Analysis", ELBS and Nelson, 1990
    3. Structural Analysis – A Matrix Approach – G.S. Pandit & S.P. Gupta, Tata McGraw Hill
    2004.
    4. Matrix Analysis of Framed Structures – Jr. William Weaver & James M. Gere, CBS
    Publishers and Distributors, Delhi.
    4
    101602 DESIGN OF STEEL STRUCTURES L T P C
    3 1 0 4
    OBJECTIVE:
    This course covers the design of structural steel members subjected to compressive, tensile
    and bending loads, as per current codal provisions (IS 800 - 2007) including connections.
    Design of structural systems such as roof trusses, gantry girders are included.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION 12
    Properties of steel – Structural steel sections – Limit State Design Concepts – Loads on
    Structures – Metal joining methods using rivets, welding, bolting – Design of bolted, riveted and
    welded joints – Eccentric connections - Efficiency of joints – High Tension bolts
    UNIT II TENSION MEMBERS 8
    Types of sections – Net area – Net effective sections for angles and Tee in tension – Design of
    connections in tension members – Use of lug angles – Design of tension splice – Concept of
    shear lag
    UNIT III COMPRESSION MEMBERS 16
    Types of compression members – Theory of columns – Basis of current codal provision for
    compression member design – Slenderness ratio – Design of single section and compound
    section compression members – Design of lacing and battening type columns – Design of
    column bases – Gusseted base
    UNIT IV BEAMS 12
    Design of laterally supported and unsupported beams – Built up beams – Beams subjected to
    biaxial bending – Design of plate girders riveted and welded – Intermediate and bearing
    stiffeners – Web splices – Design of beam columns
    UNIT V ROOF TRUSSES AND INDUSTRIAL STRUCTURES 12
    Roof trusses – Roof and side coverings – Design loads, design of purlin and elements of truss;
    end bearing – Design of gantry girder
    TUTORIAL: 15 TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Dayaratnam, P., "Design of Steel Structures", Second edition, S. Chand & Company, 2003.
    2. Ramachandra, S. and Virendra Gehlot, "Design of Steel Structures – Vol. I & II", Standard
    Publication, New Delhi, 2007
    REFERENCES
    1. "Teaching Resources for Structural Steel Design – Vol. I & II", INSDAG, Kolkatta.
    2. Gaylord, E.H., Gaylord, N.C., and Stallmeyer, J.E., "Design of Steel Structures", 3rd
    edition, McGraw-Hill Publications, 1992
    3. Negi L.S.. Design of Steel Structures, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Pvt Ltd, New Delhi,
    2007.
    4. IS 800-2007 Indian Standard General Construction in Steel – code of practice (3rd
    Revision).
    5
    101603 CONSTRUCTION PLANNING & SCHEDULING L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of this course the student is expected to have learnt how to plan construction
    projects, schedule the activities using network diagrams, determine the cost of the project,
    control the cost of the project by creating cash flows and budgeting and how to use the project
    information as an information and decision making tool.
    UNIT I CONSTRUCTION PLANNING 6
    Basic concepts in the development of construction plans-choice of Technology and Construction
    method-Defining Work Tasks- Definition- Precedence relationships among activities-Estimating
    Activity Durations-Estimating Resource Requirements for work activities-coding systems.
    UNIT II SCHEDULING PROCEDURES AND TECHNIQUES 12
    Relevance of construction schedules-Bar charts - The critical path method-Calculations for
    critical path scheduling-Activity float and schedules-Presenting project schedules-Critical path
    scheduling for Activity-on-node and with leads, Lags and Windows-Calculations for scheduling
    with leads, lags and windows-Resource oriented scheduling-Scheduling with resource
    constraints and precedences -Use of Advanced Scheduling Techniques-Scheduling with
    uncertain durations-Crashing and time/cost trade offs -Improving the Scheduling process –
    Introduction to application software.
    UNIT III COST CONTROL MONITORING AND ACCOUNTING 11
    The cost control problem-The project Budget-Forecasting for Activity cost control - financial
    accounting systems and cost accounts-Control of project cash flows-Schedule control-Schedule
    and Budget updates-Relating cost and schedule information.
    UNIT IV QUALITY CONTROL AND SAFETY DURING CONSTRUCTION 8
    Quality and safety Concerns in Construction-Organizing for Quality and Safety-Work and
    Material Specifications-Total Quality control-Quality control by statistical methods -Statistical
    Quality control with
    Sampling by Attributes-Statistical Quality control by Sampling and Variables-Safety.
    UNIT V ORGANIZATION AND USE OF PROJECT INFORMATION 8
    Types of project information-Accuracy and Use of Information-Computerized organization and
    use of Information -Organizing information in databases-relational model of Data bases-Other
    conceptual Models of Databases-Centralized database Management systems-Databases and
    application programs-Information transfer and Flow.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Chitkara, K.K. "Construction Project Management Planning", Scheduling and
    Control, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi, 1998.
    2. Srinath,L.S., "Pert and CPM Priniples and Applications ", Affiliated East West Press,
    2001
    6
    REFERENCES
    1. Chris Hendrickson and Tung Au, "Project Management for Construction – Fundamentals
    Concepts for Owners", Engineers, Architects and Builders, Prentice Hall, Pitsburgh,
    2000.
    2. Moder.J., C.Phillips and Davis, "Project Management with CPM", PERT and Precedence
    Diagramming, Van Nostrand Reinhold Co., Third Edition, 1983.
    3. Willis., E.M., "Scheduling Construction projects", John Wiley and Sons 1986.
    4. Halpin,D.W., "Financial and cost concepts for construction Management", John Wiley and
    Sons, New York, 1985.
    7
    101604 ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING II L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    To educate the students on the principles and design of Sewage Collection, Conveyance,
    treatment and disposal.
    UNIT I PLANNING FOR SEWERAGE SYSTEMS 9
    Sources of wastewater generation – Effects – Estimation of sanitary sewage flow – Estimation
    of storm runoff – Factors affecting Characteristics and composition of sewage and their
    significance – Effluent standards – Legislation requirements.
    UNIT II SEWER DESIGN 9
    Sewerage – Hydraulics of flow in sewers – Objectives – Design period - Design of sanitary and
    storm sewers – Small bore systems - Computer applications – Laying, joining & testing of
    sewers – appurtenances – Pumps – selection of pumps and pipe Drainage -. Plumbing System
    for Buildings – One pipe and two pipe system.
    UNIT III PRIMARY TREATMENT OF SEWAGE 9
    Objective – Unit Operation and Processes – Selection of treatment processes – Onsite
    sanitation - Septic tank, Grey water harvesting – Primary treatment – Principles, functions
    design and drawing of screen, grit chambers and primary sedimentation tanks – Operation and
    Mintenance aspects.
    UNIT IV SECONDARY TREATMENT OF SEWAGE 9
    Objective – Selection of Treatment Methods – Principles, Functions, Design and Drawing of
    Units - Activated Sludge Process and Trickling filter, other treatment methods – Oxidation
    ditches, UASB – Waste Stabilization Ponds – Reclamation and Reuse of sewage - Recent
    Advances in Sewage Treatment – Construction and Operation & Maintenance of Sewage
    Treatment Plants.
    UNIT V DISPOSAL OF SEWAGE AND SLUDGE 9
    Standards for Disposal - Methods – dilution – Self purification of surface water bodies – Oxygen
    sag curve – Land disposal – Sewage farming – Deep well injection – Soil dispersion system -
    Sludge characterization – Thickening – Sludge digestion – Biogas recovery – Sludge
    Conditioning and Dewatering – disposal – Advances in Sludge Treatment and disposal.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Garg, S.K., Environmental Engineering Vol. II, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2003.
    2. Punmia, B.C., Jain, A.K., and Jain.A., Environmental Engineering, Vol.II, Lakshmi
    Publications, Newsletter, 2005.
    REFERENCES
    1. Manual on Sewerage and Sewage Treatment, CPHEEO, Ministry of Urban
    Development, Government of India, New Delhi, 1997.
    2. Wastewater Engineering – Treatment and Reuse, Tata Mc.Graw-Hill Company, New
    Delhi, 2003.
    8
    101651 ENVIRONMENTAL AND IRRIGATION ENGINEERING DRAWING L T P C
    0 0 4 2
    UNIT I WATER SUPPLY AND TREATMENT 15
    Design & Drawing of flash mixer, flocculator, clarifier – Slow sand filter – Rapid sand filter –
    Infiltration gallery – Intake towers – Service reservoirs – Pumping station – House service
    connection for water supply and drainage.
    UNIT II SEWAGE TREATMENT & DISPOSAL 15
    Design and Drawing of screen chamber - Grit channel - Primary clarifier - Activated sludge
    process – Aeration tank & oxidation ditch – Trickling filters – Secondary clarifiers – Sludge
    digester – Sludge drying beds – Waste stabilisation ponds - Septic tanks and disposal
    arrangements – Manholes.
    UNIT III IMPOUNDING STRUCTURES 10
    Gravity dam, Tank Surplus Weir, Tank Sluice with tower road – Drawing showing plan,
    elevation, half section including foundation details.
    UNIT IV CANAL TRANSMISSION STRUCTURES 10
    Aqueducts – Syphon Aqueducts – Super passage – Canal siphon – Canal Drops- Drawing
    showing plan, elevation and foundation details.
    UNIT V CANAL REGULATION STRUCTURES 10
    Canal head works- Canal Regular – Canal escape- Proportional Distributors – Drawing showing
    detailed plan, elevation and foundation.
    TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Modi, P.N., "Environmental Engineering I & II", Standard Book House, Delhi – 6
    2. Sathyanarayana Murthy "Irrigation Design and Drawing" Published by Mrs
    L.Banumathi, Tuni east Godavari District. A.P. 1998.
    3. Sharma R.K. Irrigation Engineering and Hydraulic Structures Oxford and IBH Publishing
    co., New Delhi 2002.
    REFERENCES
    1. Peary, H.S., ROWE, D.R., Tchobanoglous, G., "Environmental Engineering",
    McGraw-Hill Book Co., New Delhi, 1995.
    2. Metcalf & Eddy, "Wastewater Engineering (Treatment and Reuse)", 4th edition, Tata
    McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2003.
    3. Garg S.K., "Irrigation Environmental Engineering and design StructuresI", Khanna
    Publishers, New Delhi, 17th Reprint, 2003.
    4. Manual on Water Supply and Treatment, CPHEEO, Government of India, New Delhi,
    1999
    5. Manual on Sewerage and Sewage Treatment, CPHEEO, Government of India, New
    Delhi, 1993.
    9
    101652 ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY L T P C
    0 0 3 2
    OBJECTIVE:
    This subject includes the list of experiments to be conducted for characterisation of water and
    municipal sewage. At the end of the course, the student is expected to be aware of the
    procedure for quantifying quality parameters for water and sewage.
    LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
    1. Sampling and preservation methods and significance of characterisation of water and
    wastewater.
    2. Determination of
    i) PH and turbidity
    ii) Hardness
    3. Determination of iron & fluoride
    4. Determination of residual chlorine
    5. Determination of Chlorides
    6. Determination of Ammonia Nitrogen
    7. Determination of Sulphate
    8. Determination of Optimum Coagulant Dosage
    9. Determination of available Chlorine in Bleaching powder
    10. Determination of dissolved oxygen
    11. Determination of suspended, volatile and fixed solids
    12. B.O.D. test
    13. C.O.D. test
    14. Introduction to Bacteriological Analysis (Demonstration only)
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    REFERENCES
    1. Standard methods for the examination of water and wastewater, APHA, 20th Edition,
    Washington, 1998
    2. Garg, S.K., "Environmental Engineering Vol. I & II", Khanna Publishers, New Delhi
    3. Modi, P.N., "Environmental Engineering Vol. I & II", Standard Book House, Delhi-6
    LIST OF EQUIPMENTS
    (For a batch of 30 students)
    1. PH meter - 1 no.
    2. Turbidity meter - 1 no.
    3. Conductivity meter - 1 No.
    4. Refrigerator - 1 No.
    5. BOD incubator - 1 No.
    6. Muffle furnace - 1 No.
    7. Hot air oven - 1 No.
    8. Magnetic stirrer with hot plates - 5 Nos.
    9. Desicator - 1 No.
    10. Jar test apparatus - 1 No.
    10
    11. Water bath - 1 No.
    12. Furniture - 1 lot
    13. Glass waves / Cruicibles - 1 lot
    14. Chemicals - 1 lot
    15. COD apparatus - 1 No.
    16. Kjeldane apparatus - 1 No.
    17. Heating mantles - 5 Nos.
    18. Calorimeter - 1 No.
    19. Chlorine comparator - 1 No.
    20. Furniture : Work table - 10 Nos.
    21. Beaker - 30 Nos.
    22. Standard flask - 30 Nos.
    23. Burette with stand - 15 Nos.
    24. Pipette - 15 Nos.
    25. Crucible - 15 Nos.
    26. Filtration assembly - 1 No.
    27. Chemicals - Lot
    11
    101653 SURVEY CAMP L T P C
    0 0 0 3
    Ten days survey camp using Theodolite, cross staff, levelling staff, tapes, plane table and total
    station. The camp must involve work on a large area of not less than 400 hectares. At the end of
    the camp, each student shall have mapped and contoured the area. The camp record shall include
    all original field observations, calculations and plots.
    (i) Triangulation
    (ii) Trilateration
    (iii) Sun / Star observation to determine azimuth
    (iv) Use of GTS to determine latitude and longitude
    EVALUATION PROCEDURE
    1. Internal Marks : 20 marks
    (decided by the staff in-charge appointed by the Institution)
    2. Evaluation of Survey Camp Report : 30 marks
    (Evaluated by the external examiner appointed the University)
    3. Viva voce examination : 50 marks
    (evaluated by the internal examiner appointed by the HOD
    with the approval of HOI and external examiner appointed by
    the University – with equal Weightage)
    Total : 100 marks
    12
    ELECTIVES
    101665 HYDROLOGY L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of the semester, the student shall be having a good understanding of all the
    components of the hydrological cycle. The mechanics of rainfall, its spatial and temporal
    measurement and their applications will be understood. Simple statistical analysis and
    application of probability distribution of rainfall and run off shall also be understood. Student will
    also learn simple methods of flood routing and ground water hydrology.
    UNIT I PRECIPITATION 9
    Hydrologic cycle – Types of precipitation – Forms of precipitation – Measurement of Rainfall –
    Spatial measurement methods – Temporal measurement methods – Frequency analysis of
    point rainfall – Intensity, duration, frequency relationship – Probable maximum precipitation.
    UNIT II ABSTRACTION FROM PRECIPITATION 9
    Losses from precipitation – Evaporation process – Reservoir evaporation – Infiltration process –
    Infiltration capacity – Measurement of infiltration – Infiltration indices – Effective rainfall.
    UNIT III HYDROGRAPHS 9
    Factors affecting Hydrograph – Baseflow separation – Unit hydrograph – Derivation of unit
    hydrograph – S curve hydrograph – Unit hydrograph of different deviations - Synthetic Unit
    Hydrograph
    UNIT IV FLOODS AND FLOOD ROUTING 9
    Flood frequency studies – Recurrence interval – Gumbel's method – Flood routing – Reservoir
    flood routing – Muskingum's Channel Routing – Flood control
    UNIT V GROUND WATER HYDROLOGY 9
    Types of aquifers – Darcy's law – Dupuit's assumptions – Confined Aquifer – Unconfined
    Aquifer – Recuperation test – Transmissibility – Specific capacity – Pumping test – Steady flow
    analysis only.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Subramanya, K., "Engineering Hydrology", Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co., Ltd., 2000
    2. Raghunath, H.M., "Hydrology", Wiley Eastern Ltd., 2000
    REFERENCES
    1. Chow, V.T. and Maidment, "Hydrology for Engineers", McGraw-Hill Inc., Ltd., 2000
    2. Singh, V.P., "Hydrology", McGraw-Hill Inc., Ltd., 2000.
    13
    101666 CARTOGRAPHY L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of the course the student will posses knowledge about Cartographic Concepts.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
    Cartography today - Nature of Cartography - History of Cartography - Graticules - Cartometry.
    UNIT II EARTH 9
    Earth-Map Relations - Basic Geodesy - Map Projections, Scale, Reference and Coordinate
    system - Transformation - Basic Transformation - Affin Transformation.
    UNIT III SOURCES OF DATA 9
    Sources of data - Ground Survey and Positioning - Remote Sensing data collection - Census
    and sampling - data - Models for digital cartographic information, Map digitizing.
    UNIT IV PERCEPTION AND DESIGN 9
    Cartographic design - Color theory and models - Color and pattern creation and specification -
    Color and pattern - Typography and lettering the map - Map compilation.
    UNIT V CARTOGRAPHY ABSTRACTION 9
    Selection and Generalisation Principles - Symbolisation - Topographic and thematic maps - Map
    production and Reproduction - Map series.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. R.W. ANSON and F.J. ORMELING, Basic Cartography for students and Technicians.
    Vol. I, II and III, Elsevrir Applied Science Publishers 2nd Edition, 1994.
    2. ARTHUR, H. ROBINSON Et al Elements of Cartography, Sixth Edition, John Wiley and
    Sons, 1995.
    3. John Campbell, Introductory Cartography Second Edition, 1994. Wm.C. Brown
    Publishers.
    4. M.J.Kraak and F.J. Ormeling, Cartography: Visualisation and spatial data. Prentice Hall
    – 1996.
    14
    101667 ELECTRONIC SURVEYING L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of the course the student will posses knowledge about Electronic surveying
    UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS 7
    Methods of measuring distance, historical development, basic principles of EDM, classifications,
    applications and comparison with conventional surveying.
    UNIT II BASIC ELETRONICS 8
    Fundamentals of electronics, resonant circuits, semiconductors, Lasers, Cathode ray tube,
    photo multiplier tube, transducers, oscillators, frequency mixing, modulation and demodulation,
    Kerrcell modulator, measurement of phase difference, reflectors and power sources.
    UNIT III PROPAGATION OF ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 11
    Definition, classification, applications, propagation properties, wave propagation at lower and
    higher frequencies. Refractive index, factors affecting, computation of group refractive index for
    light and near infrared waves at standard conditions and ambient conditions, reference
    refractive index, first velocity correction, computation of refractive index for microwaves,
    measurement of atmospheric parameters, mean refractive index, real time application of first
    velocity correction, second velocity correction and total atmospheric correction.
    UNIT IV ELECTROMAGNETIC DISTANCE MEASURING SYSTEM 11
    Electro-optical system, measuring principle, working principle, sources of error, infrared EDM
    instruments, Laser EDM instruments and total station. Microwave system, measuring principle,
    working principle, sources of error, microwave EDM instruments, comparison with Electrooptical
    system, care and maintenance of EDM instruments, Modern Positioning Systems. EDM
    traversing, trilateration and base line measurement using EDM.
    UNIT V FIELD STUDIES 8
    . Study o different EDM instruments and Total Station. EDM traversing, trilateration and base
    line measurement using EDM.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    REFERENCES
    1. Burnside, C.D. Electromagnetic distance measurement Crosby Lock wood staples, U.K.
    1971.
    2. Rueger, J.M. Electronic Distance Measurement, Springer-Verlag, Berlin, 1990.
    3. Laurila, S.H. Electronic Surveying in Practice, John Wiley and Sons Inc, 1983.
    4. Soastamoinen, J.J. Surveyor's guide to electro-magnetic Distance Measurement, Adam
    Hilger Ltd., 1967.
    15
    101668 REMOTE SENSING TECHNIQUES AND GIS L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    To introduce the students to the basic concepts and principles of various components of remote
    sensing. To provide an exposure to GIS and its practical applications in civil engineering.
    UNIT I EMR AND ITS INTERACTION WITH ATMOSPHERE & EARTH MATERIAL 9
    Definition of remote sensing and its components – Electromagnetic spectrum – wavelength
    regions important to remote sensing – Wave theory, Particle theory, Stefan-Boltzman and
    Wein's Displacement Law – Atmospheric scattering, absorption – Atmospheric windows –
    spectral signature concepts – typical spectral reflective characteristics of water, vegetation and
    soil.
    UNIT II PLATFORMS AND SENSORS 9
    Types of platforms – orbit types, Sun-synchronous and Geosynchronous – Passive and Active
    sensors – resolution concept – Pay load description of important Earth Resources and
    Meteorological satellites – Airborne and spaceborne TIR and microwave sensors.
    UNIT III IMAGE INTERPRETATION AND ANALYSIS 9
    Types of Data Products – types of image interpretation – basic elements of image interpretation
    - visual interpretation keys – Digital Image Processing – Pre-processing – image enhancement
    techniques – multispectral image classification – Supervised and unsupervised.
    UNIT IV GEOGRAPHIC INFORMATION SYSTEM 9
    Introduction – Maps – Definitions – Map projections – types of map projections – map analysis –
    GIS definition – basic components of GIS – standard GIS softwares – Data type – Spatial and
    non-spatial (attribute) data – measurement scales – Data Base Management Systems (DBMS).
    UNIT V DATA ENTRY, STORAGE AND ANALYSIS 9
    Data models – vector and raster data – data compression – data input by digitization and
    scanning – attribute data analysis – integrated data analysis – Modeling in GIS Highway
    alignment studies – Land Information System.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Lillesand, T.M., Kiefer, R.W. and J.W.Chipman. (2004). Remote Sensing and Image
    Interpretation. V Edn. John Willey and Sons (Asia) Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi. Pp:763.
    2. Anji Reddy, M. (2001). Textbook of Remote Sensing and Geographical
    Information System. Second edn. BS Publications, Hyderabad.
    REFERENCES
    1. Lo. C.P.and A.K.W.Yeung (2002). Concepts and Techniques of Geographic Information
    Systems. Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi. Pp:492.
    2. Peter A.Burrough, Rachael A.McDonnell (2000). Principles of GIS. Oxford University
    Press.
    3. Ian Heywood (2000). An Introduction to GIS. Pearson Education Asia.
    16
    101669 ARCHITECTURE L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    To provide the basic knowledge on the principles of design of buildings relating to the
    environment and climate.
    UNIT I ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN 8
    Architectural Design – an analysis – integration of function and aesthetics – Introduction to basic
    elements and principles of design.
    UNIT II SITE PLANNING 9
    Surveys – Site analysis – Development Control – Layout regulations- Layout design concepts.
    UNIT III BUILDING TYPES 12
    Residential, institutional, commercial and Industrial – Application of anthropometry and space
    standards-Inter relationships of functions – Safety standards – Building rules and regulations –
    Integration of building services – Interior design
    UNIT IV CLIMATE AND ENVIRONMENTAL RESPONSIVE DESIGN 8
    Man and environment interaction- Factors that determine climate – Characteristics of climate
    types – Design for various climate types – Passive and active energy controls – Green building
    concept
    UNIT V TOWN PLANNING 8
    Planning – Definition, concepts and processes- Urban planning standards and zoning
    regulations- Urban renewal – Conservation – Principles of Landscape design
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    REFERENCES
    1. Francis D.K. Ching, "Architecture: Form, Space and Order", VNR, N.Y., 1999.
    2. Givoni B., "Man Climate and Architecture", Applied Science, Barking ESSEX, 1982
    3. Edward D.Mills, "Planning and Architects Handbook", Butterworth London, 1995.
    4. Gallian B.Arthur and Simon Eisner, "The Urban Pattern – City Planning and Design",
    Affiliated Press Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 1995.
    5. Margaret Robert, "An Introduction to Town Planning Techniques", HutchinsoLondon ,
    1990.
    17
    185665 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS IN ENGINEERING L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    UNIT I ENGINEERING ETHICS 9
    Senses of ‘Engineering Ethics' – Variety of moral issues – Types of inquiry – Moral dilemmas –
    Moral Autonomy – Kohlberg's theory – Gilligan's theory – Consensus and Controversy –
    Professions and Professionalism – Professional Ideals and Virtues – Uses of Ethical Theories.
    UNIT II ENGINEERING AS SOCIAL EXPERIMENTATION 9
    Engineering as Experimentation – Engineers as responsible Experimenters – Research Ethics -
    Codes of Ethics – Industrial Standards - A Balanced Outlook on Law – The Challenger Case
    Study
    UNIT III ENGINEER'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR SAFETY 9
    Safety and Risk – Assessment of Safety and Risk – Risk Benefit Analysis – Reducing Risk –
    The Government Regulator's Approach to Risk - Chernobyl Case Studies and Bhopal
    UNIT IV RESPONSIBILITIES AND RIGHTS 9
    Collegiality and Loyalty – Respect for Authority – Collective Bargaining – Confidentiality –
    Conflicts of Interest – Occupational Crime – Professional Rights – Employee Rights –
    Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) - Discrimination
    UNIT V GLOBAL ISSUES 9
    Multinational Corporations – Business Ethics - Environmental Ethics – Computer Ethics - Role
    in Technological Development – Weapons Development – Engineers as Managers – Consulting
    Engineers – Engineers as Expert Witnesses and Advisors – Honesty – Moral Leadership –
    Sample Code of Conduct
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Mike Martin and Roland Schinzinger, "Ethics in Engineering", McGraw Hill, New York,
    2005.
    2. Charles E Harris, Michael S Pritchard and Michael J Rabins, "Engineering Ethics –
    Concepts and Cases", Thompson Learning, 2000.
    REFERENCES
    1. Charles D Fleddermann, "Engineering Ethics", Prentice Hall, New Mexico, 1999.
    2. John R Boatright, "Ethics and the Conduct of Business", Pearson Education, 2003
    3. Edmund G Seebauer and Robert L Barry, "Fundamentals of Ethics for Scientists and
    Engineers", Oxford University Press, 2001.
    4. Prof. (Col) P S Bajaj and Dr. Raj Agrawal, "Business Ethics – An Indian
    Perspective", Biztantra, New Delhi, 2004.
    5. David Ermann and Michele S Shauf, "Computers, Ethics and Society", Oxford
    University Press, (2003).
    18
    185666 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
    Introduction - Need for quality - Evolution of quality - Definition of quality - Dimensions of
    manufacturing and service quality - Basic concepts of TQM - Definition of TQM – TQM
    Framework - Contributions of Deming, Juran and Crosby – Barriers to TQM.
    UNIT II TQM PRINCIPLES 9
    Leadership – Strategic quality planning, Quality statements - Customer focus – Customer
    orientation, Customer satisfaction, Customer complaints, Customer retention - Employee
    involvement – Motivation, Empowerment, Team and Teamwork, Recognition and Reward,
    Performance appraisal - Continuous process improvement – PDSA cycle, 5s, Kaizen - Supplier
    partnership – Partnering, Supplier selection, Supplier Rating.
    UNIT III TQM TOOLS & TECHNIQUES I 9
    The seven traditional tools of quality – New management tools – Six-sigma: Concepts,
    methodology, applications to manufacturing, service sector including IT – Bench marking –
    Reason to bench mark, Bench marking process – FMEA – Stages, Types.
    UNIT IV TQM TOOLS & TECHNIQUES II 9
    Quality circles – Quality Function Deployment (QFD) – Taguchi quality loss function – TPM –
    Concepts, improvement needs – Cost of Quality – Performance measures.
    UNIT V QUALITY SYSTEMS 9
    Need for ISO 9000- ISO 9000-2000 Quality System – Elements, Documentation, Quality
    auditing- QS 9000 – ISO 14000 – Concepts, Requirements and Benefits – Case studies of TQM
    implementation in manufacturing and service sectors including IT.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOK
    1. Dale H.Besterfiled, et at., "Total Quality Management", Pearson Education Asia,
    3rd Edition, Indian Reprint (2006).
    REFERENCES
    1. James R. Evans and William M. Lindsay, "The Management and Control of Quality", 6th
    Edition, South-Western (Thomson Learning), 2005.
    2. Oakland, J.S., "TQM – Text with Cases", Butterworth – Heinemann Ltd., Oxford, 3rd
    Edition, 2003.
    3. Suganthi,L and Anand Samuel, "Total Quality Management", Prentice Hall (India) Pvt.
    Ltd.,2006.
    4. Janakiraman, B and Gopal, R.K, "Total Quality Management – Text and Cases",
    Prentice Hall (India) Pvt. Ltd., 2006.
    19
    185667 FUNDAMENTALS OF NANOSCIENCE L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION 10
    Nanoscale Science and Technology- Implications for Physics, Chemistry, Biology and
    Engineering-Classifications of nanostructured materials- nano particles- quantum dots,
    nanowires-ultra-thinfilms-multilayered materials. Length Scales involved and effect on
    properties: Mechanical, Electronic, Optical, Magnetic and Thermal properties. Introduction to
    properties and motivation for study (qualitative only).
    UNIT II PREPARATION METHODS 10
    Bottom-up Synthesis-Top-down Approach: Precipitation, Mechanical Milling, Colloidal routes,
    Self-assembly, Vapour phase deposition, MOCVD, Sputtering, Evaporation, Molecular Beam
    Epitaxy, Atomic Layer Epitaxy, MOMBE.
    UNIT III PATTERNING AND LITHOGRAPHY FOR NANOSCALE DEVICES 5
    Introduction to optical/UV electron beam and X-ray Lithography systems and processes, Wet
    etching, dry (Plasma /reactive ion) etching, Etch resists-dip pen lithography
    UNIT IV PREPARATION ENVIRONMENTS 10
    Clean rooms: specifications and design, air and water purity, requirements for particular
    processes, Vibration free environments: Services and facilities required. Working practices,
    sample cleaning, Chemical purification, chemical and biological contamination, Safety issues,
    flammable and toxic hazards, biohazards.
    UNIT V CHARECTERISATION TECHNIQUES 10
    X-ray diffraction technique, Scanning Electron Microscopy - environmental techniques,
    Transmission Electron Microscopy including high-resolution imaging, Surface Analysis
    techniques- AFM, SPM, STM, SNOM, ESCA, SIMS-Nanoindentation
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. A.S. Edelstein and R.C. Cammearata, eds., "Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties and
    Applications", Institute of Physics Publishing, Bristol and Philadelphia, 1996.
    2. N John Dinardo, "Nanoscale charecterisation of surfaces & Interfaces", 2nd edition,
    Weinheim Cambridge, Wiley-VCH, 2000
    REFERENCES
    1. G Timp (Editor), "Nanotechnology", AIP press/Springer, 1999.
    2. Akhlesh Lakhtakia (Editor), "The Hand Book of Nano Technology, Nanometer Structure,
    Theory, Modeling and Simulations". Prentice-Hall of India (P) Ltd, New Delhi, 2007.
    20
    185668 INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS (IPR) L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    UNIT I 5
    Introduction – Invention and Creativity – Intellectual Property (IP) – Importance – Protection of
    IPR – Basic types of property (i. Movable Property ii. Immovable Property and iii. Intellectual
    Property).
    UNIT II 10
    IP – Patents – Copyrights and related rights – Trade Marks and rights arising from Trademark
    registration – Definitions – Industrial Designs and Integrated circuits – Protection of
    Geographical Indications at national and International levels – Application Procedures.
    UNIT III 10
    International convention relating to Intellectual Property – Establishment of WIPO – Mission and
    Activities – History – General Agreement on Trade and Tariff (GATT).
    UNIT IV 10
    Indian Position Vs WTO and Strategies – Indian IPR legislations – commitments to WTO-Patent
    Ordinance and the Bill – Draft of a national Intellectual Property Policy – Present against unfair
    competition.
    UNIT V 10
    Case Studies on – Patents (Basumati rice, turmeric, Neem, etc.) – Copyright and related rights
    – Trade Marks – Industrial design and Integrated circuits – Geographic indications – Protection
    against unfair competition.
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Subbaram N.R. " Handbook of Indian Patent Law and Practice ", S. Viswanathan
    (Printers and Publishers) Pvt. Ltd., 1998.
    REFERENCES
    1. Eli Whitney, United States Patent Number : 72X, Cotton Gin, March 14, 1794.
    2. Intellectual Property Today : Volume 8, No. 5, May 2001, [www.iptoday.com].
    3. Using the Internet for non-patent prior art searches, Derwent IP Matters, July 2000.
    [Error 404 - Not Found - IP & Science - Thomson Reuters.
    21
    185669 INDIAN CONSTITUTION AND SOCIETY L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    UNIT I 9
    Historical Background – Constituent Assembly of India – Philosophical foundations of the Indian
    Constitution – Preamble – Fundamental Rights – Directive Principles of State Policy –
    Fundamental Duties – Citizenship – Constitutional Remedies for citizens.
    UNIT II 9
    Union Government – Structures of the Union Government and Functions – President – Vice
    President – Prime Minister – Cabinet – Parliament – Supreme Court of India – Judicial Review.
    UNIT III 9
    State Government – Structure and Functions – Governor – Chief Minister – Cabinet –
    State Legislature – Judicial System in States – High Courts and other Subordinate Courts.
    UNIT IV 9
    Indian Federal System – Center – State Relations – President's Rule – Constitutional
    Amendments – Constitutional Functionaries - Assessment of working of the Parliamentary
    System in India.
    UNIT V 9
    Society : Nature, Meaning and definition; Indian Social Structure; Castle, Religion, Language in
    India; Constitutional Remedies for citizens – Political Parties and Pressure Groups; Right of
    Women, Children and Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes and other Weaker Sections.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Durga Das Basu, " Introduction to the Constitution of India ", Prentice Hall of India,
    New Delhi.
    2. R.C.Agarwal, " (1997) Indian Political System ", S.Chand and Company, New Delhi.
    3. Maciver and Page, " Society: An Introduction Analysis ", Mac Milan India Ltd.,
    New Delhi.
    4. K.L.Sharma, " (1997) Social Stratification in India: Issues and Themes ", Jawaharlal
    Nehru University, New Delhi.
    REFERENCES
    1. Sharma, Brij Kishore, " Introduction to the Constitution of India:, Prentice Hall of India,
    New Delhi.
    2. U.R.Gahai, " (1998) Indian Political System ", New Academic Publishing House,
    Jalaendhar.
    3. R.N. Sharma, " Indian Social Problems ", Media Promoters and Publishers Pvt. Ltd.
    4. Yogendra Singh, " (1997) Social Stratification and Charge in India ", Manohar,
    New Delhi.
    1
    AFFILIATED INSTITUTIONS
    ANNA UNIVERSITY OF TECHNOLOGY CHENNAI :: CHENNAI 600 113
    REGULATIONS 2010
    CURRICULA AND SYLLABI FOR VII SEMESTER
    B.E. CIVIL ENGINEERING
    SEMESTER VII
    Code No. Course Title L T P C
    THEORY
    101701 Design of RC and Brick Masonry Structures 3 1 0 4
    101702 Estimation and Quantity Surveying 3 0 0 3
    101703 Basics of Dynamics and Aseismic Design 3 0 0 3
    101704 Prestressed Concrete Structures 3 0 0 3
    E2 Elective – II 3 0 0 3
    E3 Elective – III 3 0 0 3
    PRACTICAL
    101751
    Computer Aided Design and Drafting
    Laboratory
    0 0 4 2
    101752 Design Project 0 0 4 2
    TOTAL 18 1 8 23
    2
    LIST OF ELECTIVES for B.E. CIVIL ENGINEERING
    SEMESTER VII
    Code No. Course Title L T P C
    101765 Traffic Engineering Management 3 0 0 3
    101766 Housing Planning & Management 3 0 0 3
    101767 Ground Water Engineering 3 0 0 3
    101768 Management of Irrigation Systems 3 0 0 3
    101769 Coastal Zone Management 3 0 0 3
    101770 Water Resources Engineering 3 0 0 3
    101771 Pavement Engineering 3 0 0 3
    101772 Ground Improvement Techniques 3 0 0 3
    101773
    Introduction to Soil Dynamics and Machine
    Foundations
    3 0 0 3
    101774 Rock Engineering 3 0 0 3
    101775
    Environmental Impact Assessment of Civil
    Engineering Projects
    3 0 0 3
    101776 Industrial Waste Management 3 0 0 3
    101777 Air Pollution Management 3 0 0 3
    101778 Municipal Solid Waste and Management 3 0 0 3
    101779 Ecological Engineering 3 0 0 3
    185765 Contract Laws and Regulations 3 0 0 3
    SEMESTER VIII
    Code No. Course Title L T P C
    101865 Bridge Structures 3 0 0 3
    101866 Storage Structures 3 0 0 3
    101867 Design of Plate and Shell Structures 3 0 0 3
    101868 Tall Buildings 3 0 0 3
    101869 Prefabricated structures 3 0 0 3
    101870 Wind Engineering 3 0 0 3
    101871 Computer Aided Design of Structures 3 0 0 3
    101872 Industrial Structures 3 0 0 3
    101873 Smart Structures and smart Materials 3 0 0 3
    101874 Finite Element Techniques 3 0 0 3
    101875 Repair and Rehabilitation of Structures 3 0 0 3
    3
    101701 DESIGN OF REINFORCED CONCRETE & BRICK MASONRY STRUCTURES
    L T P C
    3 1 0 4
    OBJECTIVE:
    This course covers the design of Reinforced Concrete Structures such as Retaining Wall, Water
    Tanks, Staircases, Flat slabs and Principles of design pertaining to Box culverts, Mat foundation
    and Bridges. At the end of the course student has a comprehensive design knowledge related
    to structures, systems that are likely to be encountered in professional practice.
    UNIT I RETAINING WALLS 12
    Design of cantilever and counter fort retaining walls
    UNIT II WATER TANKS 12
    Underground rectangular tanks – Domes – Overhead circular and rectangular tanks – Design of
    staging and foundations
    UNIT III SELECTED TOPICS 12
    Design of staircases (ordinary and doglegged) – Design of flat slabs – Design of Reinforced
    concrete walls – Principles of design of mat foundation, box culvert and road bridges
    UNIT IV YIELD LINE THEORY 12
    Application of virtual work method to square, rectangular, circular and triangular slabs
    UNIT V BRICK MASONRY 12
    Introduction, Classification of walls, Lateral supports and stability, effective height of wall and
    columns, effective length of walls, design loads, load dispersion, permissible stresses, design of
    axially and eccentrically loaded brick walls
    TUTORIAL: 15 TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Krishna Raju, N., "Design of RC Structures", CBS Publishers and Distributors, Delhi,
    2006
    2. Dayaratnam, P., "Brick and Reinforced Brick Structures", Oxford & IBH Publishing
    House, 1997
    3. Varghese, P.C., "Limit State Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures "Prentice hall of
    India Pvt Ltd New Delhi, 2007.
    REFERENCES
    1. Mallick, D.K. and Gupta A.P., "Reinforced Concrete", Oxford and IBH Publishing
    Company
    2. Syal, I.C. and Goel, A.K., "Reinforced Concrete Structures", A.H. Wheelers & Co. Pvt.
    Ltd., 1994
    3. Ram Chandra.N. and Virendra Gehlot, "Limit State Design", Standard Book House.2004.
    4
    101702 ESTIMATION AND QUANTITY SURVEYING L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE:
    This subject covers the various aspects of estimating of quantities of items of works involved in
    buildings, water supply and sanitary works, road works and irrigation works. This also covers
    the rate analysis, valuation of properties and preparation of reports for estimation of various
    items. At the end of this course the student shall be able to estimate the material quantities,
    prepare a bill of quantities, make specifications and prepare tender documents. Student should
    also be able to prepare value estimates.
    UNIT I ESTIMATE OF BUILDINGS 11
    Load bearing and framed structures – Calculation of quantities of brick work, RCC, PCC,
    Plastering, white washing, colour washing and painting / varnishing for shops, rooms, residential
    building with flat and pitched roof – Various types of arches – Calculation of brick work and RCC
    works in arches – Estimate of joineries for panelled and glazed doors, windows, ventilators,
    handrails etc.
    UNIT II ESTIMATE OF OTHER STRUCTURES 10
    Estimating of septic tank, soak pit – sanitary and water supply installations – water supply pipe
    line – sewer line – tube well – open well – estimate of bituminous and cement concrete roads –
    estimate of retaining walls – culverts – estimating of irrigation works – aqueduct, syphon, fall.
    UNIT III SPECIFICATION AND TENDERS 8
    Data – Schedule of rates – Analysis of rates – Specifications – sources – Detailed and general
    specifications – Tenders – Contracts – Types of contracts – Arbitration and legal requirements.
    UNIT IV VALUATION 8
    Necessity – Basics of value engineering – Capitalised value – Depreciation – Escalation – Value
    of building – Calculation of Standard rent – Mortgage – Lease
    UNIT V REPORT PREPARATION 8
    Principles for report preparation – report on estimate of residential building – Culvert – Roads –
    Water supply and sanitary installations – Tube wells – Open wells.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Dutta, B.N., "Estimating and Costing in Civil Engineering", UBS Publishers & Distributors
    Pvt. Ltd., 2003
    2. Kohli, D.D and Kohli, R.C., "A Text Book of Estimating and Costing (Civil)", S.Chand &
    Company Ltd., 2004
    REFERENCES
    1. PWD Data Book.
    5
    101703 BASICS OF DYNAMICS AND ASEISMIC DESIGN L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE:
    The main objective of this course is to introduce to the student the phenomena of earthquakes,
    the process, measurements and the factors that affect the design of structures in seismic areas.
    This objective is achieved through imparting rudiments of theory of vibrations necessary to
    understand and analyse the dynamic forces caused by earthquakes and structures. Further, the
    student is also taught the codal provisions as well as the aseismic design methodology.
    UNIT I THEORY OF VIBRATIONS 9
    Concept of inertia and damping – Types of Damping – Difference between static forces and
    dynamic excitation – Degrees of freedom – SDOF idealisation – Equations of motion of SDOF
    system for mass as well as base excitation – Free vibration of SDOF system – Response to
    harmonic excitation – Impulse and response to unit impulse – Duhamel integral
    UNIT II MULTIPLE DEGREE OF FREEDOM SYSTEM 9
    Two degree of freedom system – Normal modes of vibration – Natural frequencies - Mode
    shapes - Introduction to MDOF systems – Decoupling of equations of motion – Concept of
    mode superposition (No derivations).
    UNIT III ELEMENTS OF SEISMOLOGY 9
    Causes of Earthquake – Geological faults – Tectonic plate theory – Elastic rebound – Epicentre
    – Hypocentre – Primary, shear and Raleigh waves – Seismogram – Magnitude and intensity of
    earthquakes – Magnitude and Intensity scales – Spectral Acceleration - Information on some
    disastrous earthquakes
    UNIT IV RESPONSE OF STRUCTURES TO EARTHQUAKE 9
    Response and design spectra – Design earthquake – concept of peak acceleration – Site
    specific response spectrum – Effect of soil properties and damping – Liquefaction of soils –
    Importance of ductility – Methods of introducing ductility into RC structures.
    UNIT V DESIGN METHODOLOGY 9
    IS 1893, IS 13920 and IS 4326 – Codal provisions – Design as per the codes – Base isolation
    techniques – Vibration control measures – Important points in mitigating effects of earthquake
    on structures.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Chopra, A.K., "Dynamics of Structures – Theory and Applications to Earthquake
    Engineering", Second Edition, Pearson Education, 2003.
    REFERENCES
    1. Biggs, J.M., "Introduction to Structural Dynamics", McGraw–Hill Book Co., N.Y., 1964
    2. Dowrick, D.J., "Earthquake Resistant Design", John Wiley & Sons, London, 1977
    3. Paz, M., "Structural Dynamics – Theory & Computation", CSB Publishers & Distributors,
    Shahdara, Delhi, 1985
    4. NPEEE Publications.
    6
    101704 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE STRUCTURE L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of this course the student shall have a knowledge of methods of prestressing,
    advantages of prestressing concrete, the losses involved and the design methods for
    prestressed concrete elements under codal provisions.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION – THEORY AND BEHAVIOUR 9
    Basic concepts – Advantages – Materials required – Systems and methods of prestressing –
    Analysis of sections – Stress concept – Strength concept – Load balancing concept – Effect of
    loading on the tensile stresses in tendons – Effect of tendon profile on deflections – Factors
    influencing deflections – Calculation of deflections – Short term and long term deflections -
    Losses of prestress – Estimation of crack width
    UNIT II DESIGN CONCEPTS 9
    Flexural strength – Simplified procedures as per codes – strain compatibility method – Basic
    concepts in selection of cross section for bending – stress distribution in end block, Design of
    anchorage zone reinforcement – Limit state design criteria – Partial prestressing – Applications.
    UNIT III CIRCULAR PRESTRESSING 9
    Design of prestressed concrete tanks – Pipes
    UNIT IV COMPOSITE CONSTRUCTION 9
    Analysis for stresses – Estimate for deflections – Flexural and shear strength of composite
    members
    UNIT V PRE-STRESSED CONCRETE BRIDGES 9
    General aspects – pretensioned prestressed bridge decks – Post tensioned prestressed bridge
    decks – Principles of design only.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Krishna Raju N., Prestressed concrete, Tata McGraw Hill Company, New Delhi 1998
    2. Mallic S.K. and Gupta A.P., Prestressed concrete, Oxford and IBH publishing Co. Pvt.
    Ltd. 1997.
    3. Rajagopalan, N, "Prestressed Concrete", Alpha Science, 2002
    REFERENCES
    1. Ramaswamy G.S., Modern prestressed concrete design, Arnold Heinimen, New Delhi,
    1990
    2. Lin T.Y. Design of prestressed concrete structures, Asia Publishing House, Bombay
    1995.
    3. David A.Sheppard, William R. and Philips, Plant Cast precast and prestressed concrete
    – A design guide, McGraw Hill, New Delhi 1992.
    7
    101751 COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN & DRAFTING LABORATORY L T P C
    0 0 4 2
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of the course the student acquires hands on experience in design and preparation of
    structural drawings for concrete / steel structures normally encountered in Civil Engineering
    practice.
    1. Design and drawing of RCC cantilever and counterfort type retaining walls with
    reinforcement details
    2. Design of solid slab and RCC Tee beam bridges for IRC loading and reinforcement
    details
    3. Design and drafting of Intz type water tank, Detailing of circular and rectangular water
    tanks
    4. Design of plate girder bridge – Twin Girder deck type railway bridge – Truss Girder
    bridges – Detailed Drawings including connections
    TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Krishna Raju, "Structural Design & Drawing (Concrete & Steel)", CBS Publishers 2004.
    2. Punmia, B.C., Ashok Kumar Jain, Arun Kumar Jain, "Design of steel structures",
    Lakshmi publications Pvt. Ltd 2003.
    REFERENCES
    1. Krishnamurthy, D., "Structural Design & Drawing – Vol. II", CBS Publishers &
    Distributors, Delhi 1992.
    2. Krishnamurthy, D., "Structural Design & Drawing – Vol. III Steel Structures", CBS
    Publishers & Distributors, New Delhi 1992.
    EXAMINATION DURATION 4 HOURS
    LIST OF EQUIPMENTS
    1. 1. Models of Structures - 1 each.
    2. Computers Pentium IV - 30 Nos.
    3. Analysis and Design Software
    - Minimum 5 user License - 1 No.
    4. Auto CAD Software
    - Multi user License - 1 No.
    8
    101752 DESIGN PROJECT L T P C
    0 0 4 2
    OBJECTIVE
    The objective of this course is to impart and improve the design capability of the student. This
    course conceives purely a design problem in any one of the disciplines of Civil Engineering;
    e.g., Design of an RC structure, Design of a waste water treatment plant, Design of a foundation
    system, Design of traffic intersection etc. The design problem can be allotted to either an
    individual student or a group of students comprising of not more than four. At the end of the
    course the group should submit a complete report on the design problem consisting of the data
    given, the design calculations, specifications if any and complete set of drawings which follow
    the design.
    TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
    EVALUATION PROCEDURE
    The method of evaluation will be as follows:
    1. Internal Marks : 20 marks
    (Decided by conducting 3 reviews by the guide appointed by the
    Institution)
    2. Evaluation of Project Report : 30 marks
    (Evaluated by the external examiner appointed the University).
    Every student belonging to the same group gets the same mark
    3. Viva voce examination : 50 marks
    (Evaluated by the internal examiner appointed by the HOD with the
    approval of HOI, external examiner appointed by the University and
    Guide of the course – with equal Weightage)
    Total: 100 marks
    9
    101765 TRAFFIC ENGINEERING AND MANAGEMENT L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    The students acquire comprehensive knowledge of traffic surveys and studies such as ‘Volume
    Count', ‘Speed and delay', ‘Origin and destination', ‘Parking', ‘Pedestrian' and ‘Accident
    surveys'. They achieve knowledge on design of ‘at grade' and ‘grade separated' intersections.
    They also become familiar with various traffic control and traffic management measures.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
    Significance and scope, Characteristics of Vehicles and Road Users, Skid Resistance and
    Braking Efficiency (Problems), Components of Traffic Engineering- Road, Traffic and Land Use
    Characteristics
    UNIT II TRAFFIC SURVEYS AND ANALYSIS 9
    Surveys and Analysis - Volume, Capacity, Speed and Delays, Origin and Destination, Parking,
    Pedestrian Studies, Accident Studies and Safety Level of Services- Basic principles of Traffic
    Flow.
    UNIT III TRAFFIC CONTROL 9
    Traffic signs, Road markings, Design of Traffic signals and Signal co-ordination (Problems),
    Traffic control aids and Street furniture, Street Lighting, Computer applications in Signal design
    UNIT IV GEOMETRIC DESIGN OF INTERSECTIONS 9
    Conflicts at Intersections, Classification of ‘At Grade Intersections, - Channallised Intersections
    - Principles of Intersection Design, Elements of Intersection Design, Rotary design, Grade
    Separation and interchanges - Design principles.
    UNIT V TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT 9
    Traffic Management- Transportation System Management (TSM) - Travel Demand
    Management (TDM), Traffic Forecasting techniques, Restrictions on turning movements, Oneway
    Streets, Traffic Segregation, Traffic Calming, Tidal flow operations, Exclusive Bus Lanes,
    Introduction to Intelligent Transportation System (ITS).
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Kadiyali L R, Traffic Engineering and Transport Planning, Khanna Technical
    Publications, Delhi, 2000.
    2. Khanna K and Justo C E G, Highway Engineering, Khanna Publishers, Roorkee, 2001.
    REFERENCES
    1. Indian Roads Congress (IRC) specifications: Guidelines and special publications on
    Traffic Planning and Management
    2. Guidelines of Ministry of Road Transport and Highways, Government of India.
    3. Subhash C.Saxena, A Course in Traffic Planning and Design, Dhanpat Rai Publications,
    New Delhi, 1989.
    4. Transportation Engineering – An Introduction, C.Jotin Khisty, B.Kent Lall, Prentice Hall
    of India Pvt Ltd, 2006.
    10
    101766 HOUSING PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    The objective of the course is to train the students to have a comprehensive knowledge of
    planning, design, evaluation, construction and financing of housing projects. The course focuses
    on cost effective construction materials and methods. Emphasis has also been given on the
    principles of sustainable housing policies and programmes.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO HOUSING 9
    Definition of Basic Terms – House, Home, Household, Apartments, Multi storeyed Buildings,
    Special Buildings, Objectives and Strategies of National Housing Policies, Principle of
    Sustainable Housing, Housing Laws at State level, Bye-laws at Urban and Rural Local Bodies –
    levels - Development Control Regulations, Institutions for Housing at National, State and Local
    levels
    UNIT II HOUSING PROGRAMMES 9
    Basic Concepts, Contents and Standards for Housing Programmes - Sites and Services,
    Neighborhoods, Open Development Plots, Apartments, Rental Housing, Co-operative Housing,
    Slum Housing Programmes, Role of Public, Private and Non-Government Organizations
    UNIT III PLANNING AND DESIGN OF HOUSING PROJECTS 9
    Formulation of Housing Projects – Site Analysis, Layout Design, Design of Housing Units
    (Design Problems)
    UNIT IV CONSTRUCTION TECHNIQUES AND COST-EFFECTIVE MATERIALS 9
    New Constructions Techniques – Cost Effective Modern Construction Materials, Building
    Centers – Concept, Functions and Performance Evaluation
    UNIT V HOUSING FINANCE AND PROJECT APPRAISAL 9
    Appraisal of Housing Projects – Housing Finance, Cost Recovery – Cash Flow Analysis,
    Subsidy and Cross Subsidy, Pricing o f Housing Units, Rents, Recovery Pattern (Problems).
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Meera Mehta and Dinesh Mehta, Metropolitan Housing Markets, Sage Publications Pvt.
    Ltd., New Delhi, 1999.
    2. Francis Cherunilam and Odeyar D Heggade, Housing in India, Himalaya Publishing
    House, Bombay, 1997.
    REFERENCES
    1. Development Control Rules for Chennai Metropolitan Area, CMA, Chennai, 2002.
    2. UNCHS, National Experiences with Shelter Delivery for the Poorest Groups, UNCHS
    (Habitat), Nairobi, 1994.
    3. National Housing Policy, 1994, Government of India.
    11
    101767 GROUND WATER ENGINEERING L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    To understand the distribution of ground water, evaluation of aquifer parameters, solving ground
    water equations. Ground water quality and development of ground water methods are dealt.
    UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF GROUND WATER 9
    Introduction – Characteristic of Ground water – Distribution of water - ground water column –
    Permeability - Darcy's Law - Types of aquifers - Hydrogeological Cycle – water level
    fluctuations.
    UNIT II HYDRAULICS OF FLOW 9
    Storage coefficient - Specific field - Heterogeneity and Anisotrophy -Transmissivity - Governing
    equations of ground water flow - Steady state flow - Dupuit Forchheimer assumptions - Velocity
    potential - Flow nets
    UNIT III ESTIMATION OF PARAMETERS 9
    Transmissivity and Storativity – Pumping test - Unsteady state flow - Thiess method - Jacob
    method - Image well theory – Effect of partial penetrations of wells - Collectors wells.
    UNIT IV GROUND WATER DEVELOPMENT 9
    Infiltration gallery - Conjunctive use - Artificial recharge Rainwater harvesting - Safe yield -Yield
    test – Geophysical methods – Selection of pumps.
    UNIT V WATER QUALITY 9
    Ground water chemistry - Origin, movement and quality - Water quality standards - Saltwater
    intrusion –Environmental concern
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Raghunath H.M., "Ground Water Hydrology", Wiley Eastern Ltd., 2000.
    2. Todd D.K., "Ground Water Hydrology", John Wiley and Sons, 2000.
    REFERENCE
    1. C Walton, "Ground Water Resource Evaluation", McGraw-Hill Publications.
    12
    101768 MANAGEMENT OF IRRIGATION SYSTEMS L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of the semester, the student shall have a clear concept of irrigation water
    management practices of the past, present and future. He/she shall also be able to appreciate
    the importance due and duly given to stake holders.
    UNIT I IRRIGATION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 9
    Irrigation systems – Supply and demand of water – Cropping pattern – Crop rotation – Crop
    diversification – Estimation of total and peak crop water requirements – Effective and
    dependable rainfall – Irrigation efficiencies.
    UNIT II IRRIGATION SCHEDULING 8
    Time of irrigation – Critical stages of water need of crops – Criteria for scheduling irrigation –
    Frequency and interval of irrigation.
    UNIT III MANAGEMENT 9
    Structural and non-structural strategies in water use and management – Conjunctive use of
    surface and ground waters – Quality of irrigation water.
    UNIT IV OPERATION 9
    Operational plans – Main canals, laterals and field channels – Water control and regulating
    structures – Performance indicators – Case study
    UNIT V INVOLVEMENT OF STAKE HOLDERS 10
    Farmer's participation in System operation – Water user's associations – Farmer councils –
    Changing paradigms on irrigation management – Participatory irrigation management
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Dilip Kumar Majumdar, "Irrigation Water Management – Principles and Practice",
    Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2000
    2. Hand book on Irrigation Water Requirement, R.T. Gandhi, et. al., Water Management
    Division, Department of Agriculture, Ministry of Agriculture, New Delhi
    REFERENCES
    1. Hand Book on Irrigation System Operation Practices, Water Resources Management
    and Training Project, Technical report No. 33, CWC, New Delhi, 1990
    2. Maloney, C. and Raju, K.V., "Managing Irrigation Together", Practice and Policy in India,
    Stage Publication, New Delhi, India, 1994.
    13
    101769 COASTAL ZONE MANAGEMENT L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of the semester, the student shall be able to understand the coastal processes,
    coastal dynamics, impacts of structures like docks, harbours and quays leading to simple
    management perspectives along the coastal zone.
    UNIT I COASTAL ZONE 9
    Coastal zone – Coastal zone regulations – Beach profile – Surf zone – Off shore – Coastal
    waters – Estuaries – Wet lands and Lagoons – Living resources – Non living resources.
    UNIT II WAVE DYNAMICS 10
    Wave classification – Airy's Linear Wave theory – Deep water waves – Shallow water waves –
    Wave pressure – Wave energy – Wave Decay – Reflection, Refraction and Diffraction of waves
    – Breaking of waves – Wave force on structures – Vertical – Sloping and stepped barriers –
    Force on piles.
    UNIT III WAVE FORECASTING AND TIDES 9
    Need for forecasting - SMB and PNJ methods of wave forecasting – Classification of tides –
    Darwin's equilibrium theory of tides – Effects on structures – seiches, Surges and Tsunamis.
    UNIT IV COASTAL PROCESSES 8
    Erosion and depositional shore features – Methods of protection – Littoral currents – Coastal
    aquifers – Sea water intrusion – Impact of sewage disposal in seas.
    UNIT V HARBOURS 9
    Structures near coast – Selection of site – Types and selection of break waters – Need and
    mode of dredging – Selection of dredgers – Effect of Mangalore forest.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Richard Sylvester, "Coastal Engineering, Volume I and II", Elseiner Scientific Publishing
    Co., 1999
    2. Quinn, A.D., "Design & Construction of Ports and Marine Structures", McGraw-Hill Book
    Co., 1999
    REFERENCES
    1. Ed. A.T. Ippen, "Coastline Hydrodynamics", McGraw-Hill Inc., New York, 1993
    2. Dwivedi, S.N., Natarajan, R and Ramachandran, S., "Coastal Zone Management in
    Tamilnadu".
    14
    101770 WATER RESOURCES ENGINEERING L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    The student is exposed to the different phases in Water Resources viz planning, collection of
    relevant data on water resources and also on National Water Policy. Reservoir planning,
    management and economic analysis aspects are covered in detail.
    UNIT I GENERAL 9
    Water resources survey – Water resources of India and Tamilnadu – Description of water
    resources planning – Economics of water resources planning, physical and socio economic data
    – National Water Policy – Collection of meteorological and hydrological data for water resources
    development.
    UNIT II NETWORK DESIGN 9
    Hydrologic measurements – Analysis of hydrologic data – Hydrologic station network – Station
    network design – Statistical techniques in network design.
    UNIT III WATER RESOURCE NEEDS 9
    Consumptive and non-consumptive water use - Estimation of water requirements for irrigation,
    for drinking and navigation - Water characteristics and quality – Scope and aims of master plan
    - Concept of basin as a unit for development - Water budget and development plan.
    UNIT IV RESERVOIR PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT 9
    Reservoir - Single and multipurpose – Multi objective - Fixation of Storage capacity -Strategies
    for reservoir operation - Sedimentation of reservoirs - Design flood-levees and flood walls -
    Channel improvement.
    UNIT V ECONOMIC ANALYSIS 9
    Estimation of cost and Evaluation of Benefits - Discount rate - Discounting factors - Discounting
    techniques – Computer Applications.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Linsley R.K. and Franzini J.B, "Water Resources Engineering", McGraw-Hill Inc, 2000.
    2. Douglas J.L. and Lee R.R., "Economics of Water Resources Planning", Tata McGraw-
    Hill Inc. 2000.
    3. Duggal, K.N. and Soni, J.P., "Elements of Water Resources Engineering", New Age
    International Publishers
    REFERENCES
    1. Chaturvedi M.C., "Water Resources Systems Planning and Management", Tata
    McGraw-Hill Inc., New Delhi, 1997.
    2. Goodman Alvin S., "Principles of Water Resources Planning", Prentice-Hall, 1984.
    3. Maass et al. Design of Water Resources Systems, Macmillan, 1968.
    15
    101771 PAVEMENT ENGINEERING L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    Student gains knowledge on various IRC guidelines for designing flexible and rigid pavements.
    Further, he/she will be in a position to assess quality and serviceability conditions of roads.
    UNIT I TYPE OF PAVEMENT AND STRESS DISTRIBUTION ON LAYERED SYSTEM
    9
    Introduction - Pavement as layered structure - Pavement types - flexible and rigid -Stress and
    deflections in pavements under repeated loading
    UNIT II DESIGN OF FLEXIBLE PAVEMENTS 9
    Flexible pavement design - Empirical - Semi empirical and theoretical Methods - Design
    procedure as per latest IRC guidelines – Design and specification of rural roads
    UNIT III DESIGN OF RIGID PAVEMENTS 9
    Cement concrete pavements - Modified Westergard approach - Design procedure as per latest
    IRC guidelines - Joints in rigid pavements - Concrete roads and their scope in India.
    UNIT IV PERFORMANCE EVALUATION AND MAINTENANCE 9
    Pavement Evaluation [Condition and evaluation surveys (Surface Appearance, Cracks, Patches
    And Pot Holes, Undulations, Ravelling, Roughness, Skid Resistance), Structural Evaluation By
    Deflection Measurements, Present Serviceability Index]
    Pavement maintenance. [IRC Recommendations Only]
    UNIT V STABILISATION OF PAVEMENTS 9
    Stabilisation with special reference to highway pavements - Choice of stabilisers -Testing and
    field control –Stabilisation for rural roads in India -use of Geosynthetics (geotextiles & geogrids)
    in roads.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Kadiyali, L.R., "Principles and Practice of Highway Engineering", Khanna tech.
    Publications, New Delhi, 1989.
    2. Wright, P.H., "Highway Engineers", John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 1996
    3. Design and Specification of Rural Roads (Manual), Ministry of rural roads, Government
    of India, New Delhi, 2001
    REFERENCES
    1. Yoder R.J and Witczak M.W., "Principles of Pavement Design", John Wiley, 1975.
    2. Guidelines for the Design of Flexible Pavements, IRC:37 - 2001, The Indian roads
    Congress, New Delhi.
    3. Guideline for the Design of Rigid Pavements for Highways, IRC:58-1998, The Indian
    Roads Congress, New Delh.
    16
    101772 GROUND IMPROVEMENT TECHNIQUES L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    After this course, the student is expected to identify basic deficiencies of various soil deposits
    and he/she be in a position to decide various ways and means of improving the soil and
    implementing techniques of improvement.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
    Role of ground improvement in foundation engineering - methods of ground improvement –
    Geotechnical problems in alluvial, laterite and black cotton soils -Selection of suitable ground
    improvement techniques based on soil condition.
    UNIT II DRAINAGE AND DEWATERING 9
    Drainage techniques - Well points - Vaccum and electroosmotic methods - Seepage analysis for
    two dimensional flow-fully and partially penetrating slots in homogenous deposits (Simple cases
    only).
    UNIT III INSITU TREATMENT OF COHESIONLESS AND COHESIVE SOILS 9
    Insitu densification of cohesionless and consolidation of cohesive soils -Dynamic compaction
    and consolidation - Vibrofloation - Sand pile compaction - Preloading with sand drains and fabric
    drains – Stone columns – Lime piles - Installation techniques only - relative merits of various
    methods and their limitations.
    UNIT IV EARTH REINFORCEMENT 9
    Concept of reinforcement - Types of reinforcement material - Applications of reinforced earth –
    use of Geotextiles for filtration, drainage and separation in road and other works.
    UNIT V GROUT TECHNIQUES 9
    Types of grouts - Grouting equipment and machinery - Injection methods - Grout monitoring –
    Stabilisation with cement, lime and chemicals - Stabilisation of expansive soils.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Koerner R.M., "Construction and Geotechnical Methods in Foundation Engineering",
    McGraw-Hill, 1994.
    2. Purushothama Raj, P. "Ground Improvement Techniques", Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing
    Company, New Delhi, 1995
    REFERENCES
    1. Moseley M.P., Ground Improvement Blockie Academic and Professional, Chapman and
    Hall, Glassgow, 1993.
    2. Jones J.E.P., Earth Reinforcement and Soil Structure, Butterworths, 1995.
    3. Koerner, R.M., "Design with Geosynthetics", (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall, New Jersey,
    2002
    4. Jewell, R.A., "Soil Reinforcement with Geotextiles", CIRIA special publication, London,
    1996
    5. Das, B.M., "Principles of Foundation Engineering", Thomson Books / Cole, 2003.
    17
    101773 INTRODUCTION TO SOIL DYNAMICS AND MACHINE FOUNDATIONS
    L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of this program the, student is expected to assess the dynamic properties of soil and
    various design parameters required for the design of machine foundation as well as design of
    foundation for various reciprocating machines.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
    Vibration of elementary systems-vibratory motion-single degree freedom system-free and forced
    vibration with and without damping
    UNIT II WAVES AND WAVE PROPAGATION 9
    Wave propagation in an elastic homogeneous isotropic medium- Raleigh, shear and
    compression waves-waves in elastic half space
    UNIT III DYNAMIC PROPERTIES OF SOILS 9
    Elastic properties of soils-coefficient of elastic, uniform and non-uniform compression - sheareffect
    of vibration dissipative properties of soils-determination of dynamic properties of soilcodal
    provisions
    UNIT IV DESIGN PROCEDURES 9
    Design criteria -dynamic loads - simple design procedures for foundations under reciprocating
    machines - machines producing impact loads - rotary type machines
    UNIT V VIBRATION ISOLATION 9
    Vibration isolation technique-mechanical isolation-foundation isolation-isolation by locationisolation
    by barriers- active passive isolation tests.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. S.Prakesh & V.K Puri, Foundation for machines, McGraw-Hill 1993
    2. Srinivasulu, P & Vaidyanathan, Hand book of Machine Foundations, McGraw-Hill, 1996
    REFERENCES
    1. Swamisaran, "Soil Dynamics and Machine Foundations", Galgotia Publications
    Pvt. Ltd., 1999
    2. Kramar S.L, "Geotechnical Earthquake Engineering", Prentice Hall International series,
    Pearson Education (Singapore) Pvt. Ltd.
    3. Kameswara Rao, "Dynamics Soil Tests and Applications", Wheeler Publishing, New
    Delhi, 2003
    4. Kameswara Rao, "Vibration Analysis and Foundation Dynamics", Wheeler Publishing,
    New Delhi, 1998
    5. IS code of Practice for Design and Construction of Machine Foundations, McGraw-Hill,
    1996.
    6. Moore P.J., "Analysis and Design of Foundation for Vibration", Oxford and IBH, 1995.
    18
    101774 ROCK ENGINEERING L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    Student gains the knowledge on the mechanics of rock and its applications in underground
    structures and rock slope stability analysis.
    UNIT I CLASSIFICATION AND INDEX PROPERTIES OF ROCKS 7
    Geological classification – Index properties of rock systems – Classification of rock masses for
    engineering purpose.
    UNIT II ROCK STRENGTH AND FAILURE CRITERIA 11
    Modes of rock failure – Strength of rock – Laboratory and field measurement of shear, tensile
    and compressive strength – Stress strain behaviour in compression – Mohr-coulomb failure
    criteria and empirical criteria for failure – Deformability of rock.
    UNIT III INITIAL STRESSES AND THEIR MEASUREMENTS 10
    Estimation of initial stresses in rocks – influence of joints and their orientation in distribution of
    stresses – technique for measurements of insitu stresses.
    UNIT IV APPLICATION OF ROCK MECHANICS IN ENGINEERING 9
    Simple engineering application – Underground openings – Rock slopes – Foundations and
    mining subsidence.
    UNIT V ROCK BOLTING 8
    Introduction – Rock bolt systems – rock bolt installation techniques – Testing of rock bolts –
    Choice of rock bolt based on rock mass condition.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Goodman P.E., "Introduction to Rock Mechanics", John Wiley and Sons, 1999.
    2. Stillborg B., "Professional User Handbook for rock Bolting", Tran Tech Publications,
    1996.
    REFERENCES
    1. Brow E.T., "Rock Characterisation Testing and Monitoring", Pergaman Press, 1991.
    2. Arogyaswamy R.N.P., "Geotechnical Application in Civil Engineering", Oxford and IBH,
    1991.
    3. Hock E. and Bray J., "Rock Slope Engineering, Institute of Mining and Metallurgy", 1991.
    19
    101775 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING
    PROJECTS L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    This subject deals with the various impacts of infrastructure projects on the components of
    environment and method of assessing the impact and mitigating the same.
    The student is expected to know about the various impacts of development projects on
    environment and the mitigating measures.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION 8
    Impact of development projects under Civil Engineering on environment - Environmental Impact
    Assessment (EIA) - Environmental Impact Statement (EIS) – EIA capability and limitations –
    Legal provisions on EIA
    UNIT II METHODOLOGIES 9
    Methods of EIA –Check lists – Matrices – Networks – Cost-benefit analysis – Analysis of
    alternatives
    UNIT III PREDICTION AND ASSESSMENT 9
    Assessment of Impact on land, water and air, noise, social, cultural flora and fauna;
    Mathematical models; public participation – Rapid EIA
    UNIT IV ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN 9
    Plan for mitigation of adverse impact on environment – options for mitigation of impact on water,
    air and land, flora and fauna; Addressing the issues related to the Project Affected People – ISO
    14000
    UNIT V CASE STUDIES 10
    EIA for infrastructure projects – Bridges – Stadium – Highways – Dams – Multi-storey Buildings
    – Water Supply and Drainage Projects
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Canter, R.L., "Environmental Impact Assessment", McGraw-Hill Inc., New Delhi, 1996.
    2. Shukla, S.K. and Srivastava, P.R., "Concepts in Environmental Impact Analysis",
    Common Wealth Publishers, New Delhi, 1992.
    REFERENCES
    1. John G. Rau and David C Hooten (Ed)., "Environmental Impact Analysis Handbook",
    McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1990.
    2. "Environmental Assessment Source book", Vol. I, II & III. The World Bank, Washington,
    D.C., 1991.
    3. Judith Petts, "Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Vol. I & II", Blackwell
    Science, 1999.
    20
    101776 INDUSTRIAL WASTE MANAGEMENT L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    This subject deals with the pollution from major industries and methods of controlling the same.
    The student is expected to know about the polluting potential of major industries in the country
    and the methods of controlling the same.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION 8
    Types of industries and industrial pollution – Characteristics of industrial wastes – Population
    equivalent – Bioassay studies – effects of industrial effluents on streams, sewer, land, sewage
    treatment plants and human health – Environmental legislations related to prevention and
    control of industrial effluents and hazardous wastes
    UNIT II CLEANER PRODUCTION 8
    Waste management Approach – Waste Audit – Volume and strength reduction – Material and
    process modifications – Recycle, reuse and byproduct recovery – Applications.
    UNIT III POLLUTION FROM MAJOR INDUSTRIES 9
    Sources, Characteristics, waste treatment flow sheets for selected industries such as Textiles,
    Tanneries, Pharmaceuticals, Electroplating industries, Dairy, Sugar, Paper, distilleries, Steel
    plants, Refineries, fertilizer, thermal power plants – Wastewater reclamation concepts
    UNIT IV TREATMENT TECHNOLOGIES 11
    Equalisation – Neutralisation – Removal of suspended and dissolved organic solids - Chemical
    oxidation – Adsorption - Removal of dissolved inorganics – Combined treatment of industrial
    and municipal wastes – Residue management – Dewatering - Disposal
    UNIT V HAZARDOUS WASTE MANAGEMENT 9
    Hazardous wastes - Physico chemical treatment – solidification – incineration – Secure land fills
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. M.N.Rao & A.K.Dutta, "Wastewater Treatment", Oxford - IBH Publication, 1995.
    2. W .W. Eckenfelder Jr., "Industrial Water Pollution Control", McGraw-Hill Book Company,
    New Delhi, 2000.
    REFERENCES
    1. T.T.Shen, "Industrial Pollution Prevention", Springer, 1999.
    2. R.L.Stephenson and J.B.Blackburn, Jr., "Industrial Wastewater Systems Hand book",
    Lewis Publisher, New Yark, 1998
    3. H.M.Freeman, "Industrial Pollution Prevention Hand Book", McGraw-Hill Inc., New Delhi,
    1995.
    4. Bishop, P.L., "Pollution Prevention: Fundamental & Practice", McGraw-Hill, 2000.
    21
    101777 AIR POLLUTION MANAGEMENT L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    This subject covers the sources, characteristics and effects of air and noise pollution and the
    methods of controlling the same. The student is expected to know about source inventory and
    control mechanism.
    UNIT I SOURCES AND EFFECTS OF AIR POLLUTANTS 9
    Classification of air pollutants – Particulates and gaseous pollutants – Sources of air pollution –
    Source inventory – Effects of air pollution on human beings, materials, vegetation, animals –
    global warming-ozone layer depletion, Sampling and Analysis – Basic Principles of Sampling –
    Source and ambient sampling – Analysis of pollutants – Principles.
    UNIT II DISPERSION OF POLLUTANTS 9
    Elements of atmosphere – Meteorological factors – Wind roses – Lapse rate - Atmospheric
    stability and turbulence – Plume rise – Dispersion of pollutants – Dispersion models –
    Applications.
    UNIT III AIR POLLUTION CONTROL 12
    Concepts of control – Principles and design of control measures – Particulates control by
    gravitational, centrifugal, filtration, scrubbing, electrostatic precipitation – Selection criteria for
    equipment - gaseous pollutant control by adsorption, absorption, condensation, combustion –
    Pollution control for specific major industries.
    UNIT IV AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT 8
    Air quality standards – Air quality monitoring – Preventive measures - Air pollution control efforts
    – Zoning – Town planning regulation of new industries – Legislation and enforcement –
    Environmental Impact Assessment and Air quality
    UNIT V NOISE POLLUTION 7
    Sources of noise pollution – Effects – Assessment - Standards – Control methods – Prevention
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Anjaneyulu, D., "Air Pollution and Control Technologies", Allied Publishers, Mumbai,
    2002.
    2. Rao, C.S. Environmental Pollution Control Engineering, Wiley Eastern Ltd., New Delhi,
    1996.
    3. Rao M.N., and Rao H. V. N., Air Pollution Control, Tata-McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 1996.
    REFERENCES
    1. W.L.Heumann, Industrial Air Pollution Control Systems, McGraw-Hill, New Yark, 1997.
    2. Mahajan S.P., Pollution Control in Process Industries, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing
    Company, New Delhi, 1991.
    3. Peavy S.W., Rowe D.R. and Tchobanoglous G. Environmental Engineering, McGraw
    Hill, New Delhi, 1985.
    4. Garg, S.K., "Environmental Engineering Vol. II", Khanna Publishers, New Delhi
    5. Mahajan, S.P., "Pollution Control in Process Industries", Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi,
    1991.
    22
    101778 MUNICIPAL SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    This subject covers the various sources and characterisation of municipal solid wastes and the
    on-site/off-site processing of the same and the disposal methods. The student is expected to
    know about the various effects and disposal options for the municipal solid waste.
    UNIT I SOURCES AND TYPES OF MUNICIPAL SOLID WASTES 9
    Sources and types of solid wastes - Quantity – factors affecting generation of solid wastes;
    characteristics – methods of sampling and characterization; Effects of improper disposal of solid
    wastes – public health effects. Principle of solid waste management – social & economic
    aspects; Public awareness; Role of NGOs; Legislation.
    UNIT II ON-SITE STORAGE & PROCESSING 9
    On-site storage methods – materials used for containers – on-site segregation of solid wastes –
    public health & economic aspects of storage – options under Indian conditions – Critical
    Evaluation of Options.
    UNIT III COLLECTION AND TRANSFER 9
    Methods of Collection – types of vehicles – Manpower requirement – collection routes; transfer
    stations – selection of location, operation & maintenance; options under Indian conditions.
    UNIT IV OFF-SITE PROCESSING 9
    Processing techniques and Equipment; Resource recovery from solid wastes – composting,
    incineration, Pyrolysis - options under Indian conditions.
    UNIT V DISPOSAL 9
    Dumping of solid waste; sanitary land fills – site selection, design and operation of sanitary
    landfills – Leachate collection & treatment
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. George Tchobanoglous et.al., "Integrated Solid Waste Management", McGraw-Hill
    Publishers, 1993.
    2. B.Bilitewski, G.HardHe, K.Marek, A.Weissbach, and H.Boeddicker, "Waste
    Management", Springer, 1994.
    REFERENCES
    1. Manual on Municipal Solid Waste Management, CPHEEO, Ministry of Urban
    Development, Government of India, New Delhi, 2000
    2. R.E.Landreth and P.A.Rebers, "Municipal Solid Wastes – problems and Solutions",
    Lewis Publishers, 1997.
    3. Bhide A.D. and Sundaresan, B.B., "Solid Waste Management in Developing Countries",
    INSDOC, 1993.
    23
    101779 ECOLOGICAL ENGINEERING L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    This subject deals with the scope and applications of ecological principles for wastewater
    treatment and reuse. The student is expected to be aware of the various effects of
    industrialisation on ecology and ecological based waste purification methods.
    UNIT I PRINCIPLES AND CONCEPTS 9
    Scope and applications of Ecological Engineering – Development and evolution of ecosystems
    – principles and concepts pertaining to species, populations and community
    UNIT II ECOSYSTEM FUNCTIONS 10
    Energy flow and nutrient cycling – Food chain and food webs – biological magnification,
    diversity and stability, immature and mature systems. Primary productivity – Biochemical cycling
    of nitrogen, phosphorous, sulphur and carbon dioxide; Habitat ecology - Terrestrial, fresh water,
    estuarine and marine habitats.
    UNIT III ECOLOGICAL ENGINEERING METHODS 9
    Bio monitoring and its role in evaluation of aquatic ecosystem; Rehabilitation of ecosystems
    through ecological principles – step cropping, bio-wind screens, Wetlands, ponds, Root Zone
    Treatment for wastewater, Reuse of treated wastewater through ecological systems.
    UNIT IV ECOLOGICAL EFFECTS OF INDUSTRIALISATION 9
    Ecological effects of exploration, production, extraction, processing, manufacture & transport.
    UNIT V CASE STUDIES 8
    Case studies of integrated ecological engineering systems
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Odum, E.P., "Fundamental of Ecology", W.B.Sauders, 1990.
    2. Kormondy, E.J., "Concepts of Ecology", Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 1996
    REFERENCES
    1. Mitch, J.W. and Jorgensen, S.E., Ecological Engineering – An Introduction to
    Ecotechnology, John Wiley and Sons, 1996.
    2. Colinvaux, P., Ecology, John Wiley and Sons, 1996.
    3. Etnier, C & Guterstam, B., "Ecological Engineering for Wastewater Treatment", 2nd
    Edition, Lewis Publications, London, 1996.
    24
    185765 CONTRACT LAWS AND REGULATIONS L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    UNIT I CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS 9
    Indian Contracts Act – Elements of Contracts – Types of Contracts – Features – Suitability –
    Design of Contract Documents – International Contract Document – Standard Contract
    Document – Law of Torts
    UNIT II TENDERS 10
    Prequalification – Bidding – Accepting – Evaluation of Tender from Technical, Contractual and
    Commercial Points of View – Contract Formation and Interpretation – Potential Contractual
    Problems – World Bank Procedures and Guidelines – Transparency in Tenders Act.
    UNIT III ARBITRATION 8
    Comparison of Actions and Laws – Agreements – Subject Matter – Violations – Appointment of
    Arbitrators – Conditions of Arbitration – Powers and Duties of Arbitrator – Rules of Evidence –
    Enforcement of Award – Costs
    UNIT IV LEGAL REQUIREMENTS 9
    Insurance and Bonding – Laws Governing Sale, Purchase and Use of Urban and Rural Land –
    Land Revenue Codes – Tax Laws – Income Tax, Sales Tax, Excise and Custom Duties and
    their Influence on Construction Costs – Legal Requirements for Planning – Property Law –
    Agency Law – Local Government Laws for Approval – Statutory Regulations
    UNIT V LABOUR REGULATIONS 9
    Social Security – Welfare Legislation – Laws relating to Wages, Bonus and Industrial Disputes,
    Labour Administration– Insurance and Safety Regulations – Workmen's Compensation Act –
    Indian Factory Act – Tamil Nadu Factory Act – Child Labour Act - Other Labour Laws
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    REFERENCES
    1. Gajaria G.T., Laws Relating to Building and Engineering Contracts in India, M.M.Tripathi
    Private Ltd., Bombay, 1982
    2. Tamilnadu PWD Code, 1986
    3. Jimmie Hinze, Construction Contracts, Second Edition, McGraw Hill, 2001
    4. Joseph T. Bockrath, Contracts and the Legal Environment for Engineers and Architects,
    Sixth Edition, McGraw Hill, 2000.
    25
    101865 BRIDGE STRUCTURES L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of this course the student shall be able to choose appropriate bridge structure and
    design it for given site conditions.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
    Design of through type steel highway bridges for IRC loading - Design of stringers, cross girders
    and main girders - Design of deck type steel highway bridges for IRC loading - Design of main
    girders
    UNIT II STEEL BRIDGES 9
    Design of pratt type truss girder highway bridges - Design of top chord, bottom chord, web
    members - Effect of repeated loading - Design of plate girder railway bridges for railway loading
    - Wind effects - Design of web and flange plates - Vertical and horizontal stiffeners.
    UNIT III REINFORCED CONCRETE SLAB BRIDGES 9
    Design of solid slab bridges for IRC loading - Design of kerb - Design of tee beam bridges -
    Design of panel and cantilever for IRC loading
    UNIT IV REINFORCED CONCRETE GIRDER BRIDGES 9
    Design of tee beam - Courbon's theory - Pigeaud's curves - Design of balanced cantilever
    bridges - Deck slab - Main girder - Design of cantilever - Design of articulation.
    UNIT V PRESTRESSED CONCRETE BRIDGES 9
    Design of prestressed concrete bridges - Preliminary dimensions - Flexural and torsional
    parameters - Courbon's theory - Distribution coefficient by exact analysis - Design of girder
    section - Maximum and minimum prestressing forces - Eccentricity - Live load and dead load
    shear forces - cable zone in girder –Check for stresses at various sections - Check for diagonal
    tension - Diaphragms - End block - Short term and long term deflections.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Johnson Victor D., "Essentials of Bridge Engineering", Oxford and IBH Publishing Co.,
    New Delhi, 1990.
    2. Rajagopalan, N.Bridge Superstructure, Alpha Science International, 2006
    REFERENCES
    1. Phatak D.R., "Bridge Engineering", Satya Prakashan, New Delhi, 1990.
    2. Ponnuswamy S., "Bridge Engineering", Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 1996.
    26
    101866 STORAGE STRUCTURES L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    The main objective of this course is to impart the principles involved in designing structures
    which have to store different types of materials. The student at the end of the course shall be
    able to design concrete and steel material retaining structures.
    UNIT I STEEL WATER TANKS 12
    Design of rectangular riveted steel water tank – Tee covers – Plates – Stays –Longitudinal and
    transverse beams – Design of staging – Base plates – Foundation and anchor bolts – Design of
    pressed steel water tank – Design of stays – Joints – Design of hemispherical bottom water tank
    – side plates – Bottom plates – joints – Ring girder – Design of staging and foundation.
    UNIT II CONCRETE WATER TANKS 12
    Design of Circular tanks – Hinged and fixed at the base – IS method of calculating shear forces
    and moments – Hoop tension – Design of intze tank – Dome – Ring girders – Conical dome –
    Staging – Bracings – Raft foundation – Design of rectangular tanks – Approximate methods and
    IS methods – Design of under ground tanks – Design of base slab and side wall – Check for
    uplift.
    UNIT III STEEL BUNKERS AND SILOS 7
    Design of square bunker – Jansen's and Airy's theories – IS Codal provisions – Design of side
    plates – Stiffeners – Hooper – Longitudinal beams – Design of cylindrical silo – Side plates –
    Ring girder – stiffeners.
    UNIT IV CONCRETE BUNKERS AND SILOS 7
    Design of square bunker – Side Walls – Hopper bottom – Top and bottom edge beams –
    Design of cylindrical silo – Wall portion – Design of conical hopper – Ring beam at junction
    UNIT V PRESTRESSED CONCRETE WATER TANKS 7
    Principles of circular prestressing – Design of prestressed concrete circular water tanks
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Rajagopalan K., Storage Structures, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 1998.
    2. Krishna Raju N., Advanced Reinforced Concrete Design, CBS Publishers and
    Distributors, New Delhi, 1998.
    27
    101867 DESIGN OF PLATE AND SHELL STRUCTURES L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of this course the student shall understand the rudimentary principles involved in the
    analysis and design of plates and shells.
    UNIT I THIN PLATES WITH SMALL DEFLECTION 9
    Laterally loaded thin plates – governing differential equations – Simply supported and fixed
    boundary conditions
    UNIT II RECTANGULAR PLATES 9
    Simply supported rectangular plates – Navier's solution and Levy's method.
    UNIT III THIN SHELLS 9
    Classification of shells-structural actions – membrane theory
    UNIT IV ANALYSIS OF SHELLS 9
    Analysis of spherical dome – cylindrical shells – folded plates
    UNIT V DESIGN OF SHELLS 9
    Design of spherical dome – cylindrical shells – folded plates
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Bairagi N K, A text book of Plate Analysis, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 1996.
    2. G.S. Ramaswamy, Design and Construction of Shell Structures, CBS Plublishers,
    New Delhi, 1996
    3. S. Timoshenko & S. Woinowsky – Krieger, "Theory of Plates and Shells", McGraw Hill
    Book Company
    REFERENCES
    1. Szilard R, Theory and analysis of plates, Prentice Hall Inc, 1995
    2. Chatterjee B. K., Theory and Design of Concrete Shells, Oxford & IBH, New Delhi, 1998
    3. Billington D. P., Thin Shell Concrete Structures, McGraw-Hill, 1995.
    28
    101868 TALL BUILDINGS L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of this course the student should have understood the problems associated with
    large heights of structures with respect to loads (wind and earthquake and deflections of the
    structure). He should know the rudimentary principles of designing tall buildings as per the
    existing course.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
    The Tall Building in the Urban Context - The Tall Building and its Support Structure -
    Development of High Rise Building Structures - General Planning Considerations. Dead Loads -
    Live Loads-Construction Loads -Snow, Rain, and Ice Loads - Wind Loads-Seismic Loading –
    Water and Earth Pressure Loads - Loads - Loads Due to Restrained Volume Changes of
    Material - Impact and Dynamic Loads - Blast Loads -Combination of Loads.
    UNIT II THE VERTICAL STRUCTURE PLANE 9
    Dispersion of Vertical Forces- Dispersion of Lateral Forces - Optimum Ground Level Space -
    Shear Wall Arrangement - Behaviour of Shear Walls under Lateral Loading. The Floor Structure
    or Horizontal Building Plane Floor Framing Systems-Horizontal Bracing- Composite Floor
    Systems The High - Rise Building as related to assemblage Kits Skeleton Frame Systems -
    Load Bearing Wall Panel Systems - Panel – Frame Systems - Multistory Box Systems.
    UNIT III COMMON HIGH-RISE BUILDING STRUCTURES AND THEIR BEHAVIOUR
    UNDER LOAD 9
    The Bearing Wall Structure- The Shear Core Structure - Rigid Frame Systems- The Wall -
    Beam Structure: Interspatial and Staggered Truss Systems - Frame - Shear Wall Building
    Systems - Flat Slab Building Structures - Shear Truss - Frame Interaction System with Rigid -
    Belt Trusses - Tubular Systems-Composite Buildings - Comparison of High - Rise Structural
    Systems Other Design Approaches Controlling Building Drift Efficient Building Forms - The
    Counteracting Force or Dynamic Response.
    UNIT IV APPROXIMATE STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS AND DESIGN OF BUILDINGS 9
    Approximate Analysis of Bearing Wall Buildings The Cross Wall Structure - The Long Wall
    Structure The Rigid Frame Structure Approximate Analysis for Vertical Loading - Approximate
    Analysis for Lateral Loading - Approximate Design of Rigid Frame Buildings-Lateral Deformation
    of Rigid Frame Buildings The Rigid Frame - Shear Wall Structure - The Vierendeel Structure -
    The Hollow Tube Structure.
    UNIT V OTHER HIGH-RISE BUILDING STRUCTURE 9
    Deep - Beam Systems -High-Rise Suspension Systems - Pneumatic High -Rise Buildings -
    Space Frame Applied to High - Rise Buildings - Capsule Architecture.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. WOLFGANG SCHUELLER " High - rise building Structures", John Wiley and Sons,
    New York 1976.
    2. Bryan Stafford Smith and Alex Coull, " Tall Building Structures ", Analysis and Design,
    John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1991.
    29
    REFERENCES
    1. COULL, A. and SMITH, STAFFORD, B. " Tall Buildings ", Pergamon Press, London,
    1997.
    2. LinT.Y. and Burry D.Stotes, " Structural Concepts and Systems for Architects and
    Engineers ", John Wiley, 1994.
    3. Lynn S.Beedle, Advances in Tall Buildings, CBS Publishers and Distributors, Delhi,
    1996.
    4. Taranath.B.S., Structural Analysis and Design of Tall Buildings, Mc Graw Hill,1998.
    30
    101869 PREFABRICATED STRUCTURES L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of this course the student shall be able to appreciate modular construction,
    industrialised construction and shall be able to design some of the prefabricated elements and
    also have the knowledge of the construction methods using these elements.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
    Need for prefabrication – Principles – Materials – Modular coordination – Standarization –
    Systems – Production – Transportation – Erection.
    UNIT II PREFABRICATED COMPONENTS 9
    Behaviour of structural components – Large panel constructions – Construction of roof and floor
    slabs – Wall panels – Columns – Shear walls
    UNIT III DESIGN PRINCIPLES 9
    Disuniting of structures- Design of cross section based on efficiency of material used –
    Problems in design because of joint flexibility – Allowance for joint deformation.
    UNIT IV JOINT IN STRUCTURAL MEMBERS 9
    Joints for different structural connections – Dimensions and detailing – Design of expansion
    joints
    UNIT V DESIGN FOR ABNORMAL LOADS 9
    Progressive collapse – Code provisions – Equivalent design loads for considering abnormal
    effects such as earthquakes, cyclones, etc., - Importance of avoidance of progressive collapse.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. CBRI, Building materials and components, India, 1990
    2. Gerostiza C.Z., Hendrikson C. and Rehat D.R., Knowledge based process planning for
    construction and manufacturing, Academic Press Inc., 1994
    REFERENCES
    1. Koncz T., Manual of precast concrete construction, Vols. I, II and III, Bauverlag, GMBH,
    1971.
    2. Structural design manual, Precast concrete connection details, Society for the studies in
    the use of precast concrete, Netherland Betor Verlag, 1978.
    31
    101870 WIND ENGINEERING L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of this course the student should be able to appreciate the forces generated on
    structures due to normal wind as well as gusts. He should also be able to analyse the dynamic
    effects created by these wind forces.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
    Terminology – Wind Data – Gust factor and its determination - Wind speed variation with height
    – Shape factor – Aspect ratio – Drag and lift.
    UNIT II EFFECT OF WIND ON STRUCTURES 9
    Static effect – Dynamic effect – Interference effects (concept only) – Rigid structure –
    Aeroelastic structure (concept only).
    UNIT III EFFECT ON TYPICAL STRUCTURES 9
    Tail buildings – Low rise buildings – Roof and cladding – Chimneys, towers and bridges.
    UNIT IV APPLICATION TO DESIGN 9
    Design forces on multistorey building, towers and roof trusses.
    UNIT V INTRODUCTION TO WIND TUNNEL 9
    Types of models (Principles only) – Basic considerations – Examples of tests and their use.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Peter Sachs, "Wind Forces in Engineering, Pergamon Press, New York, 1992.
    2. Lawson T.V., Wind Effects on Buildings, Vols. I and II, Applied Science and Publishers,
    London, 1993.
    REFERENCES
    1. Devenport A.G., "Wind Loads on Structures", Division of Building Research, Ottowa,
    1990.
    2. Wind Force on Structures – Course Notes, Building Technology Centre, Anna University,
    1995.
    32
    101871 COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN OF STRUCTURE L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    The main objective of this programme is to train the student in the use of computers and
    creating a computer code as well as using commercially available software for the design of
    Civil Engineering structures.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
    Fundamentals of CAD - Hardware and software requirements -Design process - Applications
    and benefits.
    UNIT II COMPUTER GRAPHICS 9
    Graphic primitives - Transformations -Wire frame modeling and solid modeling -Graphic
    standards –Drafting packages
    UNIT III STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS 9
    Fundamentals of finite element analysis - Principles of structural analysis -Analysis packages
    and applications.
    UNIT IV DESIGN AND OPTIMISATION 9
    Principles of design of steel and RC Structures -Applications to simple design problems –
    Optimisation techniques - Algorithms - Linear Programming – Simplex method
    UNIT V EXPERT SYSTEMS 9
    Introduction to artificial intelligence - Knowledge based expert systems -Rules and decision
    tables –Inference mechanisms - Simple applications.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Groover M.P. and Zimmers E.W. Jr., "CAD/CAM, Computer Aided Design and
    Manufacturing", Prentice Hall of India Ltd, New Delhi, 1993.
    2. Krishnamoorthy C.S.Rajeev S., "Computer Aided Design", Narosa Publishing House,
    New Delhi, 1993
    REFERENCES
    1. Harrison H.B., "Structural Analysis and Design", Part I and II Pergamon Press, Oxford,
    1990.
    2. Rao S.S., "Optimisation Theory and Applications", Wiley Eastern Limited, New Delhi,
    1977.
    3. Richard Forsyth (Ed), "Expert System Principles and Case Studies", Chapman and Hall,
    London, 1989.
    33
    101872 INDUSTRIAL STRUCTURES L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    This course deals with some of the special aspects with respect to Civil Engineering structures
    in industries. At the end of this course the student shall be able to design some of the
    structures.
    UNIT I PLANNING 9
    Classification of Industries and Industrial structures – General requirements for industries like
    cement, chemical and steel plants – Planning and layout of buildings and components.
    UNIT II FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS 9
    Lighting – Ventilation – Acoustics – Fire safety – Guidelines from factories act.
    UNIIT III DESIGN OF STEEL STRUCTURES 9
    Industrial roofs – Crane girders – Mill buildings – Design of Bunkers and Silos
    UNIT IV DESIGN OF R.C. STRUCTURES 9
    Silos and bunkers – Chimneys – Principles of folded plates and shell roofs
    UNIT V PREFABRICATION 9
    Principles of prefabrication – Prestressed precast roof trusses- Functional requirements for
    Precast concrete units
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Reinforced Concrete Structural elements – P. Purushothaman.
    2. Pasala Dayaratnam – Design of Steel Structure – 1990.
    REFERENCES
    1. Henn W. Buildings for Industry, vols.I and II, London Hill Books, 1995.
    2. Handbook on Functional Requirements of Industrial buildings, SP32 – 1986, Bureau of
    Indian Standards, New Delhi 1990.
    3. Course Notes on Modern Developments in the Design and Construction of Industrial
    Structures, Structural Engineering Research Centre, Madras, 1982.
    4. Koncz, J, Manual of Precast Construction Vol I & II Bauverlay GMBH, 1971.
    34
    101873 SMART MATERIALS AND SMART STRUCTURES L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    This course is designed to give an insight into the latest developments regarding smart
    materials and their use in structures. Further, this also deals with structures which can self
    adjust their stiffness with load.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
    Introduction to Smart Materials and Structures – Instrumented structures functions and
    response – Sensing systems – Self diagnosis – Signal processing consideration – Actuation
    systems and effectors.
    UNIT II MEASURING TECHNIQUES 9
    Strain Measuring Techniques using Electrical strain gauges, Types – Resistance – Capacitance
    – Inductance – Wheatstone bridges – Pressure transducers – Load cells – Temperature
    Compensation – Strain Rosettes.
    UNIT III SENSORS 9
    Sensing Technology – Types of Sensors – Physical Measurement using Piezo Electric Strain
    measurement – Inductively Read Transducers – The LVOT – Fiber optic Techniques.
    Chemical and Bio-Chemical sensing in structural Assessment – Absorptive chemical sensors –
    Spectroscopes – Fibre Optic Chemical Sensing Systems and Distributed measurement.
    UNIT IV ACTUATORS 9
    Actuator Techniques – Actuator and actuator materials – Piezoelectric and Electrostrictive
    Material – Magnetostructure Material – Shape Memory Alloys – Electro orheological Fluids–
    Electro magnetic actuation – Role of actuators and Actuator Materials.
    UNIT V SIGNAL PROCESSING AND CONTROL SYSTEMS 9
    Data Acquisition and Processing – Signal Processing and Control for Smart Structures –
    Sensors as Geometrical Processors – Signal Processing – Control System – Linear and Non-
    Linear.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Brain Culshaw – Smart Structure and Materials Artech House – Borton. London-1996.
    REFERENCES
    1. L. S. Srinath – Experimental Stress Analysis – Tata McGraw-Hill, 1998.
    2. J. W. Dally & W. F. Riley – Experimental Stress Analysis – Tata McGraw-Hill, 1998.
    35
    101874 FINITE ELEMENT TECHNIQUES L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of this course the student shall have a basic knowledge of finite element method and
    shall be able to analyse linear elastic structures, that he has studied about in core courses,
    using finite element method.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION – VARIATIONAL FORMULATION 9
    General field problems in Engineering – Modelling – Discrete and Continuous models –
    Characteristics – Difficulties involved in solution – The relevance and place of the finite element
    method – Historical comments – Basic concept of FEM, Boundary and initial value problems –
    Gradient and divergence theorems – Functionals – Variational calculus Variational formulation
    of VBPS. The method of weighted residuals – The Ritz method.
    UNIT II FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS OF ONE DIMENSIONAL PROBLEMS 10
    One dimensional second order equations – discretisation of domain into elements –
    Generalised coordinates approach – derivation of elements equations – assembly of elements
    equations – imposition of boundary conditions – solution of equations – Cholesky method – Post
    processing – Extension of the method to fourth order equations and their solutions – time
    dependant problems and their solutions – example from heat transfer, fluid flow and solid
    mechanics.
    UNIT III FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS OF TWO DIMENSIONAL PROBLEMS 10
    Second order equation involving a scalar-valued function – model equation – Variational
    formulation – Finite element formulation through generalised coordinates approach – Triangular
    elements and quadrilateral elements – convergence criteria for chosen models – Interpolation
    functions – Elements matrices and vectors – Assembly of element matrices – boundary
    conditions – solution techniques.
    UNIT IV ISOPARAMETRIC ELEMENTS AND FORMULATION 8
    Natural coordinates in 1, 2 and 3 dimensions – use of area coordinates for triangular elements
    in - 2 dimensional problems – Isoparametric elements in 1,2 and 3 dimensional Largrangean
    and serendipity elements – Formulations of elements equations in one and two dimensions -
    Numerical integration.
    UNIT V APPLICATIONS TO FIELD PROBLEMS IN TWO DIMENSIONALS 8
    Equations of elasticity – plane elasticity problems – axisymmetric problems in elasticity –
    Bending of elastic plates – Time dependent problems in elasticity – Heat – transfer in two
    dimensions – incompressible fluid flow
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOK
    1. Chandrupatla, T.R., and Belegundu, A.D., "Introduction to Finite Element in
    Engineering", Third Edition, Prentice Hall, India, 2003.
    36
    REFERENCES
    1. J.N.Reddy, "An Introduction to Finite Element Method", McGraw-Hill, Intl. Student
    Edition, 1985.
    2. Zienkiewics, "The finite element method, Basic formulation and linear problems", Vol.1,
    4/e, McGraw-Hill, Book Co.
    3. S.S.Rao, "The Finite Element Method in Engineering", Pergaman Press, 2003.
    4. C.S.Desai and J.F.Abel, "Introduction to the Finite Element Method", Affiliated East West
    Press, 1972.
    101875 REPAIR AND REHABILITATION OF STRUCTURES L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    To get the knowledge on quality of concrete, durability aspects, causes of deterioration,
    assessment of distressed structures, repairing of structures and demolition procedures.
    UNIT I MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR STRATEGIES 9
    Maintenance, repair and rehabilitation, Facets of Maintenance, importance of Maintenance
    various aspects of Inspection, Assessment procedure for evaluating a damaged structure,
    causes of deterioration
    UNIT II SERVICEABILITY AND DURABILITY OF CONCRETE 11
    Quality assurance for concrete construction concrete properties- strength, permeability, thermal
    properties and cracking. - Effects due to climate, temperature, chemicals, corrosion - design
    and construction errors - Effects of cover thickness and cracking
    UNIT III MATERIALS FOR REPAIR 9
    Special concretes and mortar, concrete chemicals, special elements for accelerated strength
    gain, Expansive cement, polymer concrete, sulphur infiltrated concrete, ferro cement, Fibre
    reinforced concrete.
    UNIT IV TECHNIQUES FOR REPAIR AND DEMOLITION 8
    Rust eliminators and polymers coating for rebars during repair, foamed concrete, mortar and dry
    pack, vacuum concrete, Gunite and Shotcrete, Epoxy injection, Mortar repair for cracks, shoring
    and underpinning. Methods of corrosion protection, corrosion inhibitors, corrosion resistant
    steels, coatings and cathodic protection. Engineered demolition techniques for dilapidated
    structures - case studies.
    UNIT V REPAIRS, REHABILITATION AND RETROFITTING OF STRUCTURES 8
    Repairs to overcome low member strength, Deflection, Cracking, Chemical disruption,
    weathering corrosion, wear, fire, leakage and marine exposure.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Denison Campbell, Allen and Harold Roper, Concrete Structures, Materials,
    Maintenance and Repair, Longman Scientific and Technical UK, 1991.
    2. R.T.Allen and S.C.Edwards, Repair of Concrete Structures, Blakie and Sons, UK, 1987
    37
    REFERENCES
    1. M.S.Shetty, Concrete Technology - Theory and Practice, S.Chand and Company, New
    Delhi, 1992.
    2. Santhakumar, A.R., Training Course notes on Damage Assessment and repair in Low
    Cost Housing , "RHDC-NBO" Anna University, July 1992.
    3. Raikar, R.N., Learning from failures - Deficiencies in Design, Construction and Service -
    R&D Centre (SDCPL), Raikar Bhavan, Bombay, 1987.
    4. N.Palaniappan, Estate Management, Anna Institute of Management, Chennai, 1992.
    5. Lakshmipathy, M. etal. Lecture notes of Workshop on "Repairs and Rehabilitation of
    Structures", 29 - 30th October 1999.
    1
    AFFILIATED INSTITUTIONS
    ANNA UNIVERSITY OF TECHNOLOGY CHENNAI :: CHENNAI 600 113
    REGULATIONS 2010
    CURRICULA AND SYLLABI FOR VIII SEMESTER
    B.E. CIVIL ENGINEERING
    SEMESTER VIII
    Code No. Course Title L T P C
    THEORY
    101801 Engineering Economics and Cost Analysis 3 0 0 3
    E4 Elective – IV 3 0 0 3
    E5 Elective – V 3 0 0 3
    PRACTICAL
    101895 Project Work 0 0 12 6
    TOTAL 9 0 15 15
    2
    LIST OF ELECTIVES for B.E. CIVIL ENGINEERING
    SEMESTER VIII
    Code No. Course Title L T P C
    101865 Bridge Structures 3 0 0 3
    101866 Storage Structures 3 0 0 3
    101867 Design of Plate and Shell Structures 3 0 0 3
    101868 Tall Buildings 3 0 0 3
    101869 Prefabricated structures 3 0 0 3
    101870 Wind Engineering 3 0 0 3
    101871 Computer Aided Design of Structures 3 0 0 3
    101872 Industrial Structures 3 0 0 3
    101873 Smart Structures and smart Materials 3 0 0 3
    101874 Finite Element Techniques 3 0 0 3
    101875 Repair and Rehabilitation of Structures 3 0 0 3
    3
    101801 ENGINEERING ECONOMICS AND COST ANALYSIS L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    The main objective of this course is to make the Civil Engineering student know about the basic
    law of economics, how to organise a business, the financial aspects related to business,
    different methods of appraisal of projects and pricing techniques. At the end of this course the
    student shall have the knowledge of how to start a construction business, how to get finances,
    how to account, how to price and bid and how to assess the health of a project.
    UNIT I BASIC ECONOMICS 7
    Definition of economics - nature and scope of economic science - nature and scope of
    managerial economics - basic terms and concepts - goods - utility - value - wealth - factors of
    production - land - its peculiarities - labour - economies of large and small scale - consumption -
    wants - its characteristics and classification - law of diminishing marginal utility - relation
    between economic decision and technical decision.
    UNIT II DEMAND AND SCHEDULE 8
    Demand - demand schedule - demand curve - law of demand - elasticity of demand - types of
    elasticity - factors determining elasticity - measurement - its significance - supply - supply
    schedule - supply curve - law of supply - elasticity of supply - time element in the determination
    of value - market price and normal price - perfect competition - monopoly - monopolistic
    competition.
    UNIT III ORGANISATION 8
    Forms of business - proprietorship - partnership - joint stock company - cooperative organisation
    - state enterprise - mixed economy - money and banking - banking - kinds - commercial banks -
    central banking functions - control of credit - monetary policy - credit instrument.
    UNIT IV FINANCING 9
    Types of financing - Short term borrowing - Long term borrowing - Internal generation of funds -
    External commercial borrowings - Assistance from government budgeting support and
    international finance corporations - analysis of financial statement – Balance Sheet - Profit and
    Loss account - Funds flow statement.
    UNIT V COST AND BREAK EVEN ANALYSES 13
    Types of costing – traditional costing approach - activity base costing - Fixed Cost – variable
    cost – marginal cost – cost output relationship in the short run and in long run – pricing practice
    – full cost pricing – marginal cost pricing – going rate pricing – bid pricing – pricing for a rate of
    return – appraising project profitability –internal rate of return – pay back period – net present
    value – cost benefit analysis – feasibility reports – appraisal process – technical feasibilityeconomic
    feasibility – financial feasibility. Break even analysis - basic assumptions – break
    even chart – managerial uses of break even analysis.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Dewett K.K. & Varma J.D., Elementary Economic Theory, S Chand & Co., 2006
    2. Sharma JC "Construction Management and Accounts" Satya Prakashan, New Delhi.
    4
    REFERENCES
    1. Barthwal R.R., Industrial Economics - An Introductory Text Book, New Age
    2. Jhingan M.L., Micro Economic Theory, Konark
    3. Samuelson P.A., Economics - An Introductory Analysis, McGraw-Hill
    4. Adhikary M., Managerial Economics
    5. Khan MY and Jain PK "Financial Management" McGraw-Hill Publishing Co., Ltd
    6. Varshney RL and Maheshwary KL " Managerial Economics" S Chand and Co
    5
    101895 PROJECT WORK L T P C
    0 0 12 6
    OBJECTIVE
    The objective of the project work is to enable the students to work in convenient groups of not
    more than four members in a group on a project involving theoretical and experimental studies
    related to Civil Engineering. Every Project Work shall have a Guide who is a member of the
    faculty of Civil Engineering of the college where the student is registered. The hours allotted for
    this course shall be utilized by the students to receive directions from the Guide, on library
    reading, laboratory work, computer analysis or field work and also to present in periodical
    seminars the progress made in the project.
    Each student shall finally produce a comprehensive report covering background information,
    literature Survey, problem statement, Project work details and conclusions.
    This experience of project work shall help the student in expanding his / her knowledge base
    and also provide opportunity to utilise the creative ability and inference capability.
    TOTAL: 180 PERIODS
    EVALUATION PROCEDURE
    The method of evaluation will be as follows:
    1. Internal Marks : 20 marks
    (decided by conducting 3 reviews by the guide appointed by the
    Institution)
    2. Evaluation of Project Report : 30 marks
    (Evaluated by the external examiner appointed the University).
    Every student belonging to the same group gets the same mark
    3. Viva voce examination : 50 marks
    (evaluated by the internal examiner appointed by the HOD with the
    approval of HOI, external examiner appointed by the University and
    Guide of the course – with equal Weightage)
    Total : 100 marks
    6
    ELECTIVES
    101865 BRIDGE STRUCTURES L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of this course the student shall be able to choose appropriate bridge structure and
    design it for given site conditions.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
    Design of through type steel highway bridges for IRC loading - Design of stringers, cross girders
    and main girders - Design of deck type steel highway bridges for IRC loading - Design of main
    girders
    UNIT II STEEL BRIDGES 9
    Design of pratt type truss girder highway bridges - Design of top chord, bottom chord, web
    members - Effect of repeated loading - Design of plate girder railway bridges for railway loading
    - Wind effects - Design of web and flange plates - Vertical and horizontal stiffeners.
    UNIT III REINFORCED CONCRETE SLAB BRIDGES 9
    Design of solid slab bridges for IRC loading - Design of kerb - Design of tee beam bridges -
    Design of panel and cantilever for IRC loading
    UNIT IV REINFORCED CONCRETE GIRDER BRIDGES 9
    Design of tee beam - Courbon's theory - Pigeaud's curves - Design of balanced cantilever
    bridges - Deck slab - Main girder - Design of cantilever - Design of articulation.
    UNIT V PRESTRESSED CONCRETE BRIDGES 9
    Design of prestressed concrete bridges - Preliminary dimensions - Flexural and torsional
    parameters - Courbon's theory - Distribution coefficient by exact analysis - Design of girder
    section - Maximum and minimum prestressing forces - Eccentricity - Live load and dead load
    shear forces - cable zone in girder –Check for stresses at various sections - Check for diagonal
    tension - Diaphragms - End block - Short term and long term deflections.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Johnson Victor D., "Essentials of Bridge Engineering", Oxford and IBH Publishing Co.,
    New Delhi, 1990.
    2. Rajagopalan, N.Bridge Superstructure, Alpha Science International, 2006
    REFERENCES
    1. Phatak D.R., "Bridge Engineering", Satya Prakashan, New Delhi, 1990.
    2. Ponnuswamy S., "Bridge Engineering", Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 1996.
    7
    101866 STORAGE STRUCTURES L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    The main objective of this course is to impart the principles involved in designing structures
    which have to store different types of materials. The student at the end of the course shall be
    able to design concrete and steel material retaining structures.
    UNIT I STEEL WATER TANKS 12
    Design of rectangular riveted steel water tank – Tee covers – Plates – Stays –Longitudinal and
    transverse beams – Design of staging – Base plates – Foundation and anchor bolts – Design of
    pressed steel water tank – Design of stays – Joints – Design of hemispherical bottom water tank
    – side plates – Bottom plates – joints – Ring girder – Design of staging and foundation.
    UNIT II CONCRETE WATER TANKS 12
    Design of Circular tanks – Hinged and fixed at the base – IS method of calculating shear forces
    and moments – Hoop tension – Design of intze tank – Dome – Ring girders – Conical dome –
    Staging – Bracings – Raft foundation – Design of rectangular tanks – Approximate methods and
    IS methods – Design of under ground tanks – Design of base slab and side wall – Check for
    uplift.
    UNIT III STEEL BUNKERS AND SILOS 7
    Design of square bunker – Jansen's and Airy's theories – IS Codal provisions – Design of side
    plates – Stiffeners – Hooper – Longitudinal beams – Design of cylindrical silo – Side plates –
    Ring girder – stiffeners.
    UNIT IV CONCRETE BUNKERS AND SILOS 7
    Design of square bunker – Side Walls – Hopper bottom – Top and bottom edge beams –
    Design of cylindrical silo – Wall portion – Design of conical hopper – Ring beam at junction
    UNIT V PRESTRESSED CONCRETE WATER TANKS 7
    Principles of circular prestressing – Design of prestressed concrete circular water tanks
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Rajagopalan K., Storage Structures, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 1998.
    2. Krishna Raju N., Advanced Reinforced Concrete Design, CBS Publishers and
    Distributors, New Delhi, 1998.
    8
    101867 DESIGN OF PLATE AND SHELL STRUCTURES L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of this course the student shall understand the rudimentary principles involved in the
    analysis and design of plates and shells.
    UNIT I THIN PLATES WITH SMALL DEFLECTION 9
    Laterally loaded thin plates – governing differential equations – Simply supported and fixed
    boundary conditions
    UNIT II RECTANGULAR PLATES 9
    Simply supported rectangular plates – Navier's solution and Levy's method.
    UNIT III THIN SHELLS 9
    Classification of shells-structural actions – membrane theory
    UNIT IV ANALYSIS OF SHELLS 9
    Analysis of spherical dome – cylindrical shells – folded plates
    UNIT V DESIGN OF SHELLS 9
    Design of spherical dome – cylindrical shells – folded plates
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Bairagi N K, A text book of Plate Analysis, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 1996.
    2. G.S. Ramaswamy, Design and Construction of Shell Structures, CBS Plublishers,
    New Delhi, 1996
    3. S. Timoshenko & S. Woinowsky – Krieger, "Theory of Plates and Shells", McGraw Hill
    Book Company
    REFERENCES
    1. Szilard R, Theory and analysis of plates, Prentice Hall Inc, 1995
    2. Chatterjee B. K., Theory and Design of Concrete Shells, Oxford & IBH, New Delhi, 1998
    3. Billington D. P., Thin Shell Concrete Structures, McGraw-Hill, 1995.
    9
    101868 TALL BUILDINGS L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of this course the student should have understood the problems associated with
    large heights of structures with respect to loads (wind and earthquake and deflections of the
    structure). He should know the rudimentary principles of designing tall buildings as per the
    existing course.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
    The Tall Building in the Urban Context - The Tall Building and its Support Structure -
    Development of High Rise Building Structures - General Planning Considerations. Dead Loads -
    Live Loads-Construction Loads -Snow, Rain, and Ice Loads - Wind Loads-Seismic Loading –
    Water and Earth Pressure Loads - Loads - Loads Due to Restrained Volume Changes of
    Material - Impact and Dynamic Loads - Blast Loads -Combination of Loads.
    UNIT II THE VERTICAL STRUCTURE PLANE 9
    Dispersion of Vertical Forces- Dispersion of Lateral Forces - Optimum Ground Level Space -
    Shear Wall Arrangement - Behaviour of Shear Walls under Lateral Loading. The Floor Structure
    or Horizontal Building Plane Floor Framing Systems-Horizontal Bracing- Composite Floor
    Systems The High - Rise Building as related to assemblage Kits Skeleton Frame Systems -
    Load Bearing Wall Panel Systems - Panel – Frame Systems - Multistory Box Systems.
    UNIT III COMMON HIGH-RISE BUILDING STRUCTURES AND THEIR BEHAVIOUR
    UNDER LOAD 9
    The Bearing Wall Structure- The Shear Core Structure - Rigid Frame Systems- The Wall -
    Beam Structure: Interspatial and Staggered Truss Systems - Frame - Shear Wall Building
    Systems - Flat Slab Building Structures - Shear Truss - Frame Interaction System with Rigid -
    Belt Trusses - Tubular Systems-Composite Buildings - Comparison of High - Rise Structural
    Systems Other Design Approaches Controlling Building Drift Efficient Building Forms - The
    Counteracting Force or Dynamic Response.
    UNIT IV APPROXIMATE STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS AND DESIGN OF BUILDINGS 9
    Approximate Analysis of Bearing Wall Buildings The Cross Wall Structure - The Long Wall
    Structure The Rigid Frame Structure Approximate Analysis for Vertical Loading - Approximate
    Analysis for Lateral Loading - Approximate Design of Rigid Frame Buildings-Lateral Deformation
    of Rigid Frame Buildings The Rigid Frame - Shear Wall Structure - The Vierendeel Structure -
    The Hollow Tube Structure.
    UNIT V OTHER HIGH-RISE BUILDING STRUCTURE 9
    Deep - Beam Systems -High-Rise Suspension Systems - Pneumatic High -Rise Buildings -
    Space Frame Applied to High - Rise Buildings - Capsule Architecture.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. WOLFGANG SCHUELLER " High - rise building Structures", John Wiley and Sons,
    New York 1976.
    2. Bryan Stafford Smith and Alex Coull, " Tall Building Structures ", Analysis and Design,
    John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1991.
    10
    REFERENCES
    1. COULL, A. and SMITH, STAFFORD, B. " Tall Buildings ", Pergamon Press, London,
    1997.
    2. LinT.Y. and Burry D.Stotes, " Structural Concepts and Systems for Architects and
    Engineers ", John Wiley, 1994.
    3. Lynn S.Beedle, Advances in Tall Buildings, CBS Publishers and Distributors, Delhi,
    1996.
    4. Taranath.B.S., Structural Analysis and Design of Tall Buildings, Mc Graw Hill,1998.
    11
    101869 PREFABRICATED STRUCTURES L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of this course the student shall be able to appreciate modular construction,
    industrialised construction and shall be able to design some of the prefabricated elements and
    also have the knowledge of the construction methods using these elements.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
    Need for prefabrication – Principles – Materials – Modular coordination – Standarization –
    Systems – Production – Transportation – Erection.
    UNIT II PREFABRICATED COMPONENTS 9
    Behaviour of structural components – Large panel constructions – Construction of roof and floor
    slabs – Wall panels – Columns – Shear walls
    UNIT III DESIGN PRINCIPLES 9
    Disuniting of structures- Design of cross section based on efficiency of material used –
    Problems in design because of joint flexibility – Allowance for joint deformation.
    UNIT IV JOINT IN STRUCTURAL MEMBERS 9
    Joints for different structural connections – Dimensions and detailing – Design of expansion
    joints
    UNIT V DESIGN FOR ABNORMAL LOADS 9
    Progressive collapse – Code provisions – Equivalent design loads for considering abnormal
    effects such as earthquakes, cyclones, etc., - Importance of avoidance of progressive collapse.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. CBRI, Building materials and components, India, 1990
    2. Gerostiza C.Z., Hendrikson C. and Rehat D.R., Knowledge based process planning for
    construction and manufacturing, Academic Press Inc., 1994
    REFERENCES
    1. Koncz T., Manual of precast concrete construction, Vols. I, II and III, Bauverlag, GMBH,
    1971.
    2. Structural design manual, Precast concrete connection details, Society for the studies in
    the use of precast concrete, Netherland Betor Verlag, 1978.
    12
    101870 WIND ENGINEERING L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of this course the student should be able to appreciate the forces generated on
    structures due to normal wind as well as gusts. He should also be able to analyse the dynamic
    effects created by these wind forces.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
    Terminology – Wind Data – Gust factor and its determination - Wind speed variation with height
    – Shape factor – Aspect ratio – Drag and lift.
    UNIT II EFFECT OF WIND ON STRUCTURES 9
    Static effect – Dynamic effect – Interference effects (concept only) – Rigid structure –
    Aeroelastic structure (concept only).
    UNIT III EFFECT ON TYPICAL STRUCTURES 9
    Tail buildings – Low rise buildings – Roof and cladding – Chimneys, towers and bridges.
    UNIT IV APPLICATION TO DESIGN 9
    Design forces on multistorey building, towers and roof trusses.
    UNIT V INTRODUCTION TO WIND TUNNEL 9
    Types of models (Principles only) – Basic considerations – Examples of tests and their use.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Peter Sachs, "Wind Forces in Engineering, Pergamon Press, New York, 1992.
    2. Lawson T.V., Wind Effects on Buildings, Vols. I and II, Applied Science and Publishers,
    London, 1993.
    REFERENCES
    1. Devenport A.G., "Wind Loads on Structures", Division of Building Research, Ottowa,
    1990.
    2. Wind Force on Structures – Course Notes, Building Technology Centre, Anna University,
    1995.
    13
    101871 COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN OF STRUCTURE L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    The main objective of this programme is to train the student in the use of computers and
    creating a computer code as well as using commercially available software for the design of
    Civil Engineering structures.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
    Fundamentals of CAD - Hardware and software requirements -Design process - Applications
    and benefits.
    UNIT II COMPUTER GRAPHICS 9
    Graphic primitives - Transformations -Wire frame modeling and solid modeling -Graphic
    standards –Drafting packages
    UNIT III STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS 9
    Fundamentals of finite element analysis - Principles of structural analysis -Analysis packages
    and applications.
    UNIT IV DESIGN AND OPTIMISATION 9
    Principles of design of steel and RC Structures -Applications to simple design problems –
    Optimisation techniques - Algorithms - Linear Programming – Simplex method
    UNIT V EXPERT SYSTEMS 9
    Introduction to artificial intelligence - Knowledge based expert systems -Rules and decision
    tables –Inference mechanisms - Simple applications.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Groover M.P. and Zimmers E.W. Jr., "CAD/CAM, Computer Aided Design and
    Manufacturing", Prentice Hall of India Ltd, New Delhi, 1993.
    2. Krishnamoorthy C.S.Rajeev S., "Computer Aided Design", Narosa Publishing House,
    New Delhi, 1993
    REFERENCES
    1. Harrison H.B., "Structural Analysis and Design", Part I and II Pergamon Press, Oxford,
    1990.
    2. Rao S.S., "Optimisation Theory and Applications", Wiley Eastern Limited, New Delhi,
    1977.
    3. Richard Forsyth (Ed), "Expert System Principles and Case Studies", Chapman and Hall,
    London, 1989.
    14
    101872 INDUSTRIAL STRUCTURES L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    This course deals with some of the special aspects with respect to Civil Engineering structures
    in industries. At the end of this course the student shall be able to design some of the
    structures.
    UNIT I PLANNING 9
    Classification of Industries and Industrial structures – General requirements for industries like
    cement, chemical and steel plants – Planning and layout of buildings and components.
    UNIT II FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS 9
    Lighting – Ventilation – Acoustics – Fire safety – Guidelines from factories act.
    UNIIT III DESIGN OF STEEL STRUCTURES 9
    Industrial roofs – Crane girders – Mill buildings – Design of Bunkers and Silos
    UNIT IV DESIGN OF R.C. STRUCTURES 9
    Silos and bunkers – Chimneys – Principles of folded plates and shell roofs
    UNIT V PREFABRICATION 9
    Principles of prefabrication – Prestressed precast roof trusses- Functional requirements for
    Precast concrete units
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Reinforced Concrete Structural elements – P. Purushothaman.
    2. Pasala Dayaratnam – Design of Steel Structure – 1990.
    REFERENCES
    1. Henn W. Buildings for Industry, vols.I and II, London Hill Books, 1995.
    2. Handbook on Functional Requirements of Industrial buildings, SP32 – 1986, Bureau of
    Indian Standards, New Delhi 1990.
    3. Course Notes on Modern Developments in the Design and Construction of Industrial
    Structures, Structural Engineering Research Centre, Madras, 1982.
    4. Koncz, J, Manual of Precast Construction Vol I & II Bauverlay GMBH, 1971.
    15
    101873 SMART MATERIALS AND SMART STRUCTURES L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    This course is designed to give an insight into the latest developments regarding smart
    materials and their use in structures. Further, this also deals with structures which can self
    adjust their stiffness with load.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
    Introduction to Smart Materials and Structures – Instrumented structures functions and
    response – Sensing systems – Self diagnosis – Signal processing consideration – Actuation
    systems and effectors.
    UNIT II MEASURING TECHNIQUES 9
    Strain Measuring Techniques using Electrical strain gauges, Types – Resistance – Capacitance
    – Inductance – Wheatstone bridges – Pressure transducers – Load cells – Temperature
    Compensation – Strain Rosettes.
    UNIT III SENSORS 9
    Sensing Technology – Types of Sensors – Physical Measurement using Piezo Electric Strain
    measurement – Inductively Read Transducers – The LVOT – Fiber optic Techniques
    Chemical and Bio-Chemical sensing in structural Assessment – Absorptive chemical sensors –
    Spectroscopes – Fibre Optic Chemical Sensing Systems and Distributed measurement.
    UNIT IV ACTUATORS 9
    Actuator Techniques – Actuator and actuator materials – Piezoelectric and Electrostrictive
    Material – Magnetostructure Material – Shape Memory Alloys – Electro orheological Fluids–
    Electro magnetic actuation – Role of actuators and Actuator Materials.
    UNIT V SIGNAL PROCESSING AND CONTROL SYSTEMS 9
    Data Acquisition and Processing – Signal Processing and Control for Smart Structures –
    Sensors as Geometrical Processors – Signal Processing – Control System – Linear and Non-
    Linear.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Brain Culshaw – Smart Structure and Materials Artech House – Borton. London-1996.
    REFERENCES
    1. L. S. Srinath – Experimental Stress Analysis – Tata McGraw-Hill, 1998.
    2. J. W. Dally & W. F. Riley – Experimental Stress Analysis – Tata McGraw-Hill, 1998.
    16
    101874 FINITE ELEMENT TECHNIQUES L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of this course the student shall have a basic knowledge of finite element method and
    shall be able to analyse linear elastic structures, that he has studied about in core courses,
    using finite element method.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION – VARIATIONAL FORMULATION 9
    General field problems in Engineering – Modelling – Discrete and Continuous models –
    Characteristics – Difficulties involved in solution – The relevance and place of the finite element
    method – Historical comments – Basic concept of FEM, Boundary and initial value problems –
    Gradient and divergence theorems – Functionals – Variational calculus Variational formulation
    of VBPS. The method of weighted residuals – The Ritz method.
    UNIT II FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS OF ONE DIMENSIONAL PROBLEMS 10
    One dimensional second order equations – discretisation of domain into elements –
    Generalised coordinates approach – derivation of elements equations – assembly of elements
    equations – imposition of boundary conditions – solution of equations – Cholesky method – Post
    processing – Extension of the method to fourth order equations and their solutions – time
    dependant problems and their solutions – example from heat transfer, fluid flow and solid
    mechanics.
    UNIT III FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS OF TWO DIMENSIONAL PROBLEMS 10
    Second order equation involving a scalar-valued function – model equation – Variational
    formulation – Finite element formulation through generalised coordinates approach – Triangular
    elements and quadrilateral elements – convergence criteria for chosen models – Interpolation
    functions – Elements matrices and vectors – Assembly of element matrices – boundary
    conditions – solution techniques.
    UNIT IV ISOPARAMETRIC ELEMENTS AND FORMULATION 8
    Natural coordinates in 1, 2 and 3 dimensions – use of area coordinates for triangular elements
    in - 2 dimensional problems – Isoparametric elements in 1,2 and 3 dimensional Largrangean
    and serendipity elements – Formulations of elements equations in one and two dimensions -
    Numerical integration.
    UNIT V APPLICATIONS TO FIELD PROBLEMS IN TWO DIMENSIONALS 8
    Equations of elasticity – plane elasticity problems – axisymmetric problems in elasticity –
    Bending of elastic plates – Time dependent problems in elasticity – Heat – transfer in two
    dimensions – incompressible fluid flow
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOK
    1. Chandrupatla, T.R., and Belegundu, A.D., "Introduction to Finite Element in
    Engineering", Third Edition, Prentice Hall, India, 2003.
    17
    REFERENCES
    1. J.N.Reddy, "An Introduction to Finite Element Method", McGraw-Hill, Intl. Student
    Edition, 1985.
    2. Zienkiewics, "The finite element method, Basic formulation and linear problems", Vol.1,
    4/e, McGraw-Hill, Book Co.
    3. S.S.Rao, "The Finite Element Method in Engineering", Pergaman Press, 2003.
    4. C.S.Desai and J.F.Abel, "Introduction to the Finite Element Method", Affiliated East West
    Press, 1972.
    101875 REPAIR AND REHABILITATION OF STRUCTURES L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    To get the knowledge on quality of concrete, durability aspects, causes of deterioration,
    assessment of distressed structures, repairing of structures and demolition procedures.
    UNIT I MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR STRATEGIES 9
    Maintenance, repair and rehabilitation, Facets of Maintenance, importance of Maintenance
    various aspects of Inspection, Assessment procedure for evaluating a damaged structure,
    causes of deterioration
    UNIT II SERVICEABILITY AND DURABILITY OF CONCRETE 11
    Quality assurance for concrete construction concrete properties- strength, permeability, thermal
    properties and cracking. - Effects due to climate, temperature, chemicals, corrosion - design
    and construction errors - Effects of cover thickness and cracking
    UNIT III MATERIALS FOR REPAIR 9
    Special concretes and mortar, concrete chemicals, special elements for accelerated strength
    gain, Expansive cement, polymer concrete, sulphur infiltrated concrete, ferro cement, Fibre
    reinforced concrete.
    UNIT IV TECHNIQUES FOR REPAIR AND DEMOLITION 8
    Rust eliminators and polymers coating for rebars during repair, foamed concrete, mortar and dry
    pack, vacuum concrete, Gunite and Shotcrete, Epoxy injection, Mortar repair for cracks, shoring
    and underpinning. Methods of corrosion protection, corrosion inhibitors, corrosion resistant
    steels, coatings and cathodic protection. Engineered demolition techniques for dilapidated
    structures - case studies.
    UNIT V REPAIRS, REHABILITATION AND RETROFITTING OF STRUCTURES 8
    Repairs to overcome low member strength, Deflection, Cracking, Chemical disruption,
    weathering corrosion, wear, fire, leakage and marine exposure.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Denison Campbell, Allen and Harold Roper, Concrete Structures, Materials,
    Maintenance and Repair, Longman Scientific and Technical UK, 1991.
    2. R.T.Allen and S.C.Edwards, Repair of Concrete Structures, Blakie and Sons, UK, 1987
    18
    REFERENCES
    1. M.S.Shetty, Concrete Technology - Theory and Practice, S.Chand and Company, New
    Delhi, 1992.
    2. Santhakumar, A.R., Training Course notes on Damage Assessment and repair in Low
    Cost Housing , "RHDC-NBO" Anna University, July 1992.
    3. Raikar, R.N., Learning from failures - Deficiencies in Design, Construction and Service -
    R&D Centre (SDCPL), Raikar Bhavan, Bombay, 1987.
    4. N.Palaniappan, Estate Management, Anna Institute of Management, Chennai, 1992.
    5. Lakshmipathy, M. etal. Lecture notes of Workshop on "Repairs and Rehabilitation of
    Structures", 29 - 30th October 1999.
     
  6. Jangakuu

    Jangakuu JF-Expert Member

    #6
    Aug 23, 2012
    Joined: Apr 24, 2012
    Messages: 497
    Likes Received: 0
    Trophy Points: 0
    SYLLABUS YA ST. JOSEPH UNIVERSITY(B.E CIVIL ENGINEERING)


    CURRICULUM AND SYLLABI

    with effect academic from year 2007 .
    B.E. CIVIL ENGINEERING
    SEMESTER II
    SL.
    No.
    COURSE
    CODE
    COURSE TITLE L T P C
    THEORY
    1. 186202 Technical English – II * 3 1 0 4
    2. 181202 Mathematics – II * 3 1 0 4
    3. 182202 Engineering Physics – II * 3 0 0 3
    4. 183202 Engineering Chemistry – II * 3 0 0 3
    5. 113201 Engineering Mechanics 3 1 0 4
    6. 185203 Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering 4 0 0 4
    PRACTICAL
    7. 185253 Computer Practice Laboratory – II * 0 1 2 2
    8. 184252 Physics and Chemistry Laboratory – II * 0 0 3 2
    9. 113251 Computer Aided Drafting and Modeling
    Laboratory
    0 1 2 2
    TOTAL : 28 CREDITS
    10. - English Language Laboratory
    +
    0 0 2 -
    * Common to all B.E. / B.Tech. Programmes
    + Offering English Language Laboratory as an additional subject (with no marks) during
    2
    nd
    semester may be decided by the respective Colleges affiliated to Anna University of
    Technology Chennai.
    2
    186202 TECHNICAL ENGLISH II L T P C
    3 1 0 4
    AIM:
    To encourage students to actively involved in participative learning of English and to help
    them acquire Communication Skills.
    OBJECTIVES:
    1. To help students develop listening skills for academic and professional purposes.
    2. To help students acquire the ability to speak effectively in English in real-life situations.
    3. To inculcate reading habit and to develop effective reading skills.
    4. To help students improve their active and passive vocabulary.
    5. To familiarize students with different rhetorical functions of scientific English.
    6. To enable students write letters and reports effectively in formal and business
    situations.
    UNIT I 12
    Technical Vocabulary - meanings in context, sequencing words, Articles- Prepositions,
    intensive reading& predicting content, Reading and interpretation, extended definitions,
    Process description
    Suggested activities:
    1. Exercises on word formation using the prefix ‘self’ - Gap filling with preposition.
    2. Exercises - Using sequence words.
    3. Reading comprehension exercise with questions based on inference – Reading
    headings
    4. and predicting the content – Reading advertisements and interpretation.
    5. Writing extended definitions – Writing descriptions of processes – Writing paragraphs
    based on discussions – Writing paragraphs describing the future.
    UNIT II 12
    Phrases / Structures indicating use / purpose – Adverbs-Skimming – Non-verbal
    communication - Listening – correlating verbal and non-verbal communication -Speaking in
    group discussions – Formal Letter writing – Writing analytical paragraphs.
    Suggested activities:
    1. Reading comprehension exercises with questions on overall content – Discussions
    analyzing stylistic features (creative and factual description) - Reading
    comprehension exercises with texts including graphic communication - Exercises in
    interpreting non-verbal communication.
    2. Listening comprehension exercises to categorise data in tables.
    3. Writing formal letters, quotations, clarification, complaint – Letter seeking permission
    for Industrial visits– Writing analytical paragraphs on different debatable issues.
    UNIT III 12
    Cause and effect expressions – Different grammatical forms of the same word - Speaking –
    stress and intonation, Group Discussions - Reading – Critical reading - Listening, - Writing –
    using connectives, report writing – types, structure, data collection, content, form,
    recommendations .
    3
    Suggested activities:
    1. Exercises combining sentences using cause and effect expressions – Gap filling
    exercises using the appropriate tense forms – Making sentences using different
    grammatical forms of the same word. ( Eg: object –verb / object – noun )
    2. Speaking exercises involving the use of stress and intonation – Group discussions–
    analysis of problems and offering solutions.
    3. Reading comprehension exercises with critical questions, Multiple choice question.
    4. Sequencing of jumbled sentences using connectives – Writing different types of
    reports like industrial accident report and survey report – Writing recommendations.
    UNIT IV 12
    Numerical adjectives – Oral instructions – Descriptive writing – Argumentative paragraphs
    – Letter of application - content, format (CV / Bio-data) - Instructions, imperative forms -
    Checklists, Yes/No question form – E-mail communication.
    Suggested Activities:
    1. Rewriting exercises using numerical adjectives.
    2. Reading comprehension exercises with analytical questions on content – Evaluation
    of content.
    3. Listening comprehension – entering information in tabular form, intensive listening
    exercise and completing the steps of a process.
    4. Speaking - Role play – group discussions – Activities giving oral instructions.
    5. Writing descriptions, expanding hints – Writing argumentative paragraphs – Writing
    formal letters – Writing letter of application with CV/Bio-data – Writing general and
    safety instructions – Preparing checklists – Writing e-mail messages.
    UNIT V 9
    Speaking - Discussion of Problems and solutions - Creative and critical thinking – Writing an
    essay, Writing a proposal.
    Suggested Activities:
    1. Case Studies on problems and solutions
    2. Brain storming and discussion
    3. Writing Critical essays
    4. Writing short proposals of 2 pages for starting a project, solving problems, etc.
    5. Writing advertisements.
    TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOK:
    1. Chapters 5 – 8. Department of Humanities & Social Sciences, Anna University,
    ‘English for Engineers and Technologists’ Combined Edition (Volumes 1 & 2),
    Chennai: Orient Longman Pvt. Ltd., 2006. Themes 5 – 8 (Technology,
    Communication, Environment, Industry).
    REFERENCES:
    1. P. K. Dutt, G. Rajeevan and C.L.N Prakash, ‘A Course in Communication
    Skills’, Cambridge University Press, India 2007.
    2. Krishna Mohan and Meera Banerjee, ‘Developing Communication Skills’,
    Macmillan India Ltd., (Reprinted 1994 – 2007).
    3. Edgar Thorpe, Showick Thorpe, ‘Objective English’, Second Edition, Pearson
    Education, 2007.
    4
    Extensive Reading:
    1. Robin Sharma, ‘The Monk Who Sold His Ferrari’, Jaico Publishing House, 2007
    Note:
    The book listed under Extensive Reading is meant for inculcating the reading habit of
    the students. They need not be used for testing purposes.
    5
    181202 MATHEMATICS – II L T P C
    3 1 0 4
    UNIT I ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12
    Higher order linear differential equations with constant coefficients – Method of variation of
    parameters – Cauchy’s and Legendre’s linear equations – Simultaneous first order linear
    equations with constant coefficients.
    UNIT II VECTOR CALCULUS 12
    Gradient Divergence and Curl – Directional derivative – Irrotational and solenoidal vector
    fields – Vector integration – Green’s theorem in a plane, Gauss divergence theorem and
    stokes’ theorem (excluding proofs) – Simple applications involving cubes and rectangular
    parallelpipeds.
    UNIT III ANALYTIC FUNCTIONS 12
    Functions of a complex variable – Analytic functions – Necessary conditions, Cauchy –
    Riemann equation and Sufficient conditions (excluding proofs) – Harmonic and orthogonal
    properties of analytic function – Harmonic conjugate – Construction of analytic functions –
    Conformal mapping : w= z+c, cz, 1/z, and bilinear transformation.
    UNIT IV COMPLEX INTEGRATION 12
    Complex integration – Statement and applications of Cauchy’s integral theorem and
    Cauchy’s integral formula – Taylor and Laurent expansions – Singular points – Residues –
    Residue theorem – Application of residue theorem to evaluate real integrals – Unit circle and
    semi-circular contour(excluding poles on boundaries).
    UNIT V LAPLACE TRANSFORM 12
    Laplace transform – Conditions for existence – Transform of elementary functions – Basic
    properties – Transform of derivatives and integrals – Transform of unit step function and
    impulse functions – Transform of periodic functions.
    Definition of Inverse Laplace transform as contour integral – Convolution theorem (excluding
    proof) – Initial and Final value theorems – Solution of linear ODE of second order with
    constant coefficients using Laplace transformation techniques.
    TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOK:
    1. Bali N. P and Manish Goyal, “Text book of Engineering Mathematics”, 3
    rd
    Edition,
    Laxmi Publications (p) Ltd., (2008).
    2. Grewal. B.S, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, 40
    th
    Edition, Khanna Publications,
    Delhi, (2007).
    REFERENCES:
    1. Ramana B.V, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”,Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
    Company, New Delhi, (2007).
    2. Glyn James, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, 3
    rd
    Edition, Pearson Education,
    (2007).
    3. Erwin Kreyszig, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, 7
    th
    Edition, Wiley India,
    (2007).
    4. Jain R.K and Iyengar S.R.K, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, 3
    rd
    Edition,
    Narosa Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., (2007).
    6
    182202 ENGINEERING PHYSICS – II L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    UNIT I CONDUCTING MATERIALS 9
    Conductors – classical free electron theory of metals – Electrical and thermal conductivity –
    Wiedemann – Franz law – Lorentz number – Draw backs of classical theory – Quantum
    theory – Fermi distribution function – Effect of temperature on Fermi Function – Density of
    energy states – carrier concentration in metals.
    UNIT II SEMICONDUCTING MATERIALS 9
    Intrinsic semiconductor – carrier concentration derivation – Fermi level – Variation of Fermi
    level with temperature – electrical conductivity – band gap determination – extrinsic
    semiconductors – carrier concentration derivation in n-type and p-type semiconductor –
    variation of Fermi level with temperature and impurity concentration – compound
    semiconductors – Hall effect –Determination of Hall coefficient – Applications.
    UNIT III MAGNETIC AND SUPERCONDUCTING MATERIALS 9
    Origin of magnetic moment – Bohr magneton – Dia and para magnetism – Ferro magnetism
    – Domain theory – Hysteresis – soft and hard magnetic materials – anti – ferromagnetic
    materials – Ferrites – applications – magnetic recording and readout – storage of magnetic
    data – tapes, floppy and magnetic disc drives.
    Superconductivity : properties - Types of super conductors – BCS theory of
    superconductivity(Qualitative) - High Tc superconductors – Applications of superconductors
    – SQUID, cryotron, magnetic levitation.
    UNIT IV DIELECTRIC MATERIALS 9
    Electrical susceptibility – dielectric constant – electronic, ionic, orientational and space
    charge polarization – frequency and temperature dependence of polarisation – internal field
    – Claussius – Mosotti relation (derivation) – dielectric loss – dielectric breakdown – uses of
    dielectric materials (capacitor and transformer) – ferroelectricity and applications.
    UNIT V MODERN ENGINEERING MATERIALS 9
    Metallic glasses: preparation, properties and applications.
    Shape memory alloys (SMA): Characteristics, properties of NiTi alloy, application,
    advantages and disadvantages of SMA
    Nanomaterials: synthesis –plasma arcing – chemical vapour deposition – sol-gels –
    electrodeposition – ball milling - properties of nanoparticles and applications.
    Carbon nanotubes: fabrication – arc method – pulsed laser deposition – chemical vapour
    deposition - structure – properties and applications.
    TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS:
    1. Charles Kittel ‘ Introduction to Solid State Physics’, John Wiley & sons,
    7
    th
    edition, Singapore (2007)
    2. Charles P. Poole and Frank J.Ownen, ’Introduction to Nanotechnology’, Wiley
    India(2007) (for Unit V)
    REFERENCES:
    1. Rajendran, V, and Marikani A, ‘Materials science’Tata McGraw Hill publications,
    (2004) New delhi.
    2. Jayakumar, S. ‘Materials science’, R.K. Publishers, Coimbatore, (2008).
    3. Palanisamy P.K, ‘Materials science’, Scitech publications(India) Pvt. LTd., Chennai,
    second Edition(2007)
    4. M. Arumugam, ‘Materials Science’ Anuradha publications, Kumbakonam, (2006).
    7
    183202 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY – II L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    AIM
    To impart a sound knowledge on the principles of chemistry involving the different
    application oriented topics required for all engineering branches.
    OBJECTIVES
    • The student should be conversant with the principles electrochemistry,
    electrochemical cells, emf and applications of emf measurements.
    • Principles of corrosion control
    • Chemistry of Fuels and combustion
    • Industrial importance of Phase rule and alloys
    • Analytical techniques and their importance.
    UNIT I ELECTROCHEMISTRY 9
    Electrochemical cells – reversible and irreversible cells – EMF – measurement of emf –
    Single electrode potential – Nernst equation (problem) – reference electrodes –Standard
    Hydrogen electrode -Calomel electrode – Ion selective electrode – glass electrode and
    measurement of pH – electrochemical series – significance – potentiometer titrations (redox
    - Fe²
    +
    vs dichromate and precipitation – Ag
    +
    vs CI
    -
    titrations) and conduct metric titrations
    (acid-base – HCI vs, NaOH) titrations,
    UNIT II CORROSION AND CORROSION CONTROL 9
    Chemical corrosion – Pilling – Bedworth rule – electrochemical corrosion – different types –
    galvanic corrosion – differential aeration corrosion – factors influencing corrosion – corrosion
    control – sacrificial anode and impressed cathodic current methods – corrosion inhibitors –
    protective coatings – paints – constituents and functions – metallic coatings – electroplating
    (Au) and electroless (Ni) plating.
    UNIT III FUELS AND COMBUSTION 9
    Calorific value – classification – Coal – proximate and ultimate analysis metallurgical coke –
    manufacture by Otto-Hoffmann method – Petroleum processing and fractions – cracking –
    catalytic cracking and methods-knocking – octane number and cetane number – synthetic
    petrol – Fischer Tropsch and Bergius processes – Gaseous fuels- water gas, producer gas,
    CNG and LPG, Flue gas analysis – Orsat apparatus – theoretical air for combustion.
    UNIT IV PHASE RULE AND ALLOYS 9
    Statement and explanation of terms involved – one component system – water system –
    condensed phase rule – construction of phase diagram by thermal analysis – simple eutectic
    systems (lead-silver system only) – alloys – importance, ferrous alloys – nichrome and
    stainless steel – heat treatment of steel, non-ferrous alloys – brass and bronze.
    UNIT V ANALYTICAL TECHNIQUES 9
    Beer-Lambert’s law (problem) – UV-visible spectroscopy and IR spectroscopy – principles –
    instrumentation (problem) (block diagram only) – estimation of iron by colorimetry – flame
    photometry – principle – instrumentation (block diagram only) – estimation of sodium by
    flame photometry – atomic absorption spectroscopy – principles – instrumentation (block
    diagram only) – estimation of nickel by atomic absorption spectroscopy.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    8
    TEXT BOOKS:
    1. P.C.Jain and Monica Jain, “Engineering Chemistry” Dhanpat Rai Pub, Co., New
    Delhi (2002).
    2. S.S.Dara “A text book of Engineering Chemistry” S.Chand & Co.Ltd., New Delhi
    (2006).
    REFERENCES:
    1. B.Sivasankar “Engineering Chemistry” Tata McGraw-Hill Pub.Co.Ltd, New Delhi
    (2008).
    2. B.K.Sharma “Engineering Chemistry” Krishna Prakasan Media (P) Ltd., Meerut
    (2001).
    9
    113201 ENGINEERING MECHANICS L T P C
    3 1 0 4
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of this course the student should be able to understand the vectorial and scalar
    representation of forces and moments, static equilibrium of particles and rigid bodies both in
    two dimensions and also in three dimensions. Further, he should understand the principle of
    work and energy. He should be able to comprehend the effect of friction on equilibrium. He
    should be able to understand the laws of motion, the kinematics of motion and the
    interrelationship. He should also be able to write the dynamic equilibrium equation. All these
    should be achieved both conceptually and through solved examples.
    UNIT I BASICS & STATICS OF PARTICLES 12
    Introduction – Units and Dimensions – Laws of Mechanics – Lame’s theorem, Parallelogram
    and triangular Law of forces – Vectors – Vectorial representation of forces and moments –
    Vector operations: additions, subtraction, dot product, cross product – Coplanar Forces –
    Resolution and Composition of forces – Equilibrium of a particle – Forces in space –
    Equilibrium of a particle in space – Equivalent systems of forces – Principle of
    transmissibility – Single equivalent force.
    UNIT II EQUILIBRIUM OF RIGID BODIES 12
    Free body diagram – Types of supports and their reactions – requirements of stable
    equilibrium – Moments and Couples – Moment of a force about a point and about an axis –
    Vectorial representation of moments and couples – Scalar components of a moment –
    Varignon’s theorem – Equilibrium of Rigid bodies in two dimensions – Equilibrium of Rigid
    bodies in three dimensions – Examples
    UNIT III PROPERTIES OF SURFACES AND SOLIDS 12
    Determination of Areas and Volumes – First moment of area and the Centroid of sections –
    Rectangle, circle, triangle from integration – T section, I section, - Angle section, Hollow
    section by using standard formula – second and product moments of plane area –
    Rectangle, triangle, circle from integration – T section, I section, Angle section, Hollow
    section by using standard formula – Parallel axis theorem and perpendicular axis theorem –
    Polar moment of inertia – Principal moments of inertia of plane areas – Principal axes of
    inertia – Mass moment of inertia – Derivation of mass moment of inertia for rectangular
    section, prism, sphere from first principle – Relation to area moments of inertia.
    UNIT IV DYNAMICS OF PARTICLES 12
    Displacements, Velocity and acceleration, their relationship – Relative motion – Curvilinear
    motion – Newton’s law – Work Energy Equation of particles – Impulse and Momentum –
    Impact of elastic bodies.
    UNIT V FRICTION AND ELEMENTS OF RIGID BODY DYNAMICS 12
    Frictional force – Laws of Coloumb friction – simple contact friction – Rolling resistance –
    Belt friction.
    Translation and Rotation of Rigid Bodies – Velocity and acceleration – General Plane
    motion.
    TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOK:
    1. Beer, F.P and Johnson Jr. E.R. “Vector Mechanics for Engineers”, Vol. 1 Statics and
    Vol. 2 Dynamics, McGraw-Hill International Edition, (1997).
    10
    REFERENCES:
    1. Rajasekaran, S, Sankarasubramanian, G., “Fundamentals of Engineering
    Mechanics”, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., (2000).
    2. Hibbeller, R.C., “Engineering Mechanics”, Vol. 1 Statics, Vol. 2 Dynamics, Pearson
    Education Asia Pvt. Ltd., (2000).
    3. Palanichamy, M.S., Nagam, S., “Engineering Mechanics – Statics & Dynamics”, Tata
    McGraw-Hill, (2001).
    4. Irving H. Shames, “Engineering Mechanics – Statics and Dynamics”, IV Edition –
    Pearson Education Asia Pvt. Ltd., (2003).
    5. Ashok Gupta, “Interactive Engineering Mechanics – Statics – A Virtual Tutor
    (CDROM)”, Pearson Education Asia Pvt., Ltd., (2002).
    11
    185203 BASIC ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING L T P C
    (Common to branches under Civil, Mechanical and Technology faculty) 3 0 0 3
    UNIT I ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS & MEASURMENTS 12
    Ohm’s Law – Kirchoff’s Laws – Steady State Solution of DC Circuits – Introduction to AC
    Circuits – Waveforms and RMS Value – Power and Power factor – Single Phase and Three
    Phase Balanced Circuits.
    Operating Principles of Moving Coil and Moving Iron Instruments (Ammeters and
    Voltmeters), Dynamometer type Watt meters and Energy meters.
    UNIT II ELECTRICAL MECHANICS 12
    Construction, Principle of Operation, Basic Equations and Applications of DC Generators,
    DC Motors, Single Phase Transformer, single phase induction Motor.
    UNIT III SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AND APPLICATIONS 12
    Characteristics of PN Junction Diode – Zener Effect – Zener Diode and its Characteristics –
    Half wave and Full wave Rectifiers – Voltage Regulation.
    Bipolar Junction Transistor – CB, CE, CC Configurations and Characteristics – Elementary
    Treatment of Small Signal Amplifier.
    UNIT IV DIGITAL ELECTRONICS 12
    Binary Number System – Logic Gates – Boolean Algebra – Half and Full Adders – Flip-Flops
    – Registers and Counters – A/D and D/A Conversion (single concepts)
    UNIT V FUNDAMENTALS OF COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING 12
    Types of Signals: Analog and Digital Signals – Modulation and Demodulation: Principles of
    Amplitude and Frequency Modulations.
    Communication Systems: Radio, TV, Fax, Microwave, Satellite and Optical Fibre (Block
    Diagram Approach only).
    TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS:
    1. V.N. Mittle “Basic Electrical Engineering”,Tata McGraw Hill Edition, New Delhi, 1990.
    2. R.S. Sedha, “Applied Electronics” S. Chand & Co., 2006.
    REFERENCES:
    1. Muthusubramanian R, Salivahanan S and Muraleedharan K A, “Basic Electrical,
    Electronics and Computer Engineering”,Tata McGraw Hill, Second Edition, (2006).
    2. Nagsarkar T K and Sukhija M S, “Basics of Electrical Engineering”, Oxford press
    (2005).
    3. Mehta V K, “Principles of Electronics”, S.Chand & Company Ltd, (1994).
    4. Mahmood Nahvi and Joseph A. Edminister, “Electric Circuits”, Schaum’ Outline
    Series, McGraw Hill, (2002).
    5. Premkumar N, “Basic Electrical Engineering”, Anuradha Publishers, (2003).
    12
    185253 COMPUTER PRACTICE LABORATORY – II L T P C
    0 1 2 2
    LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
    1. UNIX COMMANDS 15
    Study of Unix OS - Basic Shell Commands - Unix Editor
    2. SHELL PROGRAMMING 15
    Simple Shell program - Conditional Statements - Testing and Loops
    3. C PROGRAMMING ON UNIX 15
    Dynamic Storage Allocation-Pointers-Functions-File Handling
    TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
    HARDWARE / SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
    Hardware
    1 UNIX Clone Server
    33 Nodes (thin client or PCs)
    Printer – 3 Nos.
    Software
    OS – UNIX Clone (33 user license or License free Linux)
    Compiler - C
    13
    184252 PHYSICS LABORATORY – II L T P C
    0 0 3 2
    LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
    1. Determination of Young’s modulus of the material – non uniform bending.
    2. Determination of Band Gap of a semiconductor material.
    3. Determination of specific resistance of a given coil of wire – Carey Foster
    Bridge.
    4. Determination of viscosity of liquid – Poiseuille’s method.
    5. Spectrometer dispersive power of a prism.
    6. Determination of Young’s modulus of the material – uniform bending.
    7. Torsional pendulum – Determination of rigidity modulus.
    • A minimum of FIVE experiments shall be offered.
    • Laboratory classes on alternate weeks for Physics and Chemistry.
    • The lab examinations will be held only in the second semester.
    14
    184252 CHEMISTRY LABORATORY – II L T P C
    0 0 3 2
    LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
    1. Conduct metric titration (Simple acid base)
    2. Conduct metric titration (Mixture of weak and strong acids)
    3. Conduct metric titration using BaCl
    2
    vs Na
    2
    SO
    4
    4. Potentiometric Titration (Fe
    2+
    / KMnO
    4
    or K
    2
    Cr
    2
    O
    7
    )
    5. PH titration (acid & base)
    6. Determination of water of crystallization of a crystalline salt (Copper sulphate)
    7. Estimation of Ferric iron by spectrophotometry.
    • A minimum of FIVE experiments shall be offered.
    • Laboratory classes on alternate weeks for Physics and Chemistry.
    • The lab examinations will be held only in the second semester.
    15
    113251 COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING AND MODELING LABORATORY
    L T P C
    0 1 2 2
    List of Exercises using software capable of Drafting and Modeling
    1. Study of capabilities of software for Drafting and Modeling – Coordinate systems
    (absolute, relative, polar, etc.) – Creation of simple figures like polygon and general
    multi-line figures.
    2. Drawing of a Title Block with necessary text and projection symbol.
    3. Drawing of curves like parabola, spiral, involute using Bspline or cubic spline.
    4. Drawing of front view and top view of simple solids like prism, pyramid, cylinder,
    cone, etc, and dimensioning.
    5. Drawing front view, top view and side view of objects from the given pictorial views
    (eg. V-block, Base of a mixie, Simple stool, Objects with hole and curves).
    6. Drawing of a plan of residential building ( Two bed rooms, kitchen, hall, etc.)
    7. Drawing of a simple steel truss.
    8. Drawing sectional views of prism, pyramid, cylinder, cone, etc,
    9. Drawing isometric projection of simple objects.
    10. Creation of 3-D models of simple objects and obtaining 2-D multi-view drawings from
    3-D model.
    Note: Plotting of drawings must be made for each exercise and attached to the
    records written by students.
    List of Equipments for a batch of 30 students:
    1. Pentium IV computer or better hardware, with suitable graphics facility -30 No.
    2. Licensed software for Drafting and Modeling. – 30 Licenses
    3. Laser Printer or Plotter to print / plot drawings – 2 No.
    16
    ENGLISH LANGUAGE LABORATORY (Optional) L T P C
    0 0 2 -
    1. Listening: 5
    Listening & answering questions – gap filling – Listening and Note taking- Listening to
    telephone conversations
    2. Speaking: 5
    Pronouncing words & sentences correctly – word stress – Conversation practice.
    Classroom Session 20
    1. Speaking: Introducing oneself, Introducing others, Role play, Debate-
    Presentations: Body language, gestures, postures.
    Group Discussions etc
    2. Goal setting – interviews – stress time management – situational reasons
    Evaluation
    (1) Lab Session – 40 marks
    Listening – 10 marks
    Speaking – 10 marks
    Reading – 10 marks
    Writing – 10 marks
    (2) Classroom Session – 60 marks
    Role play activities giving real life context – 30 marks
    Presentation – 30 marks
    Note on Evaluation
    1. Examples for role play situations:
    a. Marketing engineer convincing a customer to buy his product.
    b. Telephone conversation – Fixing an official appointment / Enquiry on
    availability of flight or train tickets / placing an order. etc.
    2. Presentations could be just a Minute (JAM activity) or an Extempore on simple
    topics or visuals could be provided and students could be asked to talk about it.
    REFERENCES:
    1. Hartley, Peter, Group Communication, London: Routledge, (2004).
    2. Doff, Adrian and Christopher Jones, Language in Use – (Intermediate level),
    Cambridge University Press, (1994).
    3. Gammidge, Mick, Speaking Extra – A resource book of multi-level skills activities,
    Cambridge University Press, (2004).
    4. Craven, Miles, Listening Extra - A resource book of multi-level skills activities,
    Cambridge, Cambridge University Press, (2004).
    5. Naterop, Jean & Rod Revell, Telephoning in English, Cambridge University Press,
    (1987).
    17
    LAB REQUIREMENTS
    1. Teacher – Console and systems for students
    2. English Language Lab Software
    3. Tape Recorders.
    1
    AFFILIATED INSTITUTIONS
    ANNA UNIVERSITY OF TECHNOLOGY CHENNAI :: CHENNAI 600 113
    REGULATIONS 2010
    B.E. CIVIL ENGINEERING
    CURRICULA AND SYLLABI FOR III & IV SEMESTERS
    SEMESTER III
    (Applicable to the students admitted from the Academic year 2010 – 2011 onwards)
    COURSE
    CODE
    COURSE TITLE L T P C
    THEORY
    181301 Transforms and Partial Differential Equations 3 1 0 4
    185301 Environmental Science and Engineering 3 0 0 3
    187301 Applied Geology 3 0 0 3
    101301 Mechanics of Solids 3 1 0 4
    101302 Mechanics of Fluids 3 1 0 4
    101303
    Construction Techniques, Equipment and
    Practice
    4 0 0 4
    101304 Surveying– I 3 0 0 3
    PRACTICAL
    101351 Survey Practical – I 0 0 4 2
    101352 Computer Aided Building Drawing 0 0 4 2
    TOTAL 22 3 8 29
    2
    181301 TRANSFORMS AND PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 3 1 0 4
    (Common to all B.E. / B.Tech. Degree Programmes)
    OBJECTIVES
    The course objective is to develop the skills of the students in the areas of Transforms and Partial
    Differtial Equations. This will be necessary for their effective studies in a large number of
    engineering subjects like heat conduction, communication systems, electro-optics and
    electromagnetic theory. The course will also serve as a prerequisite for post graduate and
    specialized studies and research.
    1. FOURIER SERIES 9 + 3
    Dirichlet’s conditions – General Fourier series – Odd and even functions – Half range sine series
    – Half range cosine series – Complex form of Fourier Series – Parseval’s identify – Harmonic
    Analysis.
    2. FOURIER TRANSFORMS 9 + 3
    Fourier integral theorem (without proof) – Fourier transform pair – Sine and
    Cosine transforms – Properties – Transforms of simple functions – Convolution theorem –
    Parseval’s identity.
    3. PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9 +3
    Formation of partial differential equations – Lagrange’s linear equation – Solutions of standard
    types of first order partial differential equations - Linear partial differential equations of second
    and higher order with constant coefficients.
    4. APPLICATIONS OF PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9 + 3
    Solutions of one dimensional wave equation – One dimensional equation of heat conduction –
    Steady state solution of two-dimensional equation of heat conduction (Insulated edges excluded)
    – Fourier series solutions in cartesian coordinates.
    5. Z -TRANSFORMS AND DIFFERENCE EQUATIONS 9 + 3
    Z-transforms - Elementary properties – Inverse Z-transform – Convolution theorem -Formation of
    difference equations – Solution of difference equations using Z-transform.
    TOTAL (L:45+T:15): 60 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Grewal, B.S, “Higher Engineering Mathematic”, 40th Edition, Khanna publishers, Delhi,
    (2007)
    REFERENCES
    1. Bali.N.P and Manish Goyal, “A Textbook of Engineering Mathematic”, 7th Edition, Laxmi
    Publications(P) Ltd. (2007)
    2. Ramana.B.V., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Tata Mc-GrawHill Publishing Company
    limited, New Delhi (2007).
    3. Glyn James, “Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics”, 3rd Edition, Pearson Education
    (2007).
    4. Erwin Kreyszig, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, 8th edition, Wiley India (2007).
    3
    185301 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING 3 0 0 3
    (Common to Civil, CSE, IT & Biomedical Degree Programmes)
    AIM
    The aim of this course is to create awareness in every engineering graduate about the
    importance of environment, the effect of technology on the environment and ecological balance
    and make them sensitive to the environment problems in every professional endeavour that they
    participates.
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of this course the student is expected to understand what constitutes the environment,
    what are precious resources in the environment, how to conserve these resources, what is the
    role of a human being in maintaining a clean environment and useful environment for the future
    generations and how to maintain ecological balance and preserve bio-diversity. The role of
    government and non-government organization in environment managements.
    UNIT I ENVIRONMENT, ECOSYSTEMS AND BIODIVERSITY 14
    Definition, scope and importance of environment – need for public awareness - concept of an
    ecosystem – structure and function of an ecosystem – producers, consumers and decomposers –
    energy flow in the ecosystem – ecological succession – food chains, food webs and ecological
    pyramids – Introduction, types, characteristic features, structure and function of the (a) forest
    ecosystem (b) grassland ecosystem (c) desert ecosystem (d) aquatic ecosystems (ponds,
    streams, lakes, rivers, oceans, estuaries) – Introduction to biodiversity definition: genetic, species
    and ecosystem diversity – biogeographical classification of India – value of biodiversity:
    consumptive use, productive use, social, ethical, aesthetic and option values – Biodiversity at
    global, national and local levels – India as a mega-diversity nation – hot-spots of biodiversity –
    threats to biodiversity: habitat loss, poaching of wildlife, man-wildlife conflicts – endangered and
    endemic species of India – conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and ex-situ conservation of
    biodiversity.
    Field study of common plants, insects, birds
    Field study of simple ecosystems – pond, river, hill slopes, etc.
    UNIT II ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION 8
    Definition – causes, effects and control measures of: (a) Air pollution (b) Water pollution (c) Soil
    pollution (d) Marine pollution (e) Noise pollution (f) Thermal pollution (g) Nuclear hazards – soil
    waste management: causes, effects and control measures of municipal solid wastes – role of an
    individual in prevention of pollution – pollution case studies – disaster management: floods,
    earthquake, cyclone and landslides.
    Field study of local polluted site – Urban / Rural / Industrial / Agricultural.
    UNIT III NATURAL RESOURCES 10
    Forest resources: Use and over-exploitation, deforestation, case studies- timber extraction,
    mining, dams and their effects on forests and tribal people – Water resources: Use and overutilization
    of surface and ground water, floods, drought, conflicts over water, dams-benefits and
    problems – Mineral resources: Use and exploitation, environmental effects of extracting and using
    mineral resources, case studies – Food resources: World food problems, changes caused by
    agriculture and overgrazing, effects of modern agriculture, fertilizer-pesticide problems, water
    logging, salinity, case studies – Energy resources: Growing energy needs, renewable and non
    renewable energy sources, use of alternate energy sources. case studies – Land resources: Land
    as a resource, land degradation, man induced landslides, soil erosion and desertification – role of
    an individual in conservation of natural resources – Equitable use of resources for sustainable
    lifestyles.
    Field study of local area to document environmental assets – river / forest / grassland / hill /
    mountain.
    4
    UNIT IV SOCIAL ISSUES AND THE ENVIRONMENT 7
    From unsustainable to sustainable development – urban problems related to energy – water
    conservation, rain water harvesting, watershed management – resettlement and rehabilitation of
    people; its problems and concerns, case studies – role of non-governmental organizationenvironmental
    ethics: Issues and possible solutions – climate change, global warming, acid rain,
    ozone layer depletion, nuclear accidents and holocaust, case studies. – wasteland reclamation –
    consumerism and waste products – environment protection act – Air (Prevention and Control of
    Pollution) act – Water (Prevention and control of Pollution) act – Wildlife protection act – Forest
    conservation act – enforcement machinery involved in environmental legislation- central and state
    pollution control boards- Public awareness.
    UNIT V HUMAN POPULATION AND THE ENVIRONMENT 6
    Population growth, variation among nations – population explosion – family welfare programme –
    environment and human health – human rights – value education – HIV / AIDS – women and
    child welfare – role of information technology in environment and human health – Case studies.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Gilbert M.Masters, “Introduction to Environmental Engineering and
    Science”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education ,2004.
    2. Benny Joseph, “Environmental Science and Engineering”, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi,
    2006.
    REFERENCE BOOKS
    1. R.K. Trivedi, “Handbook of Environmental Laws, Rules, Guidelines, Compliances and
    Standards”, Vol. I and II, Enviro Media.
    2. Cunningham, W.P. Cooper, T.H. Gorhani, “Environmental Encyclopedia”, Jaico Publ.,
    House, Mumbai, 2001.
    3. Dharmendra S. Sengar, “Environmental law”, Prentice hall of India PVT LTD, New Delhi,
    2007.
    4. Rajagopalan, R, “Environmental Studies-From Crisis to Cure”, Oxford University Press
    (2005)
    5
    187301 APPLIED GEOLOGY 3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of this course the student shall be able to understand about geological formations,
    classification and morphology of rocks, and the importance of the study of geology for civil
    engineers with regard to founding structures like dams, bridges, buildings, etc. The student shall
    also be able to appreciate the importance of geological formation in causing earthquakes and
    land slides.
    UNIT I GENERAL GEOLOGY 9
    Geology in Civil Engineering – Branches of geology – Earth Structures and composition –
    Elementary knowledge on continental drift and plate technologies. Earth processes – Weathering
    – Work of rivers, wind and sea and their engineering importance – Earthquake belts in India.
    Groundwater – Mode of occurrence – prospecting – importance in civil engineering
    UNIT II MINERALOGY 9
    Elementary knowledge on symmetry elements of important crystallographic systems – physical
    properties of minerals – study of the following rock forming minerals – Quartz family. Feldpar
    family, Augite, Hornblende, Biotite, Muscovite, Calcite, Garnet – properties, behaviour and
    engineering significance of clay minerals – Fundamentals of process of formation of ore minerals
    – Coal and petroleum – Their origin and occurrence in India.
    UNIT III PETROLOGY 9
    Classification of rocks – distinction between igneous, sedimentary and metamorphic rocks.
    Description occurrence, engineering properties and distribution of following rocks. Igneous rocks
    – Granite, Syenite, Diorite, Gabbro, Pegmatite, Dolerite and Basalt Sedimentary rocks sandstone,
    Limestone, shale conglo, Conglomerate and breccia. Metamorphic rocks. Quartizite, Marble,
    Slate, Phyllite, Gniess and Schist.
    UNIT IV STRUCTURAL GEOLOGY AND GEOPHYSICAL METHOD 9
    Attitude of beds – Outcrops – Introduction to Geological maps – study of structures – Folds, faults
    and joints – Their bearing on engineering construction. Seismic and Electrical methods for Civil
    Engineering investigations
    UNIT V GEOLOGICAL INVESTIGATIONS IN CIVIL ENGINEERING 9
    Remote sensing techniques – Study of air photos and satellite images – Interpretation for Civil
    Engineering projects – Geological conditions necessary for construction of Dams, Tunnels,
    Buildings, Road cuttings, Land slides – Causes and preventions. Sea erosion and coastal
    protection.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Parbin Singh, “Engineering and General Geology”, Katson Publication House, 1987.
    2. Krynine and Judd, “Engineering Geology and Geotechniques”, McGraw-Hill Book
    Company, 1990
    REFERENCES
    1. Legeet, “Geology and Engineering”, McGraw-Hill Book Company 1998
    2. Blyth, “Geology for Engineers”, ELBS, 1995
    6
    101301 MECHANICS OF SOLIDS 3 1 0 4
    OBJECTIVE
    The subject of Mechanics of Solids cuts broadly across all branches of engineering profession. At
    the end of this course, the student will have knowledge about behaviour of members subjected to
    various type of forces. The subject can be mastered best by solving numerous problems.
    UNIT I STRESS STRAIN AND DEFORMATION OF SOLIDS, STATES OF STRESS 9+3
    Rigid bodies and deformable solids – stability, strength, stiffness – tension, compression and
    shear stresses – strain, elasticity, Hooke’s law, limit of proportionately, modules of elasticity,
    stress-strain curve, lateral strain – temperature stresses – deformation of simple and compound
    bars – shear modulus, bulk modulus, relationship between elastic constants – biaxial state of
    stress – stress at a point – stress on inclined plane – principal stresses and principal planes –
    Mohr’s circle of stresses.
    UNIT II ANALYSIS OF PLANE TRUSS, THIN CYLINDERS / SHELLS 9+3
    Stability and equilibrium of plane frames – types of trusses – analysis of forces in truss members
    method of joints, method of sections, method of tension coefficients – thin cylinders and shells –
    under internal pressure – deformation of thin cylinders and shells.
    UNIT III TRANSVERSE LOADING ON BEAMS 9+3
    Beams – types of supports – simple and fixed, types of load – concentrated, uniformly distributed,
    varying distributed load, combination of above loading – relationship between bending moment
    and shear force – bending moment, shear force diagram for simply supported, cantilever and
    over hanging beams – Theory of simple bending – analysis of stresses – load carrying capacity of
    beams – proportioning of sections
    UNIT IV DEFLECTION OF BEAMS AND SHEAR STRESSES 9+3
    Deflection of beams – double integration method – Macaulay’s method – slope and deflection
    using moment area method, Conjugate Beam method – variation of shear stress – shear stress
    distribution in rectangular, I sections, solid circular sections, hollow circular sections, angle and
    channel sections – shear flow – shear centre.
    UNIT V TORSION AND SPRINGS 9+3
    Stresses and deformation in circular (solid and hollow shafts) – stepped shafts – shafts fixed at
    both ends – leaf springs – stresses in helical springs – deflection of springs.
    TOTAL (L:45+T:15): 60 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Egor P Popov, Engineering Mechanics of Solids, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2003
    2. Bansal R.K. Strength of materials, Laxmi Publications, New Delhi - 2007
    REFERENCES
    1. Subramanian R., Strength of materials, Oxford university press, New Delhi - 2005
    2. William A.Nash, Theory and Problems of Strength of Materials, Schaum’s Outline Series,
    Tata McGraw-Hill publishing co., New Delhi – 2007.
    3. Srinath L.S, Advanced Mechanics of Solids, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi,
    2003.
    7
    101302 MECHANICS OF FLUIDS 3 1 0 4
    OBJECTIVE
    The student is introduced to the definition and properties of fluid. Principles of fluid statics,
    kinematics and dynamics are dealt with subsequently. The application of similitude and model
    study are covered subsequently. After undergoing this course, the student would have learnt fluid
    properties and application to real situations of fluid flow.
    UNIT I DEFINITIONS AND FLUID PROPERTIES 5+2
    Definitions – Fluid and fluid mechanics – Dimensions and units – Fluid properties – Continuum
    Concept of system and control volume
    UNIT II FLUID STATICS & KINEMATICS 10+4
    Pascal’s Law and Hydrostatic equation – Forces on plane and curved surfaces – Buoyancy –
    Meta centre – Pressure measurement – Fluid mass under relative equilibrium
    Fluid Kinematics
    Stream, streak and path lines – Classification of flows – Continuity equation (one, two and three
    dimensional forms) – Stream and potential functions – flow nets – Velocity measurement (Pilot
    tube, current meter, Hot wire and hot film anemometer, float technique, Laser Doppler
    velocimetry)
    UNIT III FLUID DYNAMICS 10+3
    Euler and Bernoulli’s equations – Application of Bernoulli’s equation – Discharge measurement –
    Laminar flows through pipes and between plates – Hagen Poiseuille equation – Turbulent flow –
    Darcy-Weisbach formula – Moody diagram – Momentum Principle
    UNIT IV BOUNDARY LAYER AND FLOW THROUGH PIPES 10+3
    Definition of boundary layer – Thickness and classification – Displacement and momentum
    thickness – Development of laminar and turbulent flows in circular pipes – Major and minor losses
    of flow in pipes – Pipes in series and in parallel – Pipe network
    UNIT V SIMILITUDE AND MODEL STUDY 10+3
    Dimensional Analysis – Rayleigh’s method, Buckingham’s Pi-theorem – Similitude and models –
    Scale effect and distorted models.
    TOTAL (L:45+T:15): 60 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Kumar, K.L., “Engineering Fluid Mechanics”, Eurasia Publishing House (P) Ltd., New
    Delhi, 1995.
    2. Garde, R.J. and Mirajgaoker, A.G., “Engineering Fluid Mechanics”, Nem Chand Bros.,
    Roorkee
    3. Rajput, R.K., “A text book of Fluid Mechanics” , S.Chand and Co.,New Delhi - 2007
    4. Fox, Robert, W. and Macdonald, Alan,T., “Introduction to Fluid Mechanics”, John Wiley &
    Sons, 1995
    5. Modi, P.N. & Seth, S.M Hydraulics & fluid Mechanics, Standard book house , New Delhi -
    2005.
    8
    REFERENCES
    1. Streeter, Victor, L. and Wylie, Benjamin E., “Fluid Mechanics”, McGraw-Hill Ltd., 1998.
    2. E. John Finnemore and Joseph B. Franzini, “Fluid Mechanics with Engineering
    Applications”, McGraw-Hill International Edition, 2001.
    3. Pernard Messay, “Mechanics of Fluids” 7th Edition, Nelson Thornes Ltd. U. K. 1998.
    9
    101303 CONSTRUCTION TECHNIQUES, EQUIPMENT AND PRACTICES 4 0 0 4
    OBJECTIVE
    The main objective of this course is to make the student aware of the various construction
    techniques, practices and the equipment needed for different types of construction activities. At
    the end of this course the student shall have a reasonable knowledge about the various
    construction procedures for sub to super structure and also the equipment needed for
    construction of various types of structures from foundation to super structure.
    UNIT I CONCRETE TECHNOLOGY 12
    Cements – Grade of cements - manufacture of cement – concrete chemicals and Applications –
    Mix design concept – mix design as per BIS & ACI methods – manufacturing of concrete –
    Batching – mixing – transporting – placing – compaction of concrete – curing and finishing.
    Testing of fresh and hardened concrete – quality of concrete - Non – destructive testing.
    UNIT II CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES 13
    Specifications, details and sequence of activities and construction co-ordination – Site Clearance
    – Marking – Earthwork - masonry – stone masonry – Bond in masonry - concrete hollow block
    masonry – flooring – damp proof courses – construction joints – movement and expansion joints
    – pre cast pavements – Building foundations – basements – temporary shed – centering and
    shuttering – slip forms – scaffoldings – de-shuttering forms – Fabrication and erection of steel
    trusses – frames – braced domes – laying brick –– weather and water proof – roof finishes –
    acoustic and fire protection.
    UNIT III SUB STRUCTURE CONSTRUCTION 13
    Techniques of Box jacking – Pipe Jacking -under water construction of diaphragm walls and
    basement-Tunneling techniques – Piling techniques - well and caisson - sinking cofferdam - cable
    anchoring and grouting-driving diaphragm walls, sheet piles - shoring for deep cutting - well
    points -Dewatering and stand by Plant equipment for underground open excavation.
    UNIT IV SUPER STRUCTURE CONSTRUCTION 12
    Launching girders, bridge decks, off shore platforms – special forms for shells - techniques for
    heavy decks – in-situ pre-stressing in high rise structures, Material handling - erecting light weight
    components on tall structures - Support structure for heavy Equipment and conveyors -Erection
    of articulated structures, braced domes and space decks.
    UNIT V CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT 10
    Selection of equipment for earth work - earth moving operations - types of earthwork equipment -
    tractors, motor graders, scrapers, front end waders, earth movers – Equipment for foundation and
    pile driving. Equipment for compaction, batching and mixing and concreting - Equipment for
    material handling and erection of structures - Equipment for dredging, trenching, tunneling,
    TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Peurifoy, R.L., Ledbetter, W.B. and Schexnayder, C., "Construction Planning, Equipment and
    Methods", 5th Edition, McGraw Hill, Singapore, 1995.
    2. Arora S.P. and Bindra S.P., Building Construction, Planning Techniques and Method of
    Construction, Dhanpat Rai and Sons, 1997.
    3. Varghese , P.C. Building construction, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2007.
    4. Sheety, M.S, Concrete Technology, Theory and Practice, S. Chand and Company Ltd, New
    Delhi, 2005.
    10
    REFERENCES
    1. Jha J and Sinha S.K., Construction and Foundation Engineering, Khanna Publishers, 1993.
    2. Sharma S.C. “Construction Equipment and Management”, Khanna Publishers New Delhi,
    1988.
    3. Deodhar, S.V. “Construction Equipment and Job Planning”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi,
    1988.
    4. Dr. Mahesh Varma, “Construction Equipment and its Planning and Application”, Metropolitan
    Book Company, New Delhi-, 1983.
    5. Gambhir, M.L, Concrete Technology, Tata McGraw – Hill Publishing Company Ltd, New
    Delhi, 2004
    11
    101304 SURVEYING I 3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of the course the student will posses knowledge about Chain surveying, Compass
    surveying, Plane table surveying, Levelling, Theodolite surveying and Engineering surveys.
    1. INTRODUCTION AND CHAIN SURVEYING 8
    Definition - Principles - Classification - Field and office work - Scales - Conventional signs -
    Survey instruments, their care and adjustment - Ranging and chaining - Reciprocal ranging -
    Setting perpendiculars - well - conditioned triangles - Traversing - Plotting - Enlarging and
    reducing figures.
    2. COMPASS SURVEYING AND PLANE TABLE SURVEYING 7
    Prismatic compass - Surveyor’s compass - Bearing - Systems and conversions - Local attraction -
    Magnetic declination - Dip - Traversing - Plotting - Adjustment of errors - Plane table instruments
    and accessories - Merits and demerits - Methods - Radiation - Intersection - Resection -
    Traversing.
    3. LEVELLING AND APPLICATIONS 12
    Level line - Horizontal line - Levels and Staves - Spirit level - Sensitiveness - Bench marks -
    Temporary and permanent adjustments - Fly and check levelling - Booking - Reduction -
    Curvature and refraction - Reciprocal levelling - Longitudinal and cross sections - Plotting -
    Calculation of areas and volumes - Contouring - Methods - Characteristics and uses of contours -
    Plotting - Earth work volume - Capacity of reservoirs.
    4. THEODOLITE SURVEYING 8
    Theodolite - Vernier and microptic - Description and uses - Temporary and permanent
    adjustments of vernier transit - Horizontal angles - Vertical angles - Heights and distances -
    Traversing - Closing error and distribution - Gale’s tables - Omitted measurements.
    5. ENGINEERING SURVEYS 10
    Reconnaissance, preliminary and location surveys for engineering projects - Lay out - Setting out
    works - Route Surveys for highways, railways and waterways - Curve ranging - Horizontal and
    vertical curves - Simple curves - Setting with chain and tapes, tangential angles by theodolite,
    double theodolite - Compound and reverse curves - Transition curves - Functions and
    requirements - Setting out by offsets and angles - Vertical curves - Sight distances - Mine
    Surveying - instruments - Tunnels - Correlation of under ground and surface surveys - Shafts -
    Adits.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Bannister A. and Raymond S., Surveying, ELBS, Sixth Edition, 1992.
    2. Kanetkar T.P., Surveying and Levelling, Vols. I and II, United Book Corporation, Pune,
    1994.
    3. Punmia B.C. Surveying, Vols. I, II and III, Laxmi Publications, 1989
    REFERENCES
    1. Clark D., Plane and Geodetic Surveying, Vols. I and II, C.B.S. Publishers and
    Distributors, Delhi, Sixth Edition, 1971.
    2. James M.Anderson and Edward M.Mikhail, Introduction to Surveying, McGraw-Hill Book
    Company, 1985.
    3. Heribert Kahmen and Wolfgang Faig, Surveying, Walter de Gruyter, 1995.
    12
    101351 SURVEY PRACTICAL I 0 0 4 2
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of the course the student will posses knowledge about Survey field techniques
    1. Study of chains and its accessories
    2. Aligning, Ranging and Chaining
    3. Chain Traversing
    4. Compass Traversing
    5. Plane table surveying: Radiation
    6. Plane table surveying: Intersection
    7. Plane table surveying: Traversing
    8. Plane table surveying: Resection – Three point problem
    9. Plane table surveying: Resection – Two point problem
    10. Study of levels and levelling staff
    11. Fly levelling using Dumpy level
    12. Fly levelling using tilting level
    13. Check levelling
    14. LS and CS
    15. Contouring
    16. Study of Theodolite
    TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
    SURVEY PRACTICAL I & SURVEY PRACTICAL II
    LIST OF EQUIPMENTS
    (For a batch of 30 students)
    Sl. No. Description of Equipments Quantity
    1. Total Station 3 Nos
    2. Theodolites Atleast 1 for every 10 students
    3. Dumpy level Atleast 1 for every 10 students
    4. Plain table Atleast 1 for every 10 students
    5. Pocket stereoscope 1
    6. Ranging rods
    1 for a set of 5 students
    7. Levelling staff
    8. Cross staff
    9. Chains
    10. Tapes
    11. Arrows
    13
    101352 COMPUTER AIDED BUILDING DRAWING 0 0 4 2
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of this course the student should be able to draft on computer building
    drawings (Plan, elevation and sectional views) in accordance with development and control
    rules satisfying orientation and functional requirements for the following:
    1. Buildings with load bearing walls (Flat and pitched roof) – Including details of doors and
    windows 15
    2. RCC framed structures 15
    3. Industrial buildings – North light roof structures – Trusses 15
    4. Perspective view of one and two storey buildings 15
    TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Civil Engg. Drawing & House Planning – Varma B.P., Khanna publishers, Delhi
    2. Building drawing & detailing – Balagopal & T.S. Prabhu, Spades Publishers, Calicut.
    REFERENCES
    1. Building drawing – Shah.M.G., Tata McGraw-Hill,1992
    2. Building planning & Drawing – Kumaraswamy N., Kameswara Rao A., Charotar
    Publishing
    3. Shah, Kale and Patki, Building Drawing with integrated approach to built environment,
    Tata McGraw-Hill.
    Examination Guideline
    30% of the end semester examination paper shall deal with planning, while the rest 70%
    shall be based on the drafting skill.
    LIST OF EQUIPMENTS
    (For a batch of 30 students)
    Sl.
    No.
    Description of Equipments Quantity
    1. Computer system of Pentium IV or equivalent 1 for each student
    2.
    Licensed version of any reputed Analysis, Design
    & Drafting software
    1 copy for a set of
    3 students
    1
    AFFILIATED INSTITUTIONS
    ANNA UNIVERSITY OF TECHNOLOGY CHENNAI :: CHENNAI 600 113
    REGULATIONS 2010
    B.E. CIVIL ENGINEERING
    CURRICULA AND SYLLABI FOR IV SEMESTER
    SEMESTER IV
    (Applicable to the students admitted from the Academic year 2010 – 2011 onwards)
    COURSE
    CODE
    COURSE TITLE L T P C
    THEORY
    181401 Numerical Methods 3 1 0 4
    101401 Soil Mechanics 3 0 0 3
    101402 Strength of Materials 3 1 0 4
    101403 Applied Hydraulic Engineering 3 1 0 4
    101404 Surveying – II 3 0 0 3
    101405 Highway Engineering 3 0 0 3
    PRACTICAL
    101451 Strength of Materials Lab 0 0 3 2
    101452 Hydraulic Engineering Laboratory 0 0 3 2
    101453 Survey Practical – II 0 0 4 2
    TOTAL 18 3 10 27
    2
    101352 COMPUTER AIDED BUILDING DRAWING 0 0 4 2
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of this course the student should be able to draft on computer building drawings (Plan,
    elevation and sectional views) in accordance with development and control rules satisfying
    orientation and functional requirements for the following:
    1. Buildings with load bearing walls (Flat and pitched roof) –
    Including details of doors and windows 15
    2. RCC framed structures 15
    3. Industrial buildings – North light roof structures – Trusses 15
    4. Perspective view of one and two storey buildings 15
    TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Civil Engg. Drawing & House Planning – Varma B.P., Khanna publishers, Delhi
    2. Building drawing & detailing – Balagopal & T.S. Prabhu, Spades Publishers, Calicut.
    REFERENCES
    1. Building drawing – Shah.M.G., Tata McGraw-Hill,1992
    2. Building planning & Drawing –Kumaraswamy N., Kameswara Rao A., Charotar
    Publishing
    3. Shah, Kale and Patki, Building Drawing with integrated approach to built environment,
    Tata McGraw-Hill.
    Examination Guideline
    30% of the end semester examination paper shall deal with planning, while the rest 70%
    shall be based on the drafting skill.
    LIST OF EQUIPMENTS
    (For a batch of 30 students)
    Sl. No. Description of Equipments Quantity
    1. Computer system of Pentium IV or equivalent 1 for each student
    2.
    Licensed version of any reputed Analysis, Design
    & Drafting software
    1 copy for a set of 3 students
    3
    181401 NUMERICAL METHODS 3 1 0 4
    (Common to Civil, Aero, Manu, EEE, ECE, CSE, IT, Chemical &Plastic)
    AIM
    With the present development of the computer technology, it is necessary to develop
    efficient algorithms for solving problems in science, engineering and technology. This
    course gives a complete procedure for solving different kinds of problems occur in
    engineering numerically.
    OBJECTIVES
    At the end of the course, the students would be acquainted with the basic concepts in
    numerical methods and their uses are summarized as follows:
    i. The roots of nonlinear (algebraic or transcendental) equations, solutions of large
    system of linear equations and eigen value problem of a matrix can be obtained
    numerically where analytical methods fail to give solution.
    ii. When huge amounts of experimental data are involved, the methods discussed on
    interpolation will be useful in constructing approximate polynomial to represent the
    data and to find the intermediate values.
    iii. The numerical differentiation and integration find application when the function in the
    analytical form is too complicated or the huge amounts of data are given such as
    series of measurements, observations or some other empirical information.
    iv. Since many physical laws are couched in terms of rate of change of one/two or more
    independent variables, most of the engineering problems are characterized in the
    form of either nonlinear ordinary differential equations or partial differential equations.
    The methods introduced in the solution of ordinary differential equations and partial
    differential equations will be useful in attempting any engineering problem.
    1. SOLUTION OF EQUATIONS AND EIGENVALUE PROBLEMS 9+3
    Solution of equation –Fixed point iteration: x=g(x) method - Newton’s method – Solution
    of linear system by Gaussian elimination and Gauss-Jordon method– Iterative method -
    Gauss-Seidel method - Inverse of a matrix by Gauss Jordon method – Eigen value of a
    matrix by power method and by Jacobi method for symmetric matrix.
    2. INTERPOLATION AND APPROXIMATION 9+3
    Lagrangian Polynomials – Divided differences – Interpolating with a cubic spline –
    Newton’s forward and backward difference formulas.
    3. NUMERICAL DIFFERENTIATION AND INTEGRATION 9+3
    Differentiation using interpolation formulae –Numerical integration by trapezoidal and
    Simpson’s 1/3 and 3/8 rules – Romberg’s method – Two and Three point Gaussian
    quadrature formulae – Double integrals using trapezoidal and Simpsons’s rules.
    4. INITIAL VALUE PROBLEMS FOR ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9+3
    Single step methods: Taylor series method – Euler method for first order equation –
    Fourth order Runge – Kutta method for solving first and second order equations –
    Multistep methods: Milne’s and Adam’s predictor and corrector methods.
    4
    5. BOUNDARY VALUE PROBLEMS IN ORDINARY AND PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL
    EQUATIONS 9+3
    Finite difference solution of second order ordinary differential equation – Finite difference
    solution of one dimensional heat equation by explicit and implicit methods – One
    dimensional wave equation and two dimensional Laplace and Poisson equations.
    TOTAL (L:45+T:15): 60 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Veerarjan, T and Ramachandran, T., “Numerical methods with programming in C”,
    Second Editiion, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing.Co.Ltd, 2007.
    2. Sankara Rao K, “Numerical Methods for Scientisits and Engineers”, 3rd Edition, Printice
    Hall of India Private Ltd, New Delhi, 2007.
    REFERENCE BOOKS
    1. Chapra, S. C and Canale, R. P., “Numerical Methods for Engineers”, 5th Edition, Tata
    McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2007.
    2. Gerald, C. F. and Wheatley, P.O., “Applied Numerical Analysis”, 6th Edition, Pearson
    Education, Asia, New Delhi, 2006.
    3. Grewal, B.S. and Grewal,J.S., “ Numerical methods in Engineering and Science”, 6th
    Edition, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2004.
    5
    101401 SOIL MECHANICS 3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    After undergoing this course, the student gains adequate knowledge on engineering properties of
    soil.
    1. INTRODUCTION 10
    Nature of Soil - Problems with soil - phase relation - sieve analysis - sedimentation analysis –
    Atterberg limits - classification for engineering purposes - BIS Classification system - Soil
    compaction - factors affecting compaction – field compaction methods and monitoring.
    2. SOIL WATER AND WATER FLOW 8
    Soil water – Various forms – Influence of clay minerals – Capillary rise – Suction - Effective stress
    concepts in soil – Total, neutral and effective stress distribution in soil - Permeability – Darcy’s
    Law- Permeability measurement in the laboratory – quick sand condition - Seepage – Laplace
    Equation - Introduction to flow nets –properties and uses - Application to simple problems.
    3. STRESS DISTRIBUTION, COMPRESSIBILITY AND SETTLEMENT 10
    Stress distribution in soil media – Boussinesque formula – stress due to line load and Circular
    and rectangular loaded area - approximate methods - Use of influence charts – Westergaard
    equation for point load - Components of settlement - Immediate and consolidation settlement -
    Terzaghi's one dimensional consolidation theory – governing differential equation - laboratory
    consolidation test – Field consolidation curve – NC and OC clays - problems on final and time
    rate of consolidation
    4. SHEAR STRENGTH 9
    Shear strength of cohesive and cohesionless soils - Mohr - Coulomb failure theory – Saturated
    soil - Strength parameters - Measurement of shear strength, direct shear, Triaxial compression,
    UCC and Vane shear tests –Types of shear tests based on drainage and their applicability -
    Drained and undrained behaviour of clay and sand – Stress path for conventional triaxial test.
    5. SLOPE STABILITY 8
    Slope failure mechanisms - Modes - Infinite slopes - Finite slopes – Total and effective stress
    analysis - Stability analysis for purely cohesive and C-f soils - Method of slices – Modified
    Bishop’s method - Friction circle method - stability number – problems – Slope protection
    measures.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS:
    1. Punmia P.C., “Soil Mechanics and Foundations”, Laximi Publications Pvt. Ltd., New
    Delhi, 1995.
    2. Gopal Ranjan and Rao A.S.R., “Basic and applied soil mechanics”, New Age
    International Publishers, New Delhi, 2000.
    3. Venkatramaiah, C. “Geotechnical Engineering”, New Age International Publishers, New
    Delhi, 1995
    4. Khan I.H., “A text book of Geotechnical Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi,
    1999.
    6
    REFERENCES
    1. Coduto, D.P., “Geotechnical Engineering Principles and Practices”, Prentice Hall of India
    Private Limited, New Delhi, 2002.
    2. McCarthy D.F., “Essentials of Soil Mechanics and Foundations Basic Geotechniques”,
    Sixth Edition, Prentice-Hall, New Jersey, 2002.
    3. Das, B.M, “Principles of Geotechnical Engineering”, (fifth edition), Thomas Books/ cole,
    2002
    4. Muni Budhu, “Soil Mechanics and Foundations”, John Willey & Sons, Inc, New York,
    2000.
    7
    101402 STRENGTH OF MATERIALS 3 1 0 4
    OBJECTIVE
    This subject is useful for a detailed study of forces and their effects along with some suitable
    protective measures for the safe working condition. This knowledge is very essential for an
    engineer to enable him in designing all types of structures and machines.
    1. ENERGY PRINCIPLES 9+3
    Strain energy and strain energy density – strain energy in traction, shear in flexure and torsion –
    castigliano’s theorems – principle of virtual work – application of energy theorems for computing
    deflections in beams and trusses – Maxwell’s reciprocal theorems
    2. INDETERMINATE BEAMS 9+3
    Propped cantilever and fixed beams-fixed end moments and reactions for concentrated load
    (central, non central), uniformly distributed load, triangular load (maximum at centre and
    maximum at end) – theorem of three moments – analysis of continuous beams – shear force and
    bending moment diagrams for continuous beams – slope & deflections in continuous beams
    (qualitative study only)
    3. COLUMNS 9+3
    Eccentrically loaded short columns – middle third rule – core section – columns of unsymmetrical
    sections – (angle channel sections) – Euler’s theory of long columns – critical loads for prismatic
    columns with different end conditions; Rankine-Gordon formula for eccentrically loaded columns
    – thick cylinders – compound cylinders.
    4. STATE OF STRESS IN THREE DIMENSIONS 9+3
    Spherical and deviatory components of stress tensor - determination of principal stresses and
    principal planes – volumetric strain – dilatation and distortion – theories of failure – principal
    stress dilatation – principal strain – shear stress – strain energy and distortion energy theories –
    application in analysis of stress, load carrying capacity and design of members – residual
    stresses
    5. ADVANCED TOPICS IN BENDING OF BEAMS 9+3
    Unsymmetrical bending of beams of symmetrical and unsymmetrical sections – curved beams –
    Winkler Bach formula – stress concentration – fatigue and fracture.
    TOTAL (L:45+T:15): 60 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Egor P Popov, “Engineering Mechanics of Solids”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2003
    2. Rajput R.K. Strength of Materials, S.Chand&company Ltd., New Delhi - 2006
    REFERENCES
    1. Kazimi S.M.A, “Solid Mechanics”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi, 2003
    2. William A .Nash, “Theory and Problems of Strength of Materials”, Schaum’s Outline
    Series, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing company Ltd, 2007.
    3. Srinath, L.S. Advanced mechanics and solids, Tata-McGraw Hill publishing
    company ltd, 2005.
    4. Punmia B.C.Theory of Structures (SMTS) Vol 1&II, Laxmi publishing Pvt Ltd,New Delhi
    ,2004.
    8
    101403 APPLIED HYDRAULIC ENGINEERING 3 1 0 4
    OBJECTIVE
    Student is introduced to open channel flow characteristics including hydraulic jump and surges.
    Hydraulic machines viz flow through turbines and pumps including their performance
    characteristics and design aspects are taught. Student, at the end of the semester will have the
    abilities to analyse flow characteristics in open channel and design hydraulic machines.
    1. OPEN CHANNEL FLOW 9+3
    Open channel flow – Types and regimes of flow – Velocity distribution in open channel – Wide
    open channel – Specific energy – Critical flow and its computation – channel transition.
    2. UNIFORM FLOW 8+3
    Uniform flow – Velocity measurement – Manning’s and Chezy’s formula – Determination of
    roughness coefficients – Determination of normal depth and velocity – Most economical sections
    – Non-erodible channels
    3. VARIED FLOW 9+3
    Dynamic equations of gradually varied flow – Assumptions – Characteristics of flow profiles –
    Draw down and back water curves – Profile determination – Graphical integration, direct step and
    standard step method – Flow through transitions - Hydraulic jump – Types – Energy dissipation –
    Surges.
    4. PUMPS 9+3
    Centrifugal pump - minimum speed to start the pump – multistage Pumps – Jet and submersible
    pumps - Positive displacement pumps - reciprocating pump - negative slip - flow separation
    conditions - air vessels -indicator diagram and its variation - savings in work done - rotary pumps.
    5. TURBINES 10+3
    Turbines - draft tube and cavitations – Application of momentum principle – Impact of jets on
    plane and curved plates - turbines - classification - radial flow turbines - axial flow turbines –
    Impulse and Reaction
    TOTAL (L:45+T:15): 60 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Subramanya K., "Flow in Open channels", Tata McGraw-Hill PublishingCompany,
    1994.
    2. Modi, P.N, and Seth S.M. Hydraulic and Fluid Mechanics Standard Book House, 2000.
    3. Bansal R.K, Fluid mechanics & Hydraulic machines, Laxmi Publishing Pvt Ltd, New
    Delhi - 2007
    REFERENCES
    1. Jain A.K., "Fluid Mechanics (including Hydraulic Machines)", Khanna Publishers,
    8th edition, 1995.
    2. Ranga Raju, K.G., “Flow through Open Channels”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 1985
    9
    101404 SURVEYING II 3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of the course the student will posses knowledge about Tachometric surveying, Control
    surveying, Survey adjustments, Astronomical surveying and Photogrametry.
    1. TACHEOMETRIC SURVEYING 6
    Tacheometric systems - Tangential, stadia and subtense methods - Stadia systems - Horizontal
    and inclined sights - Vertical and normal staffing - Fixed and movable hairs - Stadia constants -
    Anallactic lens - Subtense bar.
    2. CONTROL SURVEYING 8
    Working from whole to part - Horizontal and vertical control methods - Triangulation - Signals -
    Base line - Instruments and accessores - Corrections - Satellite station - Reduction to centre -
    Trignometric levelling - Single and reciprocal observations - Modern trends – Bench marking
    3. SURVEY ADJUSTMENTS 8
    Errors - Sources, precautions and corrections - Classification of errors - True and most probable
    values - weighted observations - Method of equal shifts - Principle of least squares - Normal
    equation - Correlates - Level nets - Adjustment of simple triangulation networks.
    4. ASTRONOMICAL SURVEYING 11
    Celestial sphere - Astronomical terms and definitions - Motion of sun and stars - Apparent altitude
    and corrections - Celestial co-ordinate systems - Different time systems - use of Nautical almanac
    - Star constellations - calculations for azimuth of a line.
    5. HYDROGRAPHIC AND ADVANCE SURVEYING 12
    Hydrographic Surveying - Tides - MSL - Sounding methods - Location of soundings and methods
    - Three point problem - Strength of fix - Sextants and station pointer - River surveys -
    Measurement of current and discharge - Photogrammetry - Introduction – Basic concepts of
    Terrestial and aerial Photographs - Stereoscopy – Definition of Parallax. Electromagnetic
    distance measurement – Basic principles - Instruments – Trilateration. Basic concepts of
    Cartography and Cadastral surveying.
    TOTAL : 45
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Bannister A. and Raymond S., Surveying, ELBS, Sixth Edition, 1992.
    2. Punmia B.C., Surveying, Vols. I, II and III, Laxmi Publications, 1989.
    3. Kanetkar T.P., Surveying and Levelling, Vols. I and II, United Book Corporation, Pune,
    1994.
    REFERENCES
    1. Clark D., Plane and Geodetic Surveying, Vols. I and II, C.B.S. Publishers and
    Distributors, Delhi, Sixth Edition, 1971.
    2. James M.Anderson and Edward M.Mikhail, Introduction to Surveying, McGraw-Hill Book
    Company, 1985.
    3. Wolf P.R., Elements of Photogrammetry, McGraw-Hill Book Company, Second Edition,
    1986.
    4. Robinson A.H., Sale R.D. Morrison J.L. and Muehrche P.C., Elements of Cartography,
    John Wiley and Sons, New York, Fifth Edition, 1984.
    5. Heribert Kahmen and Wolfgang Faig, Surveying, Walter de Gruyter, 1995.
    10
    101405 HIGHWAY ENGINEERING 3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    The objective of the course is to educate the students on the various components of Highway
    Engineering. It exposes the students to highway planning, engineering surveys for highway
    alignment, Design of Geometric Elements of Highways and Urban roads, Rigid and Flexible
    pavements design. The students further learn the desirable properties of highway materials and
    various practices adopted for construction. This course enables the students to develop skill on
    evaluation of the pavements and to decide appropriate types of maintenance.
    1. HIGHWAY PLANNING AND ALIGNMENT 9
    History of Road Construction, Highway Development in India - Jayakar Committee
    Recommendations and Realisations, Twenty-year Road Development Plans, Concepts of Ongoing
    Highway Development Programmes at National Level, Institutions for Highway
    Development at National level - Indian Roads Congress, Highway Research Board, National
    Highway Authority of India, Ministry of Road Transport and Highways (MORTH) and Central
    Road Research Institute. Requirements of Ideal Alignment, Factors Controlling Highway
    Alignment Engineering Surveys for Alignment - Conventional Methods and Modern Methods
    (Remote Sensing, GIS and GPS techniques) Classification and Cross Section of Urban and Rural
    Roads (IRC), Highway Cross Sectional Elements – Right of Way, Carriage Way, Camber, Kerbs,
    Shoulders and Footpaths [IRC Standards], Cross sections of different Class of Roads - Principles
    of Highway Financing
    2. GEOMETRIC DESIGN OF HIGHWAYS 9
    Design of Horizontal Alignment – Horizontal Curves Super elevation, Widening of Pavements on
    Horizontal Curves and Transition Curves Design of Vertical Alignments – Rolling, Limiting,
    Exceptional and Minimum Gradients, Summit and Valley Curves-Sight Distances - Factors
    affecting Sight Distances, PIEV theory, Stopping Sight Distance (SSD), Overtaking Sight
    Distance (OSD), Sight Distance at Intersections, Intermediate Sight Distance and Illumination
    Sight Distance [Derivations and Problems in SSD and OSD] -Geometric Design of Hill Roads
    [IRC Standards Only]
    3. FLEXIBLE AND RIGID PAVEMENTS 9
    Rigid and Flexible Pavements- Components and their Functions -Design Principles of Flexible
    and Rigid Pavements, Factors affecting the Design of Pavements - ESWL, Climate, Sub-grade
    Soil and Traffic - Design Practice for Flexible Pavements [IRC Method and Recommendations-
    Problems] - Design Practice for Rigid Pavements – IRC Recommendations - concepts only.
    4. HIGHWAY MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION PRACTICE 9
    Desirable Properties and Testing of Highway Materials: Soil – California Bearing Ratio Test,
    Field Density Test - Aggregate - Crushing, Abrasion, Impact Tests, Water absorption, Flakiness
    and Elongation indices and Stone polishing value test - Bitumen - Penetration, Ductility, Viscosity,
    Binder content and Softening point Tests. - Construction Practice - Water Bound Macadam Road,
    Bituminous Road and Cement Concrete Road [as per IRC and MORTH specifications] - Highway
    Drainage [IRC Recommendations]
    5. HIGHWAY MAINTENANCE 9
    Types of defects in Flexible pavements – Surface defects, Cracks, Deformation, Disintegration –
    Symptoms, Causes and Treatments. - Types of Pavement, Failures in Rigid Pavements –
    Scaling, Shrinkage, Warping, Structural Cracks Spalling of Joints and Mud Pumping – and
    Special Repairs. - Pavement Evaluation – Pavement Surface Conditions and Structural
    Evaluation, Evaluation of pavement Failure and strengthening - Overlay design by Benkelman
    Beam Method [Procedure only],
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    11
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Khanna K and Justo C E G, Highway Engineering, Khanna Publishers, Roorkee, 2001.
    2. Kadiyali L R, Principles and Practice of Highway Engineering, Khanna Technical
    Publications, Delhi, 2000.
    REFERENCES
    1. Transportation Engineering & Planning, C.S. Papacostas, P.D. Prevedouros, Prentice
    Hall of India Pvt ltd, 2006.
    2. IRC Standards (IRC 37 - 2001 & IRC 58 -1998)
    3. Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS) Publications on Highway Materials
    4. Specifications for Road and Bridges, MORTH (India)
    12
    101451 STRENGTH OF MATERIALS LABORATORY 0 0 3 2
    OBJECTIVE
    The experimental work involved in this laboratory should make the student understand the
    fundamental modes of loading of the structures and also make measurements of loads,
    displacements and strains. Relating these quantities, the student should be able to obtain the
    strength of the material and stiffness properties of structural elements.
    LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
    1. Test involving axial compression to obtain the stress – strain curve
    2. Test involving axial tension to obtain the stress – strain curve and the strength
    3. Test involving torsion to obtain the torque vs. angle of twist and hence the
    stiffness
    4. Test involving flexure to obtain the load deflection curve and hence the stiffness
    5. Tests on springs
    6. Hardness tests
    7. Shear test
    8. Test for impact resistance
    9. Tests on Cement
    The student should learn the use of deflectometer, extensometer, compressometer and strain
    gauges.
    LIST OF EQUIPMENTS
    (For a batch of 30 students)
    Sl. No. Description of Equipments Quantity
    1. UTM of minimum 400 KN capacity 1
    2. Torsion testing machine for steel rods 1
    3. Izod impact testing machine 1
    4.
    Hardness testing machine
    Rockwell
    Vicker’s (any 2)
    Brinnel
    1 each
    5. Beam deflection test apparatus 1
    6. Extensometer 1
    7. Compressometer 1
    8. Dial gauges Few
    9 Le Chatelier’s apparatus 2
    10 Vicat’s apparatus 2
    11 Mortar cube moulds 10
    13
    101452 HYDRAULIC ENGINEERING LAB 0 0 3 2
    OBJECTIVE
    Student should be able to verify the principles studied in theory by conducting the experiments.
    LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
    1. Determination of co-efficient of discharge for orifice
    2. Determination of co-efficient of discharge for notches
    3. Determination of co-efficient of discharge for venturimeter
    4. Determination of co-efficient of discharge for orifice meter
    5. Study of impact of jet on flat plate (normal / inclined)
    6. Study of friction losses in pipes
    7. Study of minor losses in pipes
    8. Study on performance characteristics of Pelton turbine.
    9. Study on performance characteristics of Francis turbine
    10. Study on performance characteristics of Kaplan turbine
    11. Study on performance characteristics of Centrifugal pumps (Constant speed / variable
    speed)
    12. Study on performance characteristics of reciprocating pump.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    LIST OF EQUIPMENTS
    1. Bernoulli’s theorem – Verification Apparatus - 1 No.
    2. Calculation of Metacentric height
    water tank - 1 No.
    Ship model with accessories - 1 No.
    3. Measurement of velocity
    Pitot tube assembly - 1 No.
    4. Flow measurement
    open channel flow
    (i) Channel with provision for fixing notches
    (rectangular, triangular & trapezoidal forms) - 1 Unit
    (ii) Flume assembly with provisions for conducting
    experiments on Hydraulic jumps, generation of
    surges etc. - 1 Unit
    5. Flow measurement in pipes
    (i) Venturimeter, U tube manometer fixtures like
    Valves, collecting tank - 1 Unit
    (ii) Orifice meter, with all necessary fittings in
    pipe lines of different diameters - 1 Unit
    (iii) Calibration of flow through orifice tank with
    Provisions for fixing orifices of different shapes,
    collecting tank - 1 Unit
    (iv) Calibration of flow through mouth piece
    Tank with provisions for fixing mouth pieces
    Viz external mouth pieces & internal mouth piece
    Borda’s mouth piece - 1 Unit
    6. Losses in Pipes
    14
    Major loss – Friction loss
    Pipe lengths (min. 3m) of different diameters with
    Valves and pressure rapping & collecting tank - 1 Unit
    Minor Losses
    Pipe line assembly with provisions for having
    Sudden contractions in diameter, expansions
    Bends, elbow fitting, etc. - 1 Unit
    7. Pumps
    (i) Centrifugal pump assembly with accessories
    (single stage) - 1 Unit
    (ii) Centrifugal pump assembly with accessories
    (multi stage) - 1 Unit
    (iii) Reciprocating pump assembly with accessories - 1 Unit
    (iv) Deep well pump assembly set with accessories - 1 Unit
    8. Turbine
    (i) Impulse turbine assembly with fittings
    & accessories - 1 Unit
    (ii) Francis turbine assembly with fittings
    & accessories - 1 Unit
    (iii) Kaplan turbine assembly with fittings
    & accessories - 1 Unit
    101453 SURVEY PRACTICAL II 0 0 4 2
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of the course the student will posses knowledge about Survey field techniques.
    1. Study of theodolite
    2. Measurement of horizontal angles by reiteration and repetition and vertical angles
    3. Theodolite survey traverse
    4. Heights and distances - Triangulation - Single plane method.
    5. Tacheometry - Tangential system - Stadia system - Subtense system.
    6. Setting out works - Foundation marking - Simple curve (right/left-handed) - Transition
    curve.
    7. Field observation for and Calculation of azimuth
    8. Field work using Total Station.
    TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
    AFFILIATED INSTITUTIONS
    ANNA UNIVERSITY OF TECHNOLOGY CHENNAI :: CHENNAI 600 113
    REGULATIONS 2010
    B.E. CIVIL ENGINEERING
    CURRICULA AND SYLLABI FOR V SEMESTER
    SEMESTER V
    (Applicable to the students admitted from the Academic year 2010 – 2011 onwards)
    Code No. Course Title L T P C
    THEORY
    101501 Irrigation Engineering 3 0 0 3
    101502 Structural Analysis I 3 1 0 4
    101503 Railways, Airport and Harbour Engineering 4 0 0 4
    101504 Environmental Engineering I 3 0 0 3
    101505 Foundation Engineering 3 0 0 3
    101506 Design of RC Elements 3 1 0 4
    PRACTICAL
    186551 Communication Skills Laboratory** 0 0 4 2
    101551 Concrete and Highway Engineering Lab 0 0 3 2
    101552 Soil Mechanics Laboratory 0 0 3 2
    TOTAL 19 2 10 27
    101501 IRRIGATION ENGINEERING L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of the semester, the student shall understand the need and mode of irrigation.
    The student also shall know the irrigation management practices of the past, present
    and future. The structures involved the elementary hydraulic design of different
    structures and the concepts of maintenance shall also form part. Finally, the student
    shall be in a position to conceive and plan any type of irrigation project.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
    Irrigation – Need and mode of irrigation – Merits and demerits of irrigation – Crop and
    crop seasons – consumptive use of water – Duty – Factors affecting duty – Irrigation
    efficiencies – Planning and Development of irrigation projects.
    UNIT II IRRIGATION METHODS 8
    Canal irrigation – Lift irrigation – Tank irrigation – Flooding methods – Merits and
    demerits – Sprinkler irrigation – Drip irrigation
    UNIT III DIVERSION AND IMPOUNDING STRUCTURES 10
    Weirs – elementary profile of a weir – weirs on pervious foundations - Types of
    impounding structures - Percolation ponds – Tanks, Sluices and Weirs – Gravity dams –
    Earth dams – Arch dams – Spillways – Factors affecting location and type of dams –
    Forces on a dam – Hydraulic design of dams.
    UNIT IV CANAL IRRIGATION 10
    Alignment of canals – Classification of canals – Canal drops – Hydraulic design of drops
    – Cross drainage works – Hydraulic design of cross drainage works – Canal Head works
    – Canal regulators – River Training works.
    UNIT V IRRIGATION WATER MANAGEMENT 8
    Need for optimisation of water use – Minimising irrigation water losses – On farm
    development works - Participatory irrigation management – Water users associations –
    Changing paradigms in water management – Performance evaluation.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Asawa, G.L., “Irrigation Engineering”, New Age International Publishers, 2000
    2. Punima B.C. & Pande B.B .Lal Irrigation and Water Power Engineering, Laxmi
    Publishing, New Delhi 2007
    3. Michael, A.M, Irrigation Theory and Practical, Vikas Publishing Pvt Ltd, 2006
    4. Gupta, B.L, & Amir Gupta, “Irrigation Engineering”, Satya Praheshan, New Delhi
    REFERENCES
    1. Dilip Kumar Majumdar, “Irrigation Water Management (Principles & Practices)”,
    Prentice Hall of India (P), Ltd, 2000
    2. Basak, N.N, “Irrigation Engineering”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co. New Delhi,
    1999
    3. Sharma R.K.. “Irrigation Engineering”, S.Chand & Co. 2007.
    101505 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS I L T P C
    3 1 0 4
    OBJECTIVE
    The members of a structure are subjected to internal forces like axial forces, shearing
    forces, bending and torsional moments while transferring the loads acting on it.
    Structural analysis deals with analysing these internal forces in the members of the
    structures. At the end of this course students will be conversant with classical method of
    analysis.
    UNIT I DEFLECTION OF DETERMINATE STRUCTURES 12
    Principles of virtual work for deflections – Deflections of pin-jointed plane frames and
    rigid plane frames – Willot diagram - Mohr’s correction
    UNIT II MOVING LOADS AND INFLUENCE LINES 12
    (DETERMINATE & INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES WITH
    REDUNDANCY RESTRICTED TO ONE)
    Influence lines for reactions in statically determinate structures – influence lines for
    members forces in pin-jointed frames – Influence lines for shear force and bending
    moment in beam sections – Calculation of critical stress resultants due to concentrated
    and distributed moving loads. Muller Breslau’s principle – Influence lines for continuous
    beams and single storey rigid frames – Indirect model analysis for influence lines of
    indeterminate structures – Beggs deformeter
    UNIT III ARCHES 12
    Arches as structural forms – Examples of arch structures – Types of arches – Analysis
    of three hinged, two hinged and fixed arches, parabolic and circular arches – Settlement
    and temperature effects.
    UNIT IV SLOPE DEFLECTION METHOD 12
    Continuous beams and rigid frames (with and without sway) – Symmetry and
    antisymmetry – Simplification for hinged end – Support displacements
    UNIT V MOMENT DISTRIBUTION METHOD 12
    Distribution and carry over of moments – Stiffness and carry over factors – Analysis of
    continuous beams – Plane rigid frames with and without sway – Naylor’s simplification.
    TUTORIAL: 15 TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Vaidyanadhan, R and Perumal, P, “Comprehensive Structural Analysis – Vol. 1 &
    Vol. 2”, Laxmi Publications, New Delhi, 2003.
    2. L.S. Negi & R.S. Jangid, “Structural Analysis”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publications,
    New Delhi, Sixth Edition, 2003.
    3. Punmia B.C., Theory of Structures (SMTS ) Vol II Laxmi Publishing Pvt ltd, New
    Delhi, 2004.
    4. BhavaiKatti, S.S, Structural Analysis – Vol. 1 & Vol. 2, Vikas Publishing Pvt Ltd.,
    New Delhi, 2008
    REFERENCE
    1. Analysis of Indeterminate Structures – C.K. Wang, Tata McGraw-Hill, 1992.
    101503 RAILWAYS, AIRPORTS AND HARBOUR ENGINEERING L T P C
    4 0 0 4
    OBJECTIVE
    This course imparts the student’s knowledge of planning, design, construction and
    maintenance of railway tracks. The students acquire proficiency in the application of
    modern techniques such as GIS, GPS and remote sensing in Railway Engineering. The
    student develops skills on airport planning and design with the prime focus on runway
    and taxiway geometrics. Students become conversant with the definition, purpose,
    location and materials of coastal structures such as piers, breakwaters, wharves, jetties,
    quays and spring fenders. The students acquire knowledge on site reconnaissance for
    location and planning of harbours.
    UNIT I RAILWAY PLANNING AND DESIGN 12
    Role of Indian Railways in National Development – Railways for Urban Transportation –
    LRT & MRTS - Engineering Surveys for Track Alignment – Obligatory points -
    Conventional and Modern methods (Remote Sensing, GIS & GPS, EDM and other
    equipments) - Permanent Way, its Components and their Functions: Rails - Types of
    Rails, Rail Fastenings, Concept of Gauges, Coning of Wheels, Creeps and kinks -
    Sleepers – Functions, Materials, Density – Functions, Materials, Ballastless Tracks -
    Geometric Design of Railway Tracks – Gradients and Grade Compensation, Super-
    Elevation, Widening of Gauges in Curves, Transition Curves, Horizontal and Vertical
    Curves.
    UNIT II RAILWAY TRACK CONSTRUCTION, MAINTENANCE AND
    OPERATION 12
    Points and Crossings - Design of Turnouts, Working Principle - Signalling, Interlocking
    and Track Circuiting - Construction & Maintenance – Conventional, Modern methods
    and Materials, Track Drainage - Track Modernisation– Automated maintenance and
    upgrading, Re-laying of Track, Lay outs of Railway Stations and Yards, Rolling Stock,
    Tractive Power, Track Resistance, Level Crossings.
    UNIT III AIRPORT PLANNING AND DESIGN 12
    Role of Air Transport, Components of Airports - Airport Planning – Air traffic potential,
    Site Selection, Design of Components, Cost Estimates, Evaluation and Institutional
    arrangements Runway Design- Orientation, Cross wind Component, Wind rose Diagram
    (Problems), Geometric Design and Corrections for Gradients (Problems), Drainage -
    Taxiway Design – Geometric Design Elements, Minimum Separation Distances, Design
    Speed, Airport Drainage - Airport Zoning - Clear Zone, Approach Zone, Buffer Zone,
    Turning Zone, Clearance over Highways and Railways
    UNIT IV AIRPORT LAYOUTS, VISUAL AIDS, AND AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL 12
    Airport Layouts – Apron, Terminal Building, Hangars, Motor Vehicle Parking Area and
    Circulation Pattern, Case studies of Airport Layouts - Airport Buildings – Primary
    functions, Planning Concept, Principles of Passenger Flow, Passenger Facilities -
    Visual Aids – Runway and Taxiway Markings, Wind Direction Indicators, Runway and
    Taxiway Lightings - Air Traffic Control – Basic Actions, Air Traffic Control Network -
    Helipads, Hangars, Service Equipments.
    UNIT V HARBOUR ENGINEERING 12
    Definition of Terms - Harbours, Ports, Docks, Tides and Waves, Littoral Drift, Sounding,
    Area, Depth, Satellite Ports - Requirements and Classification of Harbours - Site
    Selection & Selection Investigation – Speed of water, Dredging, Range of Tides, Waves
    and Tidal Currents, Littoral Transport with Erosion and Deposition, Soundings,
    Anchoring Grounds, Geological Characteristics, Winds & Storms, Position and Size of
    Shoals - Shore Considerations- Proximity to Towns/Cities, Utilities, Construction
    Materials, Coast Lines - Dry and Wet Docks, Planning and Layouts - Entrance, Position
    of Light Houses, Navigating - Terminal Facilities – Port Buildings, Warehouse, Transit
    Sheds, Inter-modal Transfer Facilities, Mooring Accessories, Navigational Aids - Coastal
    Structures- Piers, Breakwaters, Wharves, Jetties, Quays, Spring Fenders - Coastal
    Shipping, Inland Water Transport and Container Transportation.
    TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Saxena Subhash C and Satyapal Arora, A Course in Railway Engineering,
    Dhanpat Rai and Sons, Delhi, 1998.
    2. Khanna S K, Arora M G and Jain S S, Airport Planning and Design, Nemchand
    and Brothers, Roorkee, 1994.
    3. S P Bindra, A Course in Docks and Harbour Engineering, Dhanpat Rai and Sons,
    New Delhi, 1993.
    REFERENCES
    1. Rangwala, Railway Engineering, Charotar Publishing House, 1995.
    2. Rangwala, Airport Engineering, Charotar Publishing House, 1996.
    3. Oza.H.P. and Oza.G.H., “A course in Docks & Harbour Engineering”. Charotar
    Publishing Co.1976.
    4. J.S. Mundrey, “A course in Railway Track Engineering”. Tata McGraw Hill, 2000.
    101504 ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING – I L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    To make the students conversant with principles of water supply, treatment and
    distribution
    UNIT I PLANNING FOR WATERSUPPLY SYSTEM 9
    Public water supply system -Planning -Objectives -Design period -Population forecasting
    -Water demand -Sources of water and their characteristics -Surface and Groundwater-
    Impounding Reservoir Well hydraulics -Development and selection of source - Water
    quality -Characterization -Water quality standards.
    UNIT II CONVEYANCE SYSTEM 9
    Water supply -intake structures -Functions and drawings -Pipes and conduits for water-
    Pipe materials -Hydraulics of flow in pipes -Transmission main design -Laying, jointing
    and testing of pipes -Drawings appurtenances - Types and capacity of pumps -Selection
    of pumps and pipe materials.
    UNIT III WATER TREATMENT 9
    Objectives -Unit operations and processes -Principles, functions design and drawing of
    Flash mixers, fiocculators, sedimentation tanks and sand filters -Disinfection- Residue
    Management.
    UNIT IV ADVANCED WATER TREATMENT 9
    Aerator- Iron and manganese removal, Defluoridation and demineralization -Water
    softening - Desalination -Membrane Systems -Construction and Operation &
    Maintenance aspects of Water Treatment Plants -Recent advances -Membrane
    Processes
    UNIT V WATER DISTRIBUTION AND SUPPLY TO BUILDINGS 9
    Requirements of water distribution -Components -Service reservoirs -Functions and
    drawings -Network design -Economics -Computer applications -Analysis of distribution
    networks -Appurtenances -operation and maintenance -Leak detection, Methods.
    Principles of design of water supply in buildings -House service connection -Fixtures and
    fittings -Systems of plumbing and drawings of types of plumbing.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Garg, S.K., Environmental Engineering, Vol.1 Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2005.
    2. Modi, P.N. Water Supply Engineering, Vol. I Standard Book House, New Delhi,
    2005.
    3. Punmia, B.C., Ashok K Jain and Arun K Jain, Water Supply Engineering, Laxmi
    Publications (P) Ltd., New Delhi, 2005
    REFERENCES
    1. Manual on Water Supply and Treatment, CPHEEO, Ministry of Urban Development,
    Government of India, New Delhi, 2003
    2. Syed R.Qasim and Edward M.Motley Guang Zhu, Water Works Engineering
    Planning, Design and Operation, Prentice Hall of India Private Limited, New Delhi –
    2006.
    101505 FOUNDATION ENGINEERING L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of this course student acquires the capacity to assess the soil condition at a
    given location in order to sugest suitable foundation and also gains the knowledge to
    design various foundations.
    UNIT I SITE INVESTIGATION AND SELECTION OF FOUNDATION 9
    Scope and objectives – Methods of exploration-auguring and boring – Water boring and
    rotatory drilling – Depth of boring – Spacing of bore hole - Sampling – Representative
    and undisturbed sampling – sampling techniques – Split spoon sampler, Thin tube
    sampler, Stationary piston sampler – Bore log report – Penetration tests (SPT and
    SCPT) – Data interpretation (Strength parameters and Liquefaction potential) –
    Selection of foundation based on soil condition.
    UNIT II SHALLOW FOUNDATION 9
    Introduction – Location and depth of foundation – codal provisions – bearing capacity of
    shallow foundation on homogeneous deposits – Terzaghi’s formula and BIS formula –
    factors affecting bearing capacity – problems - Bearing Capacity from insitu tests (SPT,
    SCPT and plate load) – Allowable bearing pressure, Settlement – Components of
    settlement – Determination of settlement of foundations on granular and clay deposits –
    Allowable settlements – Codal provision – Methods of minimising settlement, differential
    settlement.
    UNIT III FOOTINGS AND RAFTS 9
    Types of foundation – Contact pressure distribution below footings and raft - Isolated
    and combined footings – Types and proportioning - Mat foundation– Types, applications uses
    and proportioning-- floating foundation.
    UNIT IV PILES 9
    Types of piles and their function – Factors influencing the selection of pile – Carrying
    capacity of single pile in granular and cohesive soil - Static formula - dynamic formulae
    (Engineering news and Hiley’s) – Capacity from insitu tests (SPT and SCPT) – Negative
    skin friction – uplift capacity – Group capacity by different methods (Feld’s rule,
    Converse Labarra formula and block failure criterion) – Settlement of pile groups –
    Interpretation of pile load test – Forces on pile caps – under reamed piles – Capacity
    under compression and uplift.
    UNIT V RETAINING WALLS 9
    Plastic equilibrium in soils – active and passive states – Rankine’s theory – cohesionless
    and cohesive soil - Coloumb’s wedge theory – condition for critical failure plane - Earth
    pressure on retaining walls of simple configurations – Graphical methods (Rebhann and
    Culmann) - pressure on the wall due to line load – Stability of retaining walls.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Murthy, V.N.S, “Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering”, UBS Publishers
    Distribution Ltd, New Delhi, 1999.
    2. Gopal Ranjan and Rao, A.S.R. ”Basic and Applied Soil Mechanics”, Wiley
    Eastern
    Ltd., New Delhi (India), 2003.
    REFERENCES
    1. Das, B.M. “Principles of Foundation Engineering (Fifth edition), Thomson Books /
    COLE, 2003
    2. Bowles J.E, “Foundation analysis and design”, McGraw-Hill, 1994
    3. Punmia, B.C., “Soil Mechanics and Foundations”, Laxmi publications pvt. Ltd.,
    New Delhi, 1995.
    4. Venkatramaiah,C.”Geotechnical Engineering”, New Age International Publishers,
    New Delhi, 1995
    101506 DESIGN OF RC ELEMENTS L T P C
    3 1 0 4
    OBJECTIVE
    This course covers the different types of philosophies related to Design of Reinforced
    Concrete Structures with emphasis on Limit State Method. The design of Basic elements
    such as slab, beam, column and footing which form part of any structural system with
    reference to Indian standard code of practice for Reinforced Concrete Structures and
    Design Aids are included. At the end of course the student shall be in a position to
    design the basic elements of reinforced concrete structures.
    UNIT I METHODS OF DESIGN OF CONCRETE STRUCTURES 12
    Concept of Elastic method, ultimate load method and limit state method – Advantages of
    Limit State Method over other methods – Design codes and specification – Limit State
    philosophy as detailed in IS code – Design of flexural members and slabs by working
    stress method – Principles of Design of Liquid retaining structures – Properties of uncracked
    section – Calculation of thickness and reinforcement for Liquid retaining
    structure
    UNIT II LIMIT STATE DESIGN FOR FLEXURE 12
    Analysis and design of one way and two way rectangular slab subjected to uniformly
    distributed load for various boundary conditions and corner effects – Analysis and design
    of singly and doubly reinforced rectangular and flanged beams
    UNIT III LIMIT STATE DESIGN FOR BOND, ANCHORAGE SHEAR & TORSI12
    Behaviour of RC members in bond and Anchorage - Design requirements as per
    current code - Behaviour of RC beams in shear and torsion - Design of RC members for
    combined bending shear and torsion.
    UNIT IV LIMIT STATE DESIGN OF COLUMNS 12
    Types of columns – Braced and unbraced columns – Design of short column for axial,
    uniaxial and biaxial bending – Design of long columns.
    UNIT V LIMIT STATE DESIGN OF FOOTING AND DETAILING 12
    Design of wall footing – Design of axially and eccentrically loaded rectangular footing –
    Design of combined rectangular footing for two columns only – Standard method of
    detailing RC beams, slabs and columns – Special requirements of detailing with
    reference to erection process.
    TUTORIAL: 15 TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Varghese, P.C., “Limit State Design of Reinforced Concrete”, Prentice Hall of
    India, Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi 2002.
    2. Krishna Raju, N., “Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures”, CBS Publishers &
    Distributors, New Delhi,2003.
    REFERENCES
    1. Jain, A.K., “Limit State Design of RC Structures”, Nemchand Publications,
    Rourkee
    2. Sinha, S.N., “Reinforced Concrete Design”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing
    Company Ltd., New Delhi.
    3. Unnikrishna Pillai, S., Devdas Menon, “Reinforced Concrete Design”, Tata
    McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi.
    186551 COMMUNICATION SKILLS LABORATORY L T P C
    (Fifth / Sixth Semester) 0 0 4 2
    Globalisation has brought in numerous opportunities for the teeming millions, with more
    focus on the students’ overall capability apart from academic competence. Many
    students, particularly those from non-English medium schools, find that they are not
    preferred due to their inadequacy of communication skills and soft skills, despite
    possessing sound knowledge in their subject area along with technical capability.
    Keeping in view their pre-employment needs and career requirements, this course on
    Communication Skills Laboratory will prepare students to adapt themselves with ease to
    the industry environment, thus rendering them as prospective assets to industries. The
    course will equip the students with the necessary communication skills that would go a
    long way in helping them in their profession.
    OBJECTIVES
     To equip students of engineering and technology with effective speaking and
    listening skills in English.
     To help them develop their soft skills and interpersonal skills, which will make the
    transition from college to workplace smoother and help them excel in their job.
     To enhance the performance of students at Placement Interviews, Group
    Discussions and other recruitment exercises.
    A. ENGLISH LANGUAGE LAB (18 Periods)
    1. LISTENING COMPREHENSION: (6)
    Listening and typing – Listening and sequencing of sentences – Filling in the blanks -
    Listening and answering questions
    2. READING COMPREHENSION: (6)
    Filling in the blanks - Close exercises – Vocabulary building - Reading and answering
    questions.
    3. SPEAKING: (6)
    Phonetics: Intonation – Ear training - Correct Pronunciation – Sound recognition
    exercises – Common Errors in English.
    Conversations: Face to Face Conversation – Telephone conversation – Role play
    activities (Students take on roles and engage in conversation)
    I. PC based session (Weightage 40%) 24 periods
    B. DISCUSSION OF AUDIO-VISUAL MATERIALS (6 PERIODS)
    (Samples are available to learn and practice)
    1. RESUME / REPORT PREPARATION / LETTER WRITING (1)
    Structuring the resume / report - Letter writing / Email Communication - Samples.
    2. PRESENTATION SKILLS: (1)
    Elements of effective presentation – Structure of presentation - Presentation
    tools – Voice Modulation – Audience analysis - Body language – Video samples
    3. SOFT SKILLS: (2)
    Time management – Articulateness – Assertiveness – Psychometrics –
    Innovation and Creativity - Stress Management & Poise - Video Samples
    4. GROUP DISCUSSION: (1)
    Why is GD part of selection process? - Structure of GD – Moderator – led and
    other GDs - Strategies in GD – Team work - Body Language - Mock GD -Video
    samples
    5. INTERVIEW SKILLS: (1)
    Kinds of interviews – Required Key Skills – Corporate culture – Mock interviews-
    Video samples.
    1. Resume / Report Preparation / Letter writing: Students prepare their
    (3)
    Own resume and report.
    2. Presentation Skills: Students make presentations on given topics.
    (12)
    3. Group Discussion: Students participate in group discussions.
    (9)
    4. Interview Skills: Students participate in Mock Interviews
    (12)
    REFERENCES
    1. Anderson, P.V, Technical Communication, Thomson Wadsworth , Sixth
    Edition, New Delhi, 2007.
    2. Prakash, P, Verbal and Non-Verbal Reasoning, Macmillan India Ltd., Second
    II. Practice Session (Weightage – 60%) 36 periods
    Edition, New Delhi, 2004.
    3. John Seely, The Oxford Guide to Writing and Speaking, Oxford University
    Press, New Delhi, 2004.
    4. Evans, D, Decisionmaker, Cambridge University Press, 1997.
    5. Thorpe, E, and Thorpe, S, Objective English, Pearson Education,
    Second Edition, New Delhi, 2007.
    6. Turton, N.D and Heaton, J.B, Dictionary of Common Errors, Addision Wesley
    Longman Ltd., Indian reprint 1998.
    LAB REQUIREMENTS
    1. Teacher console and systems for students.
    2. English Language Lab Software
    3. Career Lab Software
    GUIDELINES FOR THE COURSE
    186551 COMMUNICATION SKILLS LABORATORY
    1. A batch of 60 / 120 students is divided into two groups – one group for the PCbased
    session and the other group for the Class room session.
    2. The English Lab (2 Periods) will be handled by a faculty member of the English
    Department. The Career Lab (2 Periods) may be handled by any competent
    teacher, not necessarily from English Department
    3. Record Notebook: At the end of each session of English Lab, review exercises
    are given for the students to answer and the computer evaluated sheets are to
    be compiled as record notebook. Similar exercises for the career lab are to be
    compiled in the record notebook.
    4. Internal Assessment: The 15 marks (the other 5 marks for attendance) allotted
    for the internal assessment will be based on the record notebook compiled by the
    candidate. 10 marks may be allotted for English Lab component and 5 marks for
    the Career Lab component.
    5. End semester Examination: The end-semester examination carries 40%
    weightage for English Lab and 60% weightage for Career Lab.
    Each candidate will have separate sets of questions assigned by the teacher
    using the teacher-console enabling PC–based evaluation for the 40% of marks
    allotted.
    The Career Lab component will be evaluated for a maximum of 60% by a
    local examiner & an external examiner drafted from other Institutions,
    similar to any other lab examination conducted by Anna University.
    101551 CONCRETE AND HIGHWAY ENGINEERING LAB L T P C
    0 0 3 2
    OBJECTIVE
    To learn the principles and procedures of testing Concrete and Highway materials
    I. TESTS ON FRESH CONCRETE
    1. Slump cone test
    2. Flow table
    3. Compaction factor
    4. Vee bee test.
    II. TESTS ON HARDENED CONCRETE
    1. Compressive strength - Cube & Cylinder
    2. Flexure test
    3. Modulus Of Elastics
    III. TESTS ON BITUMEN
    1. Penetration
    2. Softening Point
    3. Ductility
    4. Viscosity
    5. Elastic Recovery
    6. Storage Stability
    IV. TESTS ON AGGREGATES
    1. Stripping
    2. Soundness
    3. Proportioning of Aggregates
    4. Water Absorption
    V. TESTS ON BITUMINOUS MIXES
    1. Determination of Binder Content
    2. Marshall Stability and Flow values
    3. Specific Gravity
    4. Density.
    (EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS)
    SL.NO DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENTS QUANTITY
    1. Concrete cube moulds 6
    2. Concrete cylinder moulds 3
    3. Concrete Prism moulds 3
    4. Sieves 1set
    5. Concrete Mixer 1
    6. Slump cone 3
    7. Flow table 1
    8. Vibrator 1
    9. Trovels and planers 1 set
    10. UTM – 400 KN capacity 1
    11. Vee Bee Consistometer 1
    12. Aggregate impact testing machine 1
    13. CBR Apparatus 1
    14. Blains Apparatus 1
    101552 SOIL MECHANICS LABORATORY L T P C
    0 0 3 2
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of this course, the student acquires the capacity to test the soil to assess its
    Engineering and Index properties.
    1. Grain size distribution - Sieve analysis
    2. Grain size distribution - Hydrometer analysis
    3. Specific gravity of soil grains
    4. Relative density of sands
    5. Atterberg limits test
    6. Determination of moisture - Density relationship using standard Proctor test.
    7. Permeability determination (constant head and falling head methods)
    8. Determination of shear strength parameters.
    1. Direct shear test on cohesionless soil
    2. Unconfined compression test on cohesive soil
    3. Triaxial compression test (demonstration only)
    9. One dimensional consolidation test (Demonstration only)
    10. Field density test (Core cutter and sand replacement methods)
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    LIST OF EQUIPMENT
    (For a batch of 30 students)
    SL.NO. DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENTS QUANTITY
    1. Sieves 2 sets
    2. Hydrometer 2 sets
    3. Liquid and plastic limit apparatus 2 sets
    4. Shinkage limit apparatus 3 sets
    5. Proctor compaction apparatus 2 sets
    6. UTM of minimum of 20KN capacity 1
    7. Direct shear apparatus 1
    8. Thermeometer 2
    9. Field density measuring device 2
    10. Triaxial shear apparatus 1
    11. Three gang consolidation test device 1
    1
    AFFILIATED INSTITUTIONS
    ANNA UNIVERSITY OF TECHNOLOGY CHENNAI :: CHENNAI 600 113
    CURRICULUM 2010
    CURRICULA AND SYLLABI FOR VI SEMESTER
    B.E. CIVIL ENGINEERING
    SEMESTER VI
    Code No. Course Title L T P C
    THEORY
    188601 Principles of Management 3 0 0 3
    101601 Structural Analysis – II 3 1 0 4
    101602 Design of Steel Structures 3 1 0 4
    101603 Construction Planning & Scheduling 3 0 0 3
    101604 Environmental Engineering II 3 0 0 3
    E1 Elective – I 3 0 0 3
    PRACTICAL
    101651
    Environmental and Irrigation Engineering
    Drawing
    0 0 4 2
    101652 Environmental Engineering Laboratory 0 0 3 2
    101653 Survey Camp - - - 3
    TOTAL 18 2 7 27
    LIST OF ELECTIVES for B.E. CIVIL ENGINEERING
    SEMESTER VI
    Code No. Course Title L T P C
    101665 Hydrology 3 0 0 3
    101666 Cartography 3 0 0 3
    101667 Electronic Surveying 3 0 0 3
    101668 Remote Sensing Techniques and GIS 3 0 0 3
    101669 Architecture 3 0 0 3
    185665 Professional Ethics in Engineering 3 0 0 3
    185666 Total Quality Management 3 0 0 3
    185667 Fundamentals of Nanoscience 3 0 0 3
    185668 Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) 3 0 0 3
    185669 Indian Constitution and Society 3 0 0 3
    2
    188601 PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT L T P C
    (Common to all Branches) 3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    Knowledge on the principles of management is essential for all kinds of people in all kinds of
    organizations. After studying this course, students will be able to have a clear understanding of
    the managerial functions like planning, organizing, staffing, leading and controlling. Students will
    also gain some basic knowledge on international aspect of management.
    UNIT I HISTORICAL DEVELOPMENT 9
    Definition of Management – Science or Art – Management and Administration – Development of
    Management Thought – Contribution of Taylor and Fayol – Functions of Management – Types
    of Business Organisation.
    UNIT II PLANNING 9
    Nature & Purpose – Steps involved in Planning – Objectives – Setting Objectives – Process of
    Managing by Objectives – Strategies, Policies & Planning Premises- Forecasting – Decisionmaking.
    UNIT III ORGANISING 9
    Nature and Purpose – Formal and informal organization – Organization Chart – Structure and
    Process – Departmentation by difference strategies – Line and Staff authority – Benefits and
    Limitations – De-Centralization and Delegation of Authority – Staffing – Selection Process -
    Techniques – HRD – Managerial Effectiveness.
    UNIT IV DIRECTING 9
    Scope – Human Factors – Creativity and Innovation – Harmonizing Objectives – Leadership –
    Types of Leadership Motivation – Hierarchy of needs – Motivation theories – Motivational
    Techniques – Job Enrichment – Communication – Process of Communication – Barriers and
    Breakdown – Effective Communication – Electronic media in Communication.
    UNIT V CONTROLLING 9
    System and process of Controlling – Requirements for effective control – The Budget as Control
    Technique – Information Technology in Controlling – Use of computers in handling the
    information – Productivity – Problems and Management – Control of Overall Performance –
    Direct and Preventive Control – Reporting – The Global Environment – Globalization and
    Liberalization – International Management and Global theory of Management.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS:
    1. Harold Kooritz & Heinz Weihrich “Essentials of Management”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 1998
    2. Joseph L Massie “Essentials of Management”, Prentice Hall of India,
    (Pearson) Fourth Edition, 2003.
    REFERENCES
    1. Tripathy PC And Reddy PN, “Principles of Management”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 1999.
    2. Decenzo David, Robbin Stephen A, “Personnel and Human Reasons Management”,
    Prentice Hall of India, 1996
    3. JAF Stomer, Freeman R. E and Daniel R Gilbert Management, Pearson Education, Sixth
    Edition,2004.
    4. Fraidoon Mazda, “Engineering Management”, Addison Wesley, 2000.
    3
    101601 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS – II L T P C
    3 1 0 4
    OBJECTIVE:
    This course is in continuation of Structural Analysis – Classical Methods. Here in advanced
    method of analysis like Matrix method and Plastic Analysis are covered. Advanced topics such
    as FE method and Space Structures are covered.
    UNIT I FLEXIBILITY METHOD 12
    Equilibrium and compatibility – Determinate vs Indeterminate structures – Indeterminacy -
    Primary structure – Compatibility conditions – Analysis of indeterminate pin-jointed plane
    frames, continuous beams, rigid jointed plane frames (with redundancy restricted to two).
    UNIT II STIFFNESS MATRIX METHOD 12
    Element and global stiffness matrices – Analysis of continuous beams – Co-ordinate
    transformations – Rotation matrix – Transformations of stiffness matrices, load vectors and
    displacements vectors – Analysis of pin-jointed plane frames and rigid frames( with redundancy
    vertical to two)
    UNIT III FINITE ELEMENT METHOD 12
    Introduction – Discretisation of a structure – Displacement functions – Truss element – Beam
    element – Plane stress and plane strain - Triangular elements
    UNIT IV PLASTIC ANALYSIS OF STRUCTURES 12
    Statically indeterminate axial problems – Beams in pure bending – Plastic moment of resistance
    – Plastic modulus – Shape factor – Load factor – Plastic hinge and mechanism – Plastic
    analysis of indeterminate beams and frames – Upper and lower bound theorems
    UNIT V SPACE AND CABLE STRUCTURES 12
    Analysis of Space trusses using method of tension coefficients – Beams curved in plan
    Suspension cables – suspension bridges with two and three hinged stiffening girders
    TUTORIAL: 15 TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1 Vaidyanathan, R. and Perumal, P., “Comprehensive structural Analysis – Vol. I & II”,
    Laxmi Publications, New Delhi, 2003
    2 L.S. Negi & R.S. Jangid, “Structural Analysis”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publications, New Delhi,
    2003.
    3 BhaviKatti, S.S, “Structural Analysis – Vol. 1 Vol. 2”, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.,
    New Delhi, 2008
    REFERENCES
    1. Ghali.A, Nebille,A.M. and Brown,T.G. “Structural Analysis” A unified classical and Matrix
    approach” –5th edition. Spon Press, London and New York, 2003.
    2. Coates R.C, Coutie M.G. and Kong F.K., “Structural Analysis”, ELBS and Nelson, 1990
    3. Structural Analysis – A Matrix Approach – G.S. Pandit & S.P. Gupta, Tata McGraw Hill
    2004.
    4. Matrix Analysis of Framed Structures – Jr. William Weaver & James M. Gere, CBS
    Publishers and Distributors, Delhi.
    4
    101602 DESIGN OF STEEL STRUCTURES L T P C
    3 1 0 4
    OBJECTIVE:
    This course covers the design of structural steel members subjected to compressive, tensile
    and bending loads, as per current codal provisions (IS 800 - 2007) including connections.
    Design of structural systems such as roof trusses, gantry girders are included.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION 12
    Properties of steel – Structural steel sections – Limit State Design Concepts – Loads on
    Structures – Metal joining methods using rivets, welding, bolting – Design of bolted, riveted and
    welded joints – Eccentric connections - Efficiency of joints – High Tension bolts
    UNIT II TENSION MEMBERS 8
    Types of sections – Net area – Net effective sections for angles and Tee in tension – Design of
    connections in tension members – Use of lug angles – Design of tension splice – Concept of
    shear lag
    UNIT III COMPRESSION MEMBERS 16
    Types of compression members – Theory of columns – Basis of current codal provision for
    compression member design – Slenderness ratio – Design of single section and compound
    section compression members – Design of lacing and battening type columns – Design of
    column bases – Gusseted base
    UNIT IV BEAMS 12
    Design of laterally supported and unsupported beams – Built up beams – Beams subjected to
    biaxial bending – Design of plate girders riveted and welded – Intermediate and bearing
    stiffeners – Web splices – Design of beam columns
    UNIT V ROOF TRUSSES AND INDUSTRIAL STRUCTURES 12
    Roof trusses – Roof and side coverings – Design loads, design of purlin and elements of truss;
    end bearing – Design of gantry girder
    TUTORIAL: 15 TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Dayaratnam, P., “Design of Steel Structures”, Second edition, S. Chand & Company, 2003.
    2. Ramachandra, S. and Virendra Gehlot, “Design of Steel Structures – Vol. I & II”, Standard
    Publication, New Delhi, 2007
    REFERENCES
    1. “Teaching Resources for Structural Steel Design – Vol. I & II”, INSDAG, Kolkatta.
    2. Gaylord, E.H., Gaylord, N.C., and Stallmeyer, J.E., “Design of Steel Structures”, 3rd
    edition, McGraw-Hill Publications, 1992
    3. Negi L.S.. Design of Steel Structures, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Pvt Ltd, New Delhi,
    2007.
    4. IS 800-2007 Indian Standard General Construction in Steel – code of practice (3rd
    Revision).
    5
    101603 CONSTRUCTION PLANNING & SCHEDULING L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of this course the student is expected to have learnt how to plan construction
    projects, schedule the activities using network diagrams, determine the cost of the project,
    control the cost of the project by creating cash flows and budgeting and how to use the project
    information as an information and decision making tool.
    UNIT I CONSTRUCTION PLANNING 6
    Basic concepts in the development of construction plans-choice of Technology and Construction
    method-Defining Work Tasks- Definition- Precedence relationships among activities-Estimating
    Activity Durations-Estimating Resource Requirements for work activities-coding systems.
    UNIT II SCHEDULING PROCEDURES AND TECHNIQUES 12
    Relevance of construction schedules-Bar charts - The critical path method-Calculations for
    critical path scheduling-Activity float and schedules-Presenting project schedules-Critical path
    scheduling for Activity-on-node and with leads, Lags and Windows-Calculations for scheduling
    with leads, lags and windows-Resource oriented scheduling-Scheduling with resource
    constraints and precedences -Use of Advanced Scheduling Techniques-Scheduling with
    uncertain durations-Crashing and time/cost trade offs -Improving the Scheduling process –
    Introduction to application software.
    UNIT III COST CONTROL MONITORING AND ACCOUNTING 11
    The cost control problem-The project Budget-Forecasting for Activity cost control - financial
    accounting systems and cost accounts-Control of project cash flows-Schedule control-Schedule
    and Budget updates-Relating cost and schedule information.
    UNIT IV QUALITY CONTROL AND SAFETY DURING CONSTRUCTION 8
    Quality and safety Concerns in Construction-Organizing for Quality and Safety-Work and
    Material Specifications-Total Quality control-Quality control by statistical methods -Statistical
    Quality control with
    Sampling by Attributes-Statistical Quality control by Sampling and Variables-Safety.
    UNIT V ORGANIZATION AND USE OF PROJECT INFORMATION 8
    Types of project information-Accuracy and Use of Information-Computerized organization and
    use of Information -Organizing information in databases-relational model of Data bases-Other
    conceptual Models of Databases-Centralized database Management systems-Databases and
    application programs-Information transfer and Flow.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Chitkara, K.K. “Construction Project Management Planning”, Scheduling and
    Control, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi, 1998.
    2. Srinath,L.S., “Pert and CPM Priniples and Applications “, Affiliated East West Press,
    2001
    6
    REFERENCES
    1. Chris Hendrickson and Tung Au, “Project Management for Construction – Fundamentals
    Concepts for Owners”, Engineers, Architects and Builders, Prentice Hall, Pitsburgh,
    2000.
    2. Moder.J., C.Phillips and Davis, “Project Management with CPM”, PERT and Precedence
    Diagramming, Van Nostrand Reinhold Co., Third Edition, 1983.
    3. Willis., E.M., “Scheduling Construction projects”, John Wiley and Sons 1986.
    4. Halpin,D.W., “Financial and cost concepts for construction Management”, John Wiley and
    Sons, New York, 1985.
    7
    101604 ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING II L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    To educate the students on the principles and design of Sewage Collection, Conveyance,
    treatment and disposal.
    UNIT I PLANNING FOR SEWERAGE SYSTEMS 9
    Sources of wastewater generation – Effects – Estimation of sanitary sewage flow – Estimation
    of storm runoff – Factors affecting Characteristics and composition of sewage and their
    significance – Effluent standards – Legislation requirements.
    UNIT II SEWER DESIGN 9
    Sewerage – Hydraulics of flow in sewers – Objectives – Design period - Design of sanitary and
    storm sewers – Small bore systems - Computer applications – Laying, joining & testing of
    sewers – appurtenances – Pumps – selection of pumps and pipe Drainage -. Plumbing System
    for Buildings – One pipe and two pipe system.
    UNIT III PRIMARY TREATMENT OF SEWAGE 9
    Objective – Unit Operation and Processes – Selection of treatment processes – Onsite
    sanitation - Septic tank, Grey water harvesting – Primary treatment – Principles, functions
    design and drawing of screen, grit chambers and primary sedimentation tanks – Operation and
    Mintenance aspects.
    UNIT IV SECONDARY TREATMENT OF SEWAGE 9
    Objective – Selection of Treatment Methods – Principles, Functions, Design and Drawing of
    Units - Activated Sludge Process and Trickling filter, other treatment methods – Oxidation
    ditches, UASB – Waste Stabilization Ponds – Reclamation and Reuse of sewage - Recent
    Advances in Sewage Treatment – Construction and Operation & Maintenance of Sewage
    Treatment Plants.
    UNIT V DISPOSAL OF SEWAGE AND SLUDGE 9
    Standards for Disposal - Methods – dilution – Self purification of surface water bodies – Oxygen
    sag curve – Land disposal – Sewage farming – Deep well injection – Soil dispersion system -
    Sludge characterization – Thickening – Sludge digestion – Biogas recovery – Sludge
    Conditioning and Dewatering – disposal – Advances in Sludge Treatment and disposal.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Garg, S.K., Environmental Engineering Vol. II, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2003.
    2. Punmia, B.C., Jain, A.K., and Jain.A., Environmental Engineering, Vol.II, Lakshmi
    Publications, Newsletter, 2005.
    REFERENCES
    1. Manual on Sewerage and Sewage Treatment, CPHEEO, Ministry of Urban
    Development, Government of India, New Delhi, 1997.
    2. Wastewater Engineering – Treatment and Reuse, Tata Mc.Graw-Hill Company, New
    Delhi, 2003.
    8
    101651 ENVIRONMENTAL AND IRRIGATION ENGINEERING DRAWING L T P C
    0 0 4 2
    UNIT I WATER SUPPLY AND TREATMENT 15
    Design & Drawing of flash mixer, flocculator, clarifier – Slow sand filter – Rapid sand filter –
    Infiltration gallery – Intake towers – Service reservoirs – Pumping station – House service
    connection for water supply and drainage.
    UNIT II SEWAGE TREATMENT & DISPOSAL 15
    Design and Drawing of screen chamber - Grit channel - Primary clarifier - Activated sludge
    process – Aeration tank & oxidation ditch – Trickling filters – Secondary clarifiers – Sludge
    digester – Sludge drying beds – Waste stabilisation ponds - Septic tanks and disposal
    arrangements – Manholes.
    UNIT III IMPOUNDING STRUCTURES 10
    Gravity dam, Tank Surplus Weir, Tank Sluice with tower road – Drawing showing plan,
    elevation, half section including foundation details.
    UNIT IV CANAL TRANSMISSION STRUCTURES 10
    Aqueducts – Syphon Aqueducts – Super passage – Canal siphon – Canal Drops- Drawing
    showing plan, elevation and foundation details.
    UNIT V CANAL REGULATION STRUCTURES 10
    Canal head works- Canal Regular – Canal escape- Proportional Distributors – Drawing showing
    detailed plan, elevation and foundation.
    TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Modi, P.N., “Environmental Engineering I & II”, Standard Book House, Delhi – 6
    2. Sathyanarayana Murthy “Irrigation Design and Drawing” Published by Mrs
    L.Banumathi, Tuni east Godavari District. A.P. 1998.
    3. Sharma R.K. Irrigation Engineering and Hydraulic Structures Oxford and IBH Publishing
    co., New Delhi 2002.
    REFERENCES
    1. Peary, H.S., ROWE, D.R., Tchobanoglous, G., “Environmental Engineering”,
    McGraw-Hill Book Co., New Delhi, 1995.
    2. Metcalf & Eddy, “Wastewater Engineering (Treatment and Reuse)”, 4th edition, Tata
    McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2003.
    3. Garg S.K., “Irrigation Environmental Engineering and design StructuresI”, Khanna
    Publishers, New Delhi, 17th Reprint, 2003.
    4. Manual on Water Supply and Treatment, CPHEEO, Government of India, New Delhi,
    1999
    5. Manual on Sewerage and Sewage Treatment, CPHEEO, Government of India, New
    Delhi, 1993.
    9
    101652 ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY L T P C
    0 0 3 2
    OBJECTIVE:
    This subject includes the list of experiments to be conducted for characterisation of water and
    municipal sewage. At the end of the course, the student is expected to be aware of the
    procedure for quantifying quality parameters for water and sewage.
    LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
    1. Sampling and preservation methods and significance of characterisation of water and
    wastewater.
    2. Determination of
    i) PH and turbidity
    ii) Hardness
    3. Determination of iron & fluoride
    4. Determination of residual chlorine
    5. Determination of Chlorides
    6. Determination of Ammonia Nitrogen
    7. Determination of Sulphate
    8. Determination of Optimum Coagulant Dosage
    9. Determination of available Chlorine in Bleaching powder
    10. Determination of dissolved oxygen
    11. Determination of suspended, volatile and fixed solids
    12. B.O.D. test
    13. C.O.D. test
    14. Introduction to Bacteriological Analysis (Demonstration only)
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    REFERENCES
    1. Standard methods for the examination of water and wastewater, APHA, 20th Edition,
    Washington, 1998
    2. Garg, S.K., “Environmental Engineering Vol. I & II”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi
    3. Modi, P.N., “Environmental Engineering Vol. I & II”, Standard Book House, Delhi-6
    LIST OF EQUIPMENTS
    (For a batch of 30 students)
    1. PH meter - 1 no.
    2. Turbidity meter - 1 no.
    3. Conductivity meter - 1 No.
    4. Refrigerator - 1 No.
    5. BOD incubator - 1 No.
    6. Muffle furnace - 1 No.
    7. Hot air oven - 1 No.
    8. Magnetic stirrer with hot plates - 5 Nos.
    9. Desicator - 1 No.
    10. Jar test apparatus - 1 No.
    10
    11. Water bath - 1 No.
    12. Furniture - 1 lot
    13. Glass waves / Cruicibles - 1 lot
    14. Chemicals - 1 lot
    15. COD apparatus - 1 No.
    16. Kjeldane apparatus - 1 No.
    17. Heating mantles - 5 Nos.
    18. Calorimeter - 1 No.
    19. Chlorine comparator - 1 No.
    20. Furniture : Work table - 10 Nos.
    21. Beaker - 30 Nos.
    22. Standard flask - 30 Nos.
    23. Burette with stand - 15 Nos.
    24. Pipette - 15 Nos.
    25. Crucible - 15 Nos.
    26. Filtration assembly - 1 No.
    27. Chemicals - Lot
    11
    101653 SURVEY CAMP L T P C
    0 0 0 3
    Ten days survey camp using Theodolite, cross staff, levelling staff, tapes, plane table and total
    station. The camp must involve work on a large area of not less than 400 hectares. At the end of
    the camp, each student shall have mapped and contoured the area. The camp record shall include
    all original field observations, calculations and plots.
    (i) Triangulation
    (ii) Trilateration
    (iii) Sun / Star observation to determine azimuth
    (iv) Use of GTS to determine latitude and longitude
    EVALUATION PROCEDURE
    1. Internal Marks : 20 marks
    (decided by the staff in-charge appointed by the Institution)
    2. Evaluation of Survey Camp Report : 30 marks
    (Evaluated by the external examiner appointed the University)
    3. Viva voce examination : 50 marks
    (evaluated by the internal examiner appointed by the HOD
    with the approval of HOI and external examiner appointed by
    the University – with equal Weightage)
    Total : 100 marks
    12
    ELECTIVES
    101665 HYDROLOGY L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of the semester, the student shall be having a good understanding of all the
    components of the hydrological cycle. The mechanics of rainfall, its spatial and temporal
    measurement and their applications will be understood. Simple statistical analysis and
    application of probability distribution of rainfall and run off shall also be understood. Student will
    also learn simple methods of flood routing and ground water hydrology.
    UNIT I PRECIPITATION 9
    Hydrologic cycle – Types of precipitation – Forms of precipitation – Measurement of Rainfall –
    Spatial measurement methods – Temporal measurement methods – Frequency analysis of
    point rainfall – Intensity, duration, frequency relationship – Probable maximum precipitation.
    UNIT II ABSTRACTION FROM PRECIPITATION 9
    Losses from precipitation – Evaporation process – Reservoir evaporation – Infiltration process –
    Infiltration capacity – Measurement of infiltration – Infiltration indices – Effective rainfall.
    UNIT III HYDROGRAPHS 9
    Factors affecting Hydrograph – Baseflow separation – Unit hydrograph – Derivation of unit
    hydrograph – S curve hydrograph – Unit hydrograph of different deviations - Synthetic Unit
    Hydrograph
    UNIT IV FLOODS AND FLOOD ROUTING 9
    Flood frequency studies – Recurrence interval – Gumbel’s method – Flood routing – Reservoir
    flood routing – Muskingum’s Channel Routing – Flood control
    UNIT V GROUND WATER HYDROLOGY 9
    Types of aquifers – Darcy’s law – Dupuit’s assumptions – Confined Aquifer – Unconfined
    Aquifer – Recuperation test – Transmissibility – Specific capacity – Pumping test – Steady flow
    analysis only.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Subramanya, K., “Engineering Hydrology”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co., Ltd., 2000
    2. Raghunath, H.M., “Hydrology”, Wiley Eastern Ltd., 2000
    REFERENCES
    1. Chow, V.T. and Maidment, “Hydrology for Engineers”, McGraw-Hill Inc., Ltd., 2000
    2. Singh, V.P., “Hydrology”, McGraw-Hill Inc., Ltd., 2000.
    13
    101666 CARTOGRAPHY L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of the course the student will posses knowledge about Cartographic Concepts.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
    Cartography today - Nature of Cartography - History of Cartography - Graticules - Cartometry.
    UNIT II EARTH 9
    Earth-Map Relations - Basic Geodesy - Map Projections, Scale, Reference and Coordinate
    system - Transformation - Basic Transformation - Affin Transformation.
    UNIT III SOURCES OF DATA 9
    Sources of data - Ground Survey and Positioning - Remote Sensing data collection - Census
    and sampling - data - Models for digital cartographic information, Map digitizing.
    UNIT IV PERCEPTION AND DESIGN 9
    Cartographic design - Color theory and models - Color and pattern creation and specification -
    Color and pattern - Typography and lettering the map - Map compilation.
    UNIT V CARTOGRAPHY ABSTRACTION 9
    Selection and Generalisation Principles - Symbolisation - Topographic and thematic maps - Map
    production and Reproduction - Map series.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. R.W. ANSON and F.J. ORMELING, Basic Cartography for students and Technicians.
    Vol. I, II and III, Elsevrir Applied Science Publishers 2nd Edition, 1994.
    2. ARTHUR, H. ROBINSON Et al Elements of Cartography, Sixth Edition, John Wiley and
    Sons, 1995.
    3. John Campbell, Introductory Cartography Second Edition, 1994. Wm.C. Brown
    Publishers.
    4. M.J.Kraak and F.J. Ormeling, Cartography: Visualisation and spatial data. Prentice Hall
    – 1996.
    14
    101667 ELECTRONIC SURVEYING L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of the course the student will posses knowledge about Electronic surveying
    UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS 7
    Methods of measuring distance, historical development, basic principles of EDM, classifications,
    applications and comparison with conventional surveying.
    UNIT II BASIC ELETRONICS 8
    Fundamentals of electronics, resonant circuits, semiconductors, Lasers, Cathode ray tube,
    photo multiplier tube, transducers, oscillators, frequency mixing, modulation and demodulation,
    Kerrcell modulator, measurement of phase difference, reflectors and power sources.
    UNIT III PROPAGATION OF ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 11
    Definition, classification, applications, propagation properties, wave propagation at lower and
    higher frequencies. Refractive index, factors affecting, computation of group refractive index for
    light and near infrared waves at standard conditions and ambient conditions, reference
    refractive index, first velocity correction, computation of refractive index for microwaves,
    measurement of atmospheric parameters, mean refractive index, real time application of first
    velocity correction, second velocity correction and total atmospheric correction.
    UNIT IV ELECTROMAGNETIC DISTANCE MEASURING SYSTEM 11
    Electro-optical system, measuring principle, working principle, sources of error, infrared EDM
    instruments, Laser EDM instruments and total station. Microwave system, measuring principle,
    working principle, sources of error, microwave EDM instruments, comparison with Electrooptical
    system, care and maintenance of EDM instruments, Modern Positioning Systems. EDM
    traversing, trilateration and base line measurement using EDM.
    UNIT V FIELD STUDIES 8
    . Study o different EDM instruments and Total Station. EDM traversing, trilateration and base
    line measurement using EDM.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    REFERENCES
    1. Burnside, C.D. Electromagnetic distance measurement Crosby Lock wood staples, U.K.
    1971.
    2. Rueger, J.M. Electronic Distance Measurement, Springer-Verlag, Berlin, 1990.
    3. Laurila, S.H. Electronic Surveying in Practice, John Wiley and Sons Inc, 1983.
    4. Soastamoinen, J.J. Surveyor’s guide to electro-magnetic Distance Measurement, Adam
    Hilger Ltd., 1967.
    15
    101668 REMOTE SENSING TECHNIQUES AND GIS L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    To introduce the students to the basic concepts and principles of various components of remote
    sensing. To provide an exposure to GIS and its practical applications in civil engineering.
    UNIT I EMR AND ITS INTERACTION WITH ATMOSPHERE & EARTH MATERIAL 9
    Definition of remote sensing and its components – Electromagnetic spectrum – wavelength
    regions important to remote sensing – Wave theory, Particle theory, Stefan-Boltzman and
    Wein’s Displacement Law – Atmospheric scattering, absorption – Atmospheric windows –
    spectral signature concepts – typical spectral reflective characteristics of water, vegetation and
    soil.
    UNIT II PLATFORMS AND SENSORS 9
    Types of platforms – orbit types, Sun-synchronous and Geosynchronous – Passive and Active
    sensors – resolution concept – Pay load description of important Earth Resources and
    Meteorological satellites – Airborne and spaceborne TIR and microwave sensors.
    UNIT III IMAGE INTERPRETATION AND ANALYSIS 9
    Types of Data Products – types of image interpretation – basic elements of image interpretation
    - visual interpretation keys – Digital Image Processing – Pre-processing – image enhancement
    techniques – multispectral image classification – Supervised and unsupervised.
    UNIT IV GEOGRAPHIC INFORMATION SYSTEM 9
    Introduction – Maps – Definitions – Map projections – types of map projections – map analysis –
    GIS definition – basic components of GIS – standard GIS softwares – Data type – Spatial and
    non-spatial (attribute) data – measurement scales – Data Base Management Systems (DBMS).
    UNIT V DATA ENTRY, STORAGE AND ANALYSIS 9
    Data models – vector and raster data – data compression – data input by digitization and
    scanning – attribute data analysis – integrated data analysis – Modeling in GIS Highway
    alignment studies – Land Information System.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Lillesand, T.M., Kiefer, R.W. and J.W.Chipman. (2004). Remote Sensing and Image
    Interpretation. V Edn. John Willey and Sons (Asia) Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi. Pp:763.
    2. Anji Reddy, M. (2001). Textbook of Remote Sensing and Geographical
    Information System. Second edn. BS Publications, Hyderabad.
    REFERENCES
    1. Lo. C.P.and A.K.W.Yeung (2002). Concepts and Techniques of Geographic Information
    Systems. Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi. Pp:492.
    2. Peter A.Burrough, Rachael A.McDonnell (2000). Principles of GIS. Oxford University
    Press.
    3. Ian Heywood (2000). An Introduction to GIS. Pearson Education Asia.
    16
    101669 ARCHITECTURE L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    To provide the basic knowledge on the principles of design of buildings relating to the
    environment and climate.
    UNIT I ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN 8
    Architectural Design – an analysis – integration of function and aesthetics – Introduction to basic
    elements and principles of design.
    UNIT II SITE PLANNING 9
    Surveys – Site analysis – Development Control – Layout regulations- Layout design concepts.
    UNIT III BUILDING TYPES 12
    Residential, institutional, commercial and Industrial – Application of anthropometry and space
    standards-Inter relationships of functions – Safety standards – Building rules and regulations –
    Integration of building services – Interior design
    UNIT IV CLIMATE AND ENVIRONMENTAL RESPONSIVE DESIGN 8
    Man and environment interaction- Factors that determine climate – Characteristics of climate
    types – Design for various climate types – Passive and active energy controls – Green building
    concept
    UNIT V TOWN PLANNING 8
    Planning – Definition, concepts and processes- Urban planning standards and zoning
    regulations- Urban renewal – Conservation – Principles of Landscape design
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    REFERENCES
    1. Francis D.K. Ching, “Architecture: Form, Space and Order”, VNR, N.Y., 1999.
    2. Givoni B., “Man Climate and Architecture”, Applied Science, Barking ESSEX, 1982
    3. Edward D.Mills, “Planning and Architects Handbook”, Butterworth London, 1995.
    4. Gallian B.Arthur and Simon Eisner, “The Urban Pattern – City Planning and Design”,
    Affiliated Press Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 1995.
    5. Margaret Robert, “An Introduction to Town Planning Techniques”, HutchinsoLondon ,
    1990.
    17
    185665 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS IN ENGINEERING L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    UNIT I ENGINEERING ETHICS 9
    Senses of ‘Engineering Ethics’ – Variety of moral issues – Types of inquiry – Moral dilemmas –
    Moral Autonomy – Kohlberg’s theory – Gilligan’s theory – Consensus and Controversy –
    Professions and Professionalism – Professional Ideals and Virtues – Uses of Ethical Theories.
    UNIT II ENGINEERING AS SOCIAL EXPERIMENTATION 9
    Engineering as Experimentation – Engineers as responsible Experimenters – Research Ethics -
    Codes of Ethics – Industrial Standards - A Balanced Outlook on Law – The Challenger Case
    Study
    UNIT III ENGINEER’S RESPONSIBILITY FOR SAFETY 9
    Safety and Risk – Assessment of Safety and Risk – Risk Benefit Analysis – Reducing Risk –
    The Government Regulator’s Approach to Risk - Chernobyl Case Studies and Bhopal
    UNIT IV RESPONSIBILITIES AND RIGHTS 9
    Collegiality and Loyalty – Respect for Authority – Collective Bargaining – Confidentiality –
    Conflicts of Interest – Occupational Crime – Professional Rights – Employee Rights –
    Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) - Discrimination
    UNIT V GLOBAL ISSUES 9
    Multinational Corporations – Business Ethics - Environmental Ethics – Computer Ethics - Role
    in Technological Development – Weapons Development – Engineers as Managers – Consulting
    Engineers – Engineers as Expert Witnesses and Advisors – Honesty – Moral Leadership –
    Sample Code of Conduct
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Mike Martin and Roland Schinzinger, “Ethics in Engineering”, McGraw Hill, New York,
    2005.
    2. Charles E Harris, Michael S Pritchard and Michael J Rabins, “Engineering Ethics –
    Concepts and Cases”, Thompson Learning, 2000.
    REFERENCES
    1. Charles D Fleddermann, “Engineering Ethics”, Prentice Hall, New Mexico, 1999.
    2. John R Boatright, “Ethics and the Conduct of Business”, Pearson Education, 2003
    3. Edmund G Seebauer and Robert L Barry, “Fundamentals of Ethics for Scientists and
    Engineers”, Oxford University Press, 2001.
    4. Prof. (Col) P S Bajaj and Dr. Raj Agrawal, “Business Ethics – An Indian
    Perspective”, Biztantra, New Delhi, 2004.
    5. David Ermann and Michele S Shauf, “Computers, Ethics and Society”, Oxford
    University Press, (2003).
    18
    185666 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
    Introduction - Need for quality - Evolution of quality - Definition of quality - Dimensions of
    manufacturing and service quality - Basic concepts of TQM - Definition of TQM – TQM
    Framework - Contributions of Deming, Juran and Crosby – Barriers to TQM.
    UNIT II TQM PRINCIPLES 9
    Leadership – Strategic quality planning, Quality statements - Customer focus – Customer
    orientation, Customer satisfaction, Customer complaints, Customer retention - Employee
    involvement – Motivation, Empowerment, Team and Teamwork, Recognition and Reward,
    Performance appraisal - Continuous process improvement – PDSA cycle, 5s, Kaizen - Supplier
    partnership – Partnering, Supplier selection, Supplier Rating.
    UNIT III TQM TOOLS & TECHNIQUES I 9
    The seven traditional tools of quality – New management tools – Six-sigma: Concepts,
    methodology, applications to manufacturing, service sector including IT – Bench marking –
    Reason to bench mark, Bench marking process – FMEA – Stages, Types.
    UNIT IV TQM TOOLS & TECHNIQUES II 9
    Quality circles – Quality Function Deployment (QFD) – Taguchi quality loss function – TPM –
    Concepts, improvement needs – Cost of Quality – Performance measures.
    UNIT V QUALITY SYSTEMS 9
    Need for ISO 9000- ISO 9000-2000 Quality System – Elements, Documentation, Quality
    auditing- QS 9000 – ISO 14000 – Concepts, Requirements and Benefits – Case studies of TQM
    implementation in manufacturing and service sectors including IT.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOK
    1. Dale H.Besterfiled, et at., “Total Quality Management”, Pearson Education Asia,
    3rd Edition, Indian Reprint (2006).
    REFERENCES
    1. James R. Evans and William M. Lindsay, “The Management and Control of Quality”, 6th
    Edition, South-Western (Thomson Learning), 2005.
    2. Oakland, J.S., “TQM – Text with Cases”, Butterworth – Heinemann Ltd., Oxford, 3rd
    Edition, 2003.
    3. Suganthi,L and Anand Samuel, “Total Quality Management”, Prentice Hall (India) Pvt.
    Ltd.,2006.
    4. Janakiraman, B and Gopal, R.K, “Total Quality Management – Text and Cases”,
    Prentice Hall (India) Pvt. Ltd., 2006.
    19
    185667 FUNDAMENTALS OF NANOSCIENCE L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION 10
    Nanoscale Science and Technology- Implications for Physics, Chemistry, Biology and
    Engineering-Classifications of nanostructured materials- nano particles- quantum dots,
    nanowires-ultra-thinfilms-multilayered materials. Length Scales involved and effect on
    properties: Mechanical, Electronic, Optical, Magnetic and Thermal properties. Introduction to
    properties and motivation for study (qualitative only).
    UNIT II PREPARATION METHODS 10
    Bottom-up Synthesis-Top-down Approach: Precipitation, Mechanical Milling, Colloidal routes,
    Self-assembly, Vapour phase deposition, MOCVD, Sputtering, Evaporation, Molecular Beam
    Epitaxy, Atomic Layer Epitaxy, MOMBE.
    UNIT III PATTERNING AND LITHOGRAPHY FOR NANOSCALE DEVICES 5
    Introduction to optical/UV electron beam and X-ray Lithography systems and processes, Wet
    etching, dry (Plasma /reactive ion) etching, Etch resists-dip pen lithography
    UNIT IV PREPARATION ENVIRONMENTS 10
    Clean rooms: specifications and design, air and water purity, requirements for particular
    processes, Vibration free environments: Services and facilities required. Working practices,
    sample cleaning, Chemical purification, chemical and biological contamination, Safety issues,
    flammable and toxic hazards, biohazards.
    UNIT V CHARECTERISATION TECHNIQUES 10
    X-ray diffraction technique, Scanning Electron Microscopy - environmental techniques,
    Transmission Electron Microscopy including high-resolution imaging, Surface Analysis
    techniques- AFM, SPM, STM, SNOM, ESCA, SIMS-Nanoindentation
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. A.S. Edelstein and R.C. Cammearata, eds., “Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties and
    Applications”, Institute of Physics Publishing, Bristol and Philadelphia, 1996.
    2. N John Dinardo, “Nanoscale charecterisation of surfaces & Interfaces”, 2nd edition,
    Weinheim Cambridge, Wiley-VCH, 2000
    REFERENCES
    1. G Timp (Editor), “Nanotechnology”, AIP press/Springer, 1999.
    2. Akhlesh Lakhtakia (Editor), “The Hand Book of Nano Technology, Nanometer Structure,
    Theory, Modeling and Simulations”. Prentice-Hall of India (P) Ltd, New Delhi, 2007.
    20
    185668 INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS (IPR) L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    UNIT I 5
    Introduction – Invention and Creativity – Intellectual Property (IP) – Importance – Protection of
    IPR – Basic types of property (i. Movable Property ii. Immovable Property and iii. Intellectual
    Property).
    UNIT II 10
    IP – Patents – Copyrights and related rights – Trade Marks and rights arising from Trademark
    registration – Definitions – Industrial Designs and Integrated circuits – Protection of
    Geographical Indications at national and International levels – Application Procedures.
    UNIT III 10
    International convention relating to Intellectual Property – Establishment of WIPO – Mission and
    Activities – History – General Agreement on Trade and Tariff (GATT).
    UNIT IV 10
    Indian Position Vs WTO and Strategies – Indian IPR legislations – commitments to WTO-Patent
    Ordinance and the Bill – Draft of a national Intellectual Property Policy – Present against unfair
    competition.
    UNIT V 10
    Case Studies on – Patents (Basumati rice, turmeric, Neem, etc.) – Copyright and related rights
    – Trade Marks – Industrial design and Integrated circuits – Geographic indications – Protection
    against unfair competition.
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Subbaram N.R. “ Handbook of Indian Patent Law and Practice “, S. Viswanathan
    (Printers and Publishers) Pvt. Ltd., 1998.
    REFERENCES
    1. Eli Whitney, United States Patent Number : 72X, Cotton Gin, March 14, 1794.
    2. Intellectual Property Today : Volume 8, No. 5, May 2001, [www.iptoday.com].
    3. Using the Internet for non-patent prior art searches, Derwent IP Matters, July 2000.
    [Error 404 - Not Found - IP & Science - Thomson Reuters.
    21
    185669 INDIAN CONSTITUTION AND SOCIETY L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    UNIT I 9
    Historical Background – Constituent Assembly of India – Philosophical foundations of the Indian
    Constitution – Preamble – Fundamental Rights – Directive Principles of State Policy –
    Fundamental Duties – Citizenship – Constitutional Remedies for citizens.
    UNIT II 9
    Union Government – Structures of the Union Government and Functions – President – Vice
    President – Prime Minister – Cabinet – Parliament – Supreme Court of India – Judicial Review.
    UNIT III 9
    State Government – Structure and Functions – Governor – Chief Minister – Cabinet –
    State Legislature – Judicial System in States – High Courts and other Subordinate Courts.
    UNIT IV 9
    Indian Federal System – Center – State Relations – President’s Rule – Constitutional
    Amendments – Constitutional Functionaries - Assessment of working of the Parliamentary
    System in India.
    UNIT V 9
    Society : Nature, Meaning and definition; Indian Social Structure; Castle, Religion, Language in
    India; Constitutional Remedies for citizens – Political Parties and Pressure Groups; Right of
    Women, Children and Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes and other Weaker Sections.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Durga Das Basu, “ Introduction to the Constitution of India “, Prentice Hall of India,
    New Delhi.
    2. R.C.Agarwal, “ (1997) Indian Political System “, S.Chand and Company, New Delhi.
    3. Maciver and Page, “ Society: An Introduction Analysis “, Mac Milan India Ltd.,
    New Delhi.
    4. K.L.Sharma, “ (1997) Social Stratification in India: Issues and Themes “, Jawaharlal
    Nehru University, New Delhi.
    REFERENCES
    1. Sharma, Brij Kishore, “ Introduction to the Constitution of India:, Prentice Hall of India,
    New Delhi.
    2. U.R.Gahai, “ (1998) Indian Political System “, New Academic Publishing House,
    Jalaendhar.
    3. R.N. Sharma, “ Indian Social Problems “, Media Promoters and Publishers Pvt. Ltd.
    4. Yogendra Singh, “ (1997) Social Stratification and Charge in India “, Manohar,
    New Delhi.
    1
    AFFILIATED INSTITUTIONS
    ANNA UNIVERSITY OF TECHNOLOGY CHENNAI :: CHENNAI 600 113
    REGULATIONS 2010
    CURRICULA AND SYLLABI FOR VII SEMESTER
    B.E. CIVIL ENGINEERING
    SEMESTER VII
    Code No. Course Title L T P C
    THEORY
    101701 Design of RC and Brick Masonry Structures 3 1 0 4
    101702 Estimation and Quantity Surveying 3 0 0 3
    101703 Basics of Dynamics and Aseismic Design 3 0 0 3
    101704 Prestressed Concrete Structures 3 0 0 3
    E2 Elective – II 3 0 0 3
    E3 Elective – III 3 0 0 3
    PRACTICAL
    101751
    Computer Aided Design and Drafting
    Laboratory
    0 0 4 2
    101752 Design Project 0 0 4 2
    TOTAL 18 1 8 23
    2
    LIST OF ELECTIVES for B.E. CIVIL ENGINEERING
    SEMESTER VII
    Code No. Course Title L T P C
    101765 Traffic Engineering Management 3 0 0 3
    101766 Housing Planning & Management 3 0 0 3
    101767 Ground Water Engineering 3 0 0 3
    101768 Management of Irrigation Systems 3 0 0 3
    101769 Coastal Zone Management 3 0 0 3
    101770 Water Resources Engineering 3 0 0 3
    101771 Pavement Engineering 3 0 0 3
    101772 Ground Improvement Techniques 3 0 0 3
    101773
    Introduction to Soil Dynamics and Machine
    Foundations
    3 0 0 3
    101774 Rock Engineering 3 0 0 3
    101775
    Environmental Impact Assessment of Civil
    Engineering Projects
    3 0 0 3
    101776 Industrial Waste Management 3 0 0 3
    101777 Air Pollution Management 3 0 0 3
    101778 Municipal Solid Waste and Management 3 0 0 3
    101779 Ecological Engineering 3 0 0 3
    185765 Contract Laws and Regulations 3 0 0 3
    SEMESTER VIII
    Code No. Course Title L T P C
    101865 Bridge Structures 3 0 0 3
    101866 Storage Structures 3 0 0 3
    101867 Design of Plate and Shell Structures 3 0 0 3
    101868 Tall Buildings 3 0 0 3
    101869 Prefabricated structures 3 0 0 3
    101870 Wind Engineering 3 0 0 3
    101871 Computer Aided Design of Structures 3 0 0 3
    101872 Industrial Structures 3 0 0 3
    101873 Smart Structures and smart Materials 3 0 0 3
    101874 Finite Element Techniques 3 0 0 3
    101875 Repair and Rehabilitation of Structures 3 0 0 3
    3
    101701 DESIGN OF REINFORCED CONCRETE & BRICK MASONRY STRUCTURES
    L T P C
    3 1 0 4
    OBJECTIVE:
    This course covers the design of Reinforced Concrete Structures such as Retaining Wall, Water
    Tanks, Staircases, Flat slabs and Principles of design pertaining to Box culverts, Mat foundation
    and Bridges. At the end of the course student has a comprehensive design knowledge related
    to structures, systems that are likely to be encountered in professional practice.
    UNIT I RETAINING WALLS 12
    Design of cantilever and counter fort retaining walls
    UNIT II WATER TANKS 12
    Underground rectangular tanks – Domes – Overhead circular and rectangular tanks – Design of
    staging and foundations
    UNIT III SELECTED TOPICS 12
    Design of staircases (ordinary and doglegged) – Design of flat slabs – Design of Reinforced
    concrete walls – Principles of design of mat foundation, box culvert and road bridges
    UNIT IV YIELD LINE THEORY 12
    Application of virtual work method to square, rectangular, circular and triangular slabs
    UNIT V BRICK MASONRY 12
    Introduction, Classification of walls, Lateral supports and stability, effective height of wall and
    columns, effective length of walls, design loads, load dispersion, permissible stresses, design of
    axially and eccentrically loaded brick walls
    TUTORIAL: 15 TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Krishna Raju, N., “Design of RC Structures”, CBS Publishers and Distributors, Delhi,
    2006
    2. Dayaratnam, P., “Brick and Reinforced Brick Structures”, Oxford & IBH Publishing
    House, 1997
    3. Varghese, P.C., “Limit State Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures ”Prentice hall of
    India Pvt Ltd New Delhi, 2007.
    REFERENCES
    1. Mallick, D.K. and Gupta A.P., “Reinforced Concrete”, Oxford and IBH Publishing
    Company
    2. Syal, I.C. and Goel, A.K., “Reinforced Concrete Structures”, A.H. Wheelers & Co. Pvt.
    Ltd., 1994
    3. Ram Chandra.N. and Virendra Gehlot, “Limit State Design”, Standard Book House.2004.
    4
    101702 ESTIMATION AND QUANTITY SURVEYING L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE:
    This subject covers the various aspects of estimating of quantities of items of works involved in
    buildings, water supply and sanitary works, road works and irrigation works. This also covers
    the rate analysis, valuation of properties and preparation of reports for estimation of various
    items. At the end of this course the student shall be able to estimate the material quantities,
    prepare a bill of quantities, make specifications and prepare tender documents. Student should
    also be able to prepare value estimates.
    UNIT I ESTIMATE OF BUILDINGS 11
    Load bearing and framed structures – Calculation of quantities of brick work, RCC, PCC,
    Plastering, white washing, colour washing and painting / varnishing for shops, rooms, residential
    building with flat and pitched roof – Various types of arches – Calculation of brick work and RCC
    works in arches – Estimate of joineries for panelled and glazed doors, windows, ventilators,
    handrails etc.
    UNIT II ESTIMATE OF OTHER STRUCTURES 10
    Estimating of septic tank, soak pit – sanitary and water supply installations – water supply pipe
    line – sewer line – tube well – open well – estimate of bituminous and cement concrete roads –
    estimate of retaining walls – culverts – estimating of irrigation works – aqueduct, syphon, fall.
    UNIT III SPECIFICATION AND TENDERS 8
    Data – Schedule of rates – Analysis of rates – Specifications – sources – Detailed and general
    specifications – Tenders – Contracts – Types of contracts – Arbitration and legal requirements.
    UNIT IV VALUATION 8
    Necessity – Basics of value engineering – Capitalised value – Depreciation – Escalation – Value
    of building – Calculation of Standard rent – Mortgage – Lease
    UNIT V REPORT PREPARATION 8
    Principles for report preparation – report on estimate of residential building – Culvert – Roads –
    Water supply and sanitary installations – Tube wells – Open wells.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Dutta, B.N., “Estimating and Costing in Civil Engineering”, UBS Publishers & Distributors
    Pvt. Ltd., 2003
    2. Kohli, D.D and Kohli, R.C., “A Text Book of Estimating and Costing (Civil)”, S.Chand &
    Company Ltd., 2004
    REFERENCES
    1. PWD Data Book.
    5
    101703 BASICS OF DYNAMICS AND ASEISMIC DESIGN L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE:
    The main objective of this course is to introduce to the student the phenomena of earthquakes,
    the process, measurements and the factors that affect the design of structures in seismic areas.
    This objective is achieved through imparting rudiments of theory of vibrations necessary to
    understand and analyse the dynamic forces caused by earthquakes and structures. Further, the
    student is also taught the codal provisions as well as the aseismic design methodology.
    UNIT I THEORY OF VIBRATIONS 9
    Concept of inertia and damping – Types of Damping – Difference between static forces and
    dynamic excitation – Degrees of freedom – SDOF idealisation – Equations of motion of SDOF
    system for mass as well as base excitation – Free vibration of SDOF system – Response to
    harmonic excitation – Impulse and response to unit impulse – Duhamel integral
    UNIT II MULTIPLE DEGREE OF FREEDOM SYSTEM 9
    Two degree of freedom system – Normal modes of vibration – Natural frequencies - Mode
    shapes - Introduction to MDOF systems – Decoupling of equations of motion – Concept of
    mode superposition (No derivations).
    UNIT III ELEMENTS OF SEISMOLOGY 9
    Causes of Earthquake – Geological faults – Tectonic plate theory – Elastic rebound – Epicentre
    – Hypocentre – Primary, shear and Raleigh waves – Seismogram – Magnitude and intensity of
    earthquakes – Magnitude and Intensity scales – Spectral Acceleration - Information on some
    disastrous earthquakes
    UNIT IV RESPONSE OF STRUCTURES TO EARTHQUAKE 9
    Response and design spectra – Design earthquake – concept of peak acceleration – Site
    specific response spectrum – Effect of soil properties and damping – Liquefaction of soils –
    Importance of ductility – Methods of introducing ductility into RC structures.
    UNIT V DESIGN METHODOLOGY 9
    IS 1893, IS 13920 and IS 4326 – Codal provisions – Design as per the codes – Base isolation
    techniques – Vibration control measures – Important points in mitigating effects of earthquake
    on structures.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Chopra, A.K., “Dynamics of Structures – Theory and Applications to Earthquake
    Engineering”, Second Edition, Pearson Education, 2003.
    REFERENCES
    1. Biggs, J.M., “Introduction to Structural Dynamics”, McGraw–Hill Book Co., N.Y., 1964
    2. Dowrick, D.J., “Earthquake Resistant Design”, John Wiley & Sons, London, 1977
    3. Paz, M., “Structural Dynamics – Theory & Computation”, CSB Publishers & Distributors,
    Shahdara, Delhi, 1985
    4. NPEEE Publications.
    6
    101704 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE STRUCTURE L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of this course the student shall have a knowledge of methods of prestressing,
    advantages of prestressing concrete, the losses involved and the design methods for
    prestressed concrete elements under codal provisions.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION – THEORY AND BEHAVIOUR 9
    Basic concepts – Advantages – Materials required – Systems and methods of prestressing –
    Analysis of sections – Stress concept – Strength concept – Load balancing concept – Effect of
    loading on the tensile stresses in tendons – Effect of tendon profile on deflections – Factors
    influencing deflections – Calculation of deflections – Short term and long term deflections -
    Losses of prestress – Estimation of crack width
    UNIT II DESIGN CONCEPTS 9
    Flexural strength – Simplified procedures as per codes – strain compatibility method – Basic
    concepts in selection of cross section for bending – stress distribution in end block, Design of
    anchorage zone reinforcement – Limit state design criteria – Partial prestressing – Applications.
    UNIT III CIRCULAR PRESTRESSING 9
    Design of prestressed concrete tanks – Pipes
    UNIT IV COMPOSITE CONSTRUCTION 9
    Analysis for stresses – Estimate for deflections – Flexural and shear strength of composite
    members
    UNIT V PRE-STRESSED CONCRETE BRIDGES 9
    General aspects – pretensioned prestressed bridge decks – Post tensioned prestressed bridge
    decks – Principles of design only.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Krishna Raju N., Prestressed concrete, Tata McGraw Hill Company, New Delhi 1998
    2. Mallic S.K. and Gupta A.P., Prestressed concrete, Oxford and IBH publishing Co. Pvt.
    Ltd. 1997.
    3. Rajagopalan, N, “Prestressed Concrete”, Alpha Science, 2002
    REFERENCES
    1. Ramaswamy G.S., Modern prestressed concrete design, Arnold Heinimen, New Delhi,
    1990
    2. Lin T.Y. Design of prestressed concrete structures, Asia Publishing House, Bombay
    1995.
    3. David A.Sheppard, William R. and Philips, Plant Cast precast and prestressed concrete
    – A design guide, McGraw Hill, New Delhi 1992.
    7
    101751 COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN & DRAFTING LABORATORY L T P C
    0 0 4 2
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of the course the student acquires hands on experience in design and preparation of
    structural drawings for concrete / steel structures normally encountered in Civil Engineering
    practice.
    1. Design and drawing of RCC cantilever and counterfort type retaining walls with
    reinforcement details
    2. Design of solid slab and RCC Tee beam bridges for IRC loading and reinforcement
    details
    3. Design and drafting of Intz type water tank, Detailing of circular and rectangular water
    tanks
    4. Design of plate girder bridge – Twin Girder deck type railway bridge – Truss Girder
    bridges – Detailed Drawings including connections
    TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Krishna Raju, “Structural Design & Drawing (Concrete & Steel)”, CBS Publishers 2004.
    2. Punmia, B.C., Ashok Kumar Jain, Arun Kumar Jain, “Design of steel structures”,
    Lakshmi publications Pvt. Ltd 2003.
    REFERENCES
    1. Krishnamurthy, D., “Structural Design & Drawing – Vol. II”, CBS Publishers &
    Distributors, Delhi 1992.
    2. Krishnamurthy, D., “Structural Design & Drawing – Vol. III Steel Structures”, CBS
    Publishers & Distributors, New Delhi 1992.
    EXAMINATION DURATION 4 HOURS
    LIST OF EQUIPMENTS
    1. 1. Models of Structures - 1 each.
    2. Computers Pentium IV - 30 Nos.
    3. Analysis and Design Software
    - Minimum 5 user License - 1 No.
    4. Auto CAD Software
    - Multi user License - 1 No.
    8
    101752 DESIGN PROJECT L T P C
    0 0 4 2
    OBJECTIVE
    The objective of this course is to impart and improve the design capability of the student. This
    course conceives purely a design problem in any one of the disciplines of Civil Engineering;
    e.g., Design of an RC structure, Design of a waste water treatment plant, Design of a foundation
    system, Design of traffic intersection etc. The design problem can be allotted to either an
    individual student or a group of students comprising of not more than four. At the end of the
    course the group should submit a complete report on the design problem consisting of the data
    given, the design calculations, specifications if any and complete set of drawings which follow
    the design.
    TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
    EVALUATION PROCEDURE
    The method of evaluation will be as follows:
    1. Internal Marks : 20 marks
    (Decided by conducting 3 reviews by the guide appointed by the
    Institution)
    2. Evaluation of Project Report : 30 marks
    (Evaluated by the external examiner appointed the University).
    Every student belonging to the same group gets the same mark
    3. Viva voce examination : 50 marks
    (Evaluated by the internal examiner appointed by the HOD with the
    approval of HOI, external examiner appointed by the University and
    Guide of the course – with equal Weightage)
    Total: 100 marks
    9
    101765 TRAFFIC ENGINEERING AND MANAGEMENT L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    The students acquire comprehensive knowledge of traffic surveys and studies such as ‘Volume
    Count’, ‘Speed and delay’, ‘Origin and destination’, ‘Parking’, ‘Pedestrian’ and ‘Accident
    surveys’. They achieve knowledge on design of ‘at grade’ and ‘grade separated’ intersections.
    They also become familiar with various traffic control and traffic management measures.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
    Significance and scope, Characteristics of Vehicles and Road Users, Skid Resistance and
    Braking Efficiency (Problems), Components of Traffic Engineering- Road, Traffic and Land Use
    Characteristics
    UNIT II TRAFFIC SURVEYS AND ANALYSIS 9
    Surveys and Analysis - Volume, Capacity, Speed and Delays, Origin and Destination, Parking,
    Pedestrian Studies, Accident Studies and Safety Level of Services- Basic principles of Traffic
    Flow.
    UNIT III TRAFFIC CONTROL 9
    Traffic signs, Road markings, Design of Traffic signals and Signal co-ordination (Problems),
    Traffic control aids and Street furniture, Street Lighting, Computer applications in Signal design
    UNIT IV GEOMETRIC DESIGN OF INTERSECTIONS 9
    Conflicts at Intersections, Classification of ‘At Grade Intersections, - Channallised Intersections
    - Principles of Intersection Design, Elements of Intersection Design, Rotary design, Grade
    Separation and interchanges - Design principles.
    UNIT V TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT 9
    Traffic Management- Transportation System Management (TSM) - Travel Demand
    Management (TDM), Traffic Forecasting techniques, Restrictions on turning movements, Oneway
    Streets, Traffic Segregation, Traffic Calming, Tidal flow operations, Exclusive Bus Lanes,
    Introduction to Intelligent Transportation System (ITS).
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Kadiyali L R, Traffic Engineering and Transport Planning, Khanna Technical
    Publications, Delhi, 2000.
    2. Khanna K and Justo C E G, Highway Engineering, Khanna Publishers, Roorkee, 2001.
    REFERENCES
    1. Indian Roads Congress (IRC) specifications: Guidelines and special publications on
    Traffic Planning and Management
    2. Guidelines of Ministry of Road Transport and Highways, Government of India.
    3. Subhash C.Saxena, A Course in Traffic Planning and Design, Dhanpat Rai Publications,
    New Delhi, 1989.
    4. Transportation Engineering – An Introduction, C.Jotin Khisty, B.Kent Lall, Prentice Hall
    of India Pvt Ltd, 2006.
    10
    101766 HOUSING PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    The objective of the course is to train the students to have a comprehensive knowledge of
    planning, design, evaluation, construction and financing of housing projects. The course focuses
    on cost effective construction materials and methods. Emphasis has also been given on the
    principles of sustainable housing policies and programmes.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO HOUSING 9
    Definition of Basic Terms – House, Home, Household, Apartments, Multi storeyed Buildings,
    Special Buildings, Objectives and Strategies of National Housing Policies, Principle of
    Sustainable Housing, Housing Laws at State level, Bye-laws at Urban and Rural Local Bodies –
    levels - Development Control Regulations, Institutions for Housing at National, State and Local
    levels
    UNIT II HOUSING PROGRAMMES 9
    Basic Concepts, Contents and Standards for Housing Programmes - Sites and Services,
    Neighborhoods, Open Development Plots, Apartments, Rental Housing, Co-operative Housing,
    Slum Housing Programmes, Role of Public, Private and Non-Government Organizations
    UNIT III PLANNING AND DESIGN OF HOUSING PROJECTS 9
    Formulation of Housing Projects – Site Analysis, Layout Design, Design of Housing Units
    (Design Problems)
    UNIT IV CONSTRUCTION TECHNIQUES AND COST-EFFECTIVE MATERIALS 9
    New Constructions Techniques – Cost Effective Modern Construction Materials, Building
    Centers – Concept, Functions and Performance Evaluation
    UNIT V HOUSING FINANCE AND PROJECT APPRAISAL 9
    Appraisal of Housing Projects – Housing Finance, Cost Recovery – Cash Flow Analysis,
    Subsidy and Cross Subsidy, Pricing o f Housing Units, Rents, Recovery Pattern (Problems).
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Meera Mehta and Dinesh Mehta, Metropolitan Housing Markets, Sage Publications Pvt.
    Ltd., New Delhi, 1999.
    2. Francis Cherunilam and Odeyar D Heggade, Housing in India, Himalaya Publishing
    House, Bombay, 1997.
    REFERENCES
    1. Development Control Rules for Chennai Metropolitan Area, CMA, Chennai, 2002.
    2. UNCHS, National Experiences with Shelter Delivery for the Poorest Groups, UNCHS
    (Habitat), Nairobi, 1994.
    3. National Housing Policy, 1994, Government of India.
    11
    101767 GROUND WATER ENGINEERING L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    To understand the distribution of ground water, evaluation of aquifer parameters, solving ground
    water equations. Ground water quality and development of ground water methods are dealt.
    UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF GROUND WATER 9
    Introduction – Characteristic of Ground water – Distribution of water - ground water column –
    Permeability - Darcy's Law - Types of aquifers - Hydrogeological Cycle – water level
    fluctuations.
    UNIT II HYDRAULICS OF FLOW 9
    Storage coefficient - Specific field - Heterogeneity and Anisotrophy -Transmissivity - Governing
    equations of ground water flow - Steady state flow - Dupuit Forchheimer assumptions - Velocity
    potential - Flow nets
    UNIT III ESTIMATION OF PARAMETERS 9
    Transmissivity and Storativity – Pumping test - Unsteady state flow - Thiess method - Jacob
    method - Image well theory – Effect of partial penetrations of wells - Collectors wells.
    UNIT IV GROUND WATER DEVELOPMENT 9
    Infiltration gallery - Conjunctive use - Artificial recharge Rainwater harvesting - Safe yield -Yield
    test – Geophysical methods – Selection of pumps.
    UNIT V WATER QUALITY 9
    Ground water chemistry - Origin, movement and quality - Water quality standards - Saltwater
    intrusion –Environmental concern
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Raghunath H.M., “Ground Water Hydrology”, Wiley Eastern Ltd., 2000.
    2. Todd D.K., “Ground Water Hydrology”, John Wiley and Sons, 2000.
    REFERENCE
    1. C Walton, “Ground Water Resource Evaluation”, McGraw-Hill Publications.
    12
    101768 MANAGEMENT OF IRRIGATION SYSTEMS L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of the semester, the student shall have a clear concept of irrigation water
    management practices of the past, present and future. He/she shall also be able to appreciate
    the importance due and duly given to stake holders.
    UNIT I IRRIGATION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 9
    Irrigation systems – Supply and demand of water – Cropping pattern – Crop rotation – Crop
    diversification – Estimation of total and peak crop water requirements – Effective and
    dependable rainfall – Irrigation efficiencies.
    UNIT II IRRIGATION SCHEDULING 8
    Time of irrigation – Critical stages of water need of crops – Criteria for scheduling irrigation –
    Frequency and interval of irrigation.
    UNIT III MANAGEMENT 9
    Structural and non-structural strategies in water use and management – Conjunctive use of
    surface and ground waters – Quality of irrigation water.
    UNIT IV OPERATION 9
    Operational plans – Main canals, laterals and field channels – Water control and regulating
    structures – Performance indicators – Case study
    UNIT V INVOLVEMENT OF STAKE HOLDERS 10
    Farmer’s participation in System operation – Water user’s associations – Farmer councils –
    Changing paradigms on irrigation management – Participatory irrigation management
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Dilip Kumar Majumdar, “Irrigation Water Management – Principles and Practice”,
    Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2000
    2. Hand book on Irrigation Water Requirement, R.T. Gandhi, et. al., Water Management
    Division, Department of Agriculture, Ministry of Agriculture, New Delhi
    REFERENCES
    1. Hand Book on Irrigation System Operation Practices, Water Resources Management
    and Training Project, Technical report No. 33, CWC, New Delhi, 1990
    2. Maloney, C. and Raju, K.V., “Managing Irrigation Together”, Practice and Policy in India,
    Stage Publication, New Delhi, India, 1994.
    13
    101769 COASTAL ZONE MANAGEMENT L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of the semester, the student shall be able to understand the coastal processes,
    coastal dynamics, impacts of structures like docks, harbours and quays leading to simple
    management perspectives along the coastal zone.
    UNIT I COASTAL ZONE 9
    Coastal zone – Coastal zone regulations – Beach profile – Surf zone – Off shore – Coastal
    waters – Estuaries – Wet lands and Lagoons – Living resources – Non living resources.
    UNIT II WAVE DYNAMICS 10
    Wave classification – Airy’s Linear Wave theory – Deep water waves – Shallow water waves –
    Wave pressure – Wave energy – Wave Decay – Reflection, Refraction and Diffraction of waves
    – Breaking of waves – Wave force on structures – Vertical – Sloping and stepped barriers –
    Force on piles.
    UNIT III WAVE FORECASTING AND TIDES 9
    Need for forecasting - SMB and PNJ methods of wave forecasting – Classification of tides –
    Darwin’s equilibrium theory of tides – Effects on structures – seiches, Surges and Tsunamis.
    UNIT IV COASTAL PROCESSES 8
    Erosion and depositional shore features – Methods of protection – Littoral currents – Coastal
    aquifers – Sea water intrusion – Impact of sewage disposal in seas.
    UNIT V HARBOURS 9
    Structures near coast – Selection of site – Types and selection of break waters – Need and
    mode of dredging – Selection of dredgers – Effect of Mangalore forest.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Richard Sylvester, “Coastal Engineering, Volume I and II”, Elseiner Scientific Publishing
    Co., 1999
    2. Quinn, A.D., “Design & Construction of Ports and Marine Structures”, McGraw-Hill Book
    Co., 1999
    REFERENCES
    1. Ed. A.T. Ippen, “Coastline Hydrodynamics”, McGraw-Hill Inc., New York, 1993
    2. Dwivedi, S.N., Natarajan, R and Ramachandran, S., “Coastal Zone Management in
    Tamilnadu”.
    14
    101770 WATER RESOURCES ENGINEERING L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    The student is exposed to the different phases in Water Resources viz planning, collection of
    relevant data on water resources and also on National Water Policy. Reservoir planning,
    management and economic analysis aspects are covered in detail.
    UNIT I GENERAL 9
    Water resources survey – Water resources of India and Tamilnadu – Description of water
    resources planning – Economics of water resources planning, physical and socio economic data
    – National Water Policy – Collection of meteorological and hydrological data for water resources
    development.
    UNIT II NETWORK DESIGN 9
    Hydrologic measurements – Analysis of hydrologic data – Hydrologic station network – Station
    network design – Statistical techniques in network design.
    UNIT III WATER RESOURCE NEEDS 9
    Consumptive and non-consumptive water use - Estimation of water requirements for irrigation,
    for drinking and navigation - Water characteristics and quality – Scope and aims of master plan
    - Concept of basin as a unit for development - Water budget and development plan.
    UNIT IV RESERVOIR PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT 9
    Reservoir - Single and multipurpose – Multi objective - Fixation of Storage capacity -Strategies
    for reservoir operation - Sedimentation of reservoirs - Design flood-levees and flood walls -
    Channel improvement.
    UNIT V ECONOMIC ANALYSIS 9
    Estimation of cost and Evaluation of Benefits - Discount rate - Discounting factors - Discounting
    techniques – Computer Applications.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Linsley R.K. and Franzini J.B, “Water Resources Engineering”, McGraw-Hill Inc, 2000.
    2. Douglas J.L. and Lee R.R., “Economics of Water Resources Planning”, Tata McGraw-
    Hill Inc. 2000.
    3. Duggal, K.N. and Soni, J.P., “Elements of Water Resources Engineering”, New Age
    International Publishers
    REFERENCES
    1. Chaturvedi M.C., “Water Resources Systems Planning and Management”, Tata
    McGraw-Hill Inc., New Delhi, 1997.
    2. Goodman Alvin S., “Principles of Water Resources Planning”, Prentice-Hall, 1984.
    3. Maass et al. Design of Water Resources Systems, Macmillan, 1968.
    15
    101771 PAVEMENT ENGINEERING L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    Student gains knowledge on various IRC guidelines for designing flexible and rigid pavements.
    Further, he/she will be in a position to assess quality and serviceability conditions of roads.
    UNIT I TYPE OF PAVEMENT AND STRESS DISTRIBUTION ON LAYERED SYSTEM
    9
    Introduction - Pavement as layered structure - Pavement types - flexible and rigid -Stress and
    deflections in pavements under repeated loading
    UNIT II DESIGN OF FLEXIBLE PAVEMENTS 9
    Flexible pavement design - Empirical - Semi empirical and theoretical Methods - Design
    procedure as per latest IRC guidelines – Design and specification of rural roads
    UNIT III DESIGN OF RIGID PAVEMENTS 9
    Cement concrete pavements - Modified Westergard approach - Design procedure as per latest
    IRC guidelines - Joints in rigid pavements - Concrete roads and their scope in India.
    UNIT IV PERFORMANCE EVALUATION AND MAINTENANCE 9
    Pavement Evaluation [Condition and evaluation surveys (Surface Appearance, Cracks, Patches
    And Pot Holes, Undulations, Ravelling, Roughness, Skid Resistance), Structural Evaluation By
    Deflection Measurements, Present Serviceability Index]
    Pavement maintenance. [IRC Recommendations Only]
    UNIT V STABILISATION OF PAVEMENTS 9
    Stabilisation with special reference to highway pavements - Choice of stabilisers -Testing and
    field control –Stabilisation for rural roads in India -use of Geosynthetics (geotextiles & geogrids)
    in roads.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Kadiyali, L.R., “Principles and Practice of Highway Engineering”, Khanna tech.
    Publications, New Delhi, 1989.
    2. Wright, P.H., “Highway Engineers”, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 1996
    3. Design and Specification of Rural Roads (Manual), Ministry of rural roads, Government
    of India, New Delhi, 2001
    REFERENCES
    1. Yoder R.J and Witczak M.W., “Principles of Pavement Design”, John Wiley, 1975.
    2. Guidelines for the Design of Flexible Pavements, IRC:37 - 2001, The Indian roads
    Congress, New Delhi.
    3. Guideline for the Design of Rigid Pavements for Highways, IRC:58-1998, The Indian
    Roads Congress, New Delh.
    16
    101772 GROUND IMPROVEMENT TECHNIQUES L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    After this course, the student is expected to identify basic deficiencies of various soil deposits
    and he/she be in a position to decide various ways and means of improving the soil and
    implementing techniques of improvement.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
    Role of ground improvement in foundation engineering - methods of ground improvement –
    Geotechnical problems in alluvial, laterite and black cotton soils -Selection of suitable ground
    improvement techniques based on soil condition.
    UNIT II DRAINAGE AND DEWATERING 9
    Drainage techniques - Well points - Vaccum and electroosmotic methods - Seepage analysis for
    two dimensional flow-fully and partially penetrating slots in homogenous deposits (Simple cases
    only).
    UNIT III INSITU TREATMENT OF COHESIONLESS AND COHESIVE SOILS 9
    Insitu densification of cohesionless and consolidation of cohesive soils -Dynamic compaction
    and consolidation - Vibrofloation - Sand pile compaction - Preloading with sand drains and fabric
    drains – Stone columns – Lime piles - Installation techniques only - relative merits of various
    methods and their limitations.
    UNIT IV EARTH REINFORCEMENT 9
    Concept of reinforcement - Types of reinforcement material - Applications of reinforced earth –
    use of Geotextiles for filtration, drainage and separation in road and other works.
    UNIT V GROUT TECHNIQUES 9
    Types of grouts - Grouting equipment and machinery - Injection methods - Grout monitoring –
    Stabilisation with cement, lime and chemicals - Stabilisation of expansive soils.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Koerner R.M., “Construction and Geotechnical Methods in Foundation Engineering”,
    McGraw-Hill, 1994.
    2. Purushothama Raj, P. “Ground Improvement Techniques”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing
    Company, New Delhi, 1995
    REFERENCES
    1. Moseley M.P., Ground Improvement Blockie Academic and Professional, Chapman and
    Hall, Glassgow, 1993.
    2. Jones J.E.P., Earth Reinforcement and Soil Structure, Butterworths, 1995.
    3. Koerner, R.M., “Design with Geosynthetics”, (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall, New Jersey,
    2002
    4. Jewell, R.A., “Soil Reinforcement with Geotextiles”, CIRIA special publication, London,
    1996
    5. Das, B.M., “Principles of Foundation Engineering”, Thomson Books / Cole, 2003.
    17
    101773 INTRODUCTION TO SOIL DYNAMICS AND MACHINE FOUNDATIONS
    L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of this program the, student is expected to assess the dynamic properties of soil and
    various design parameters required for the design of machine foundation as well as design of
    foundation for various reciprocating machines.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
    Vibration of elementary systems-vibratory motion-single degree freedom system-free and forced
    vibration with and without damping
    UNIT II WAVES AND WAVE PROPAGATION 9
    Wave propagation in an elastic homogeneous isotropic medium- Raleigh, shear and
    compression waves-waves in elastic half space
    UNIT III DYNAMIC PROPERTIES OF SOILS 9
    Elastic properties of soils-coefficient of elastic, uniform and non-uniform compression - sheareffect
    of vibration dissipative properties of soils-determination of dynamic properties of soilcodal
    provisions
    UNIT IV DESIGN PROCEDURES 9
    Design criteria -dynamic loads - simple design procedures for foundations under reciprocating
    machines - machines producing impact loads - rotary type machines
    UNIT V VIBRATION ISOLATION 9
    Vibration isolation technique-mechanical isolation-foundation isolation-isolation by locationisolation
    by barriers- active passive isolation tests.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. S.Prakesh & V.K Puri, Foundation for machines, McGraw-Hill 1993
    2. Srinivasulu, P & Vaidyanathan, Hand book of Machine Foundations, McGraw-Hill, 1996
    REFERENCES
    1. Swamisaran, “Soil Dynamics and Machine Foundations”, Galgotia Publications
    Pvt. Ltd., 1999
    2. Kramar S.L, “Geotechnical Earthquake Engineering”, Prentice Hall International series,
    Pearson Education (Singapore) Pvt. Ltd.
    3. Kameswara Rao, “Dynamics Soil Tests and Applications”, Wheeler Publishing, New
    Delhi, 2003
    4. Kameswara Rao, “Vibration Analysis and Foundation Dynamics”, Wheeler Publishing,
    New Delhi, 1998
    5. IS code of Practice for Design and Construction of Machine Foundations, McGraw-Hill,
    1996.
    6. Moore P.J., “Analysis and Design of Foundation for Vibration”, Oxford and IBH, 1995.
    18
    101774 ROCK ENGINEERING L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    Student gains the knowledge on the mechanics of rock and its applications in underground
    structures and rock slope stability analysis.
    UNIT I CLASSIFICATION AND INDEX PROPERTIES OF ROCKS 7
    Geological classification – Index properties of rock systems – Classification of rock masses for
    engineering purpose.
    UNIT II ROCK STRENGTH AND FAILURE CRITERIA 11
    Modes of rock failure – Strength of rock – Laboratory and field measurement of shear, tensile
    and compressive strength – Stress strain behaviour in compression – Mohr-coulomb failure
    criteria and empirical criteria for failure – Deformability of rock.
    UNIT III INITIAL STRESSES AND THEIR MEASUREMENTS 10
    Estimation of initial stresses in rocks – influence of joints and their orientation in distribution of
    stresses – technique for measurements of insitu stresses.
    UNIT IV APPLICATION OF ROCK MECHANICS IN ENGINEERING 9
    Simple engineering application – Underground openings – Rock slopes – Foundations and
    mining subsidence.
    UNIT V ROCK BOLTING 8
    Introduction – Rock bolt systems – rock bolt installation techniques – Testing of rock bolts –
    Choice of rock bolt based on rock mass condition.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Goodman P.E., “Introduction to Rock Mechanics”, John Wiley and Sons, 1999.
    2. Stillborg B., “Professional User Handbook for rock Bolting”, Tran Tech Publications,
    1996.
    REFERENCES
    1. Brow E.T., “Rock Characterisation Testing and Monitoring”, Pergaman Press, 1991.
    2. Arogyaswamy R.N.P., “Geotechnical Application in Civil Engineering”, Oxford and IBH,
    1991.
    3. Hock E. and Bray J., “Rock Slope Engineering, Institute of Mining and Metallurgy”, 1991.
    19
    101775 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING
    PROJECTS L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    This subject deals with the various impacts of infrastructure projects on the components of
    environment and method of assessing the impact and mitigating the same.
    The student is expected to know about the various impacts of development projects on
    environment and the mitigating measures.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION 8
    Impact of development projects under Civil Engineering on environment - Environmental Impact
    Assessment (EIA) - Environmental Impact Statement (EIS) – EIA capability and limitations –
    Legal provisions on EIA
    UNIT II METHODOLOGIES 9
    Methods of EIA –Check lists – Matrices – Networks – Cost-benefit analysis – Analysis of
    alternatives
    UNIT III PREDICTION AND ASSESSMENT 9
    Assessment of Impact on land, water and air, noise, social, cultural flora and fauna;
    Mathematical models; public participation – Rapid EIA
    UNIT IV ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN 9
    Plan for mitigation of adverse impact on environment – options for mitigation of impact on water,
    air and land, flora and fauna; Addressing the issues related to the Project Affected People – ISO
    14000
    UNIT V CASE STUDIES 10
    EIA for infrastructure projects – Bridges – Stadium – Highways – Dams – Multi-storey Buildings
    – Water Supply and Drainage Projects
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Canter, R.L., “Environmental Impact Assessment”, McGraw-Hill Inc., New Delhi, 1996.
    2. Shukla, S.K. and Srivastava, P.R., “Concepts in Environmental Impact Analysis”,
    Common Wealth Publishers, New Delhi, 1992.
    REFERENCES
    1. John G. Rau and David C Hooten (Ed)., “Environmental Impact Analysis Handbook”,
    McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1990.
    2. “Environmental Assessment Source book”, Vol. I, II & III. The World Bank, Washington,
    D.C., 1991.
    3. Judith Petts, “Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Vol. I & II”, Blackwell
    Science, 1999.
    20
    101776 INDUSTRIAL WASTE MANAGEMENT L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    This subject deals with the pollution from major industries and methods of controlling the same.
    The student is expected to know about the polluting potential of major industries in the country
    and the methods of controlling the same.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION 8
    Types of industries and industrial pollution – Characteristics of industrial wastes – Population
    equivalent – Bioassay studies – effects of industrial effluents on streams, sewer, land, sewage
    treatment plants and human health – Environmental legislations related to prevention and
    control of industrial effluents and hazardous wastes
    UNIT II CLEANER PRODUCTION 8
    Waste management Approach – Waste Audit – Volume and strength reduction – Material and
    process modifications – Recycle, reuse and byproduct recovery – Applications.
    UNIT III POLLUTION FROM MAJOR INDUSTRIES 9
    Sources, Characteristics, waste treatment flow sheets for selected industries such as Textiles,
    Tanneries, Pharmaceuticals, Electroplating industries, Dairy, Sugar, Paper, distilleries, Steel
    plants, Refineries, fertilizer, thermal power plants – Wastewater reclamation concepts
    UNIT IV TREATMENT TECHNOLOGIES 11
    Equalisation – Neutralisation – Removal of suspended and dissolved organic solids - Chemical
    oxidation – Adsorption - Removal of dissolved inorganics – Combined treatment of industrial
    and municipal wastes – Residue management – Dewatering - Disposal
    UNIT V HAZARDOUS WASTE MANAGEMENT 9
    Hazardous wastes - Physico chemical treatment – solidification – incineration – Secure land fills
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. M.N.Rao & A.K.Dutta, “Wastewater Treatment”, Oxford - IBH Publication, 1995.
    2. W .W. Eckenfelder Jr., “Industrial Water Pollution Control”, McGraw-Hill Book Company,
    New Delhi, 2000.
    REFERENCES
    1. T.T.Shen, “Industrial Pollution Prevention”, Springer, 1999.
    2. R.L.Stephenson and J.B.Blackburn, Jr., “Industrial Wastewater Systems Hand book”,
    Lewis Publisher, New Yark, 1998
    3. H.M.Freeman, “Industrial Pollution Prevention Hand Book”, McGraw-Hill Inc., New Delhi,
    1995.
    4. Bishop, P.L., “Pollution Prevention: Fundamental & Practice”, McGraw-Hill, 2000.
    21
    101777 AIR POLLUTION MANAGEMENT L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    This subject covers the sources, characteristics and effects of air and noise pollution and the
    methods of controlling the same. The student is expected to know about source inventory and
    control mechanism.
    UNIT I SOURCES AND EFFECTS OF AIR POLLUTANTS 9
    Classification of air pollutants – Particulates and gaseous pollutants – Sources of air pollution –
    Source inventory – Effects of air pollution on human beings, materials, vegetation, animals –
    global warming-ozone layer depletion, Sampling and Analysis – Basic Principles of Sampling –
    Source and ambient sampling – Analysis of pollutants – Principles.
    UNIT II DISPERSION OF POLLUTANTS 9
    Elements of atmosphere – Meteorological factors – Wind roses – Lapse rate - Atmospheric
    stability and turbulence – Plume rise – Dispersion of pollutants – Dispersion models –
    Applications.
    UNIT III AIR POLLUTION CONTROL 12
    Concepts of control – Principles and design of control measures – Particulates control by
    gravitational, centrifugal, filtration, scrubbing, electrostatic precipitation – Selection criteria for
    equipment - gaseous pollutant control by adsorption, absorption, condensation, combustion –
    Pollution control for specific major industries.
    UNIT IV AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT 8
    Air quality standards – Air quality monitoring – Preventive measures - Air pollution control efforts
    – Zoning – Town planning regulation of new industries – Legislation and enforcement –
    Environmental Impact Assessment and Air quality
    UNIT V NOISE POLLUTION 7
    Sources of noise pollution – Effects – Assessment - Standards – Control methods – Prevention
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Anjaneyulu, D., “Air Pollution and Control Technologies”, Allied Publishers, Mumbai,
    2002.
    2. Rao, C.S. Environmental Pollution Control Engineering, Wiley Eastern Ltd., New Delhi,
    1996.
    3. Rao M.N., and Rao H. V. N., Air Pollution Control, Tata-McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 1996.
    REFERENCES
    1. W.L.Heumann, Industrial Air Pollution Control Systems, McGraw-Hill, New Yark, 1997.
    2. Mahajan S.P., Pollution Control in Process Industries, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing
    Company, New Delhi, 1991.
    3. Peavy S.W., Rowe D.R. and Tchobanoglous G. Environmental Engineering, McGraw
    Hill, New Delhi, 1985.
    4. Garg, S.K., “Environmental Engineering Vol. II”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi
    5. Mahajan, S.P., “Pollution Control in Process Industries”, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi,
    1991.
    22
    101778 MUNICIPAL SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    This subject covers the various sources and characterisation of municipal solid wastes and the
    on-site/off-site processing of the same and the disposal methods. The student is expected to
    know about the various effects and disposal options for the municipal solid waste.
    UNIT I SOURCES AND TYPES OF MUNICIPAL SOLID WASTES 9
    Sources and types of solid wastes - Quantity – factors affecting generation of solid wastes;
    characteristics – methods of sampling and characterization; Effects of improper disposal of solid
    wastes – public health effects. Principle of solid waste management – social & economic
    aspects; Public awareness; Role of NGOs; Legislation.
    UNIT II ON-SITE STORAGE & PROCESSING 9
    On-site storage methods – materials used for containers – on-site segregation of solid wastes –
    public health & economic aspects of storage – options under Indian conditions – Critical
    Evaluation of Options.
    UNIT III COLLECTION AND TRANSFER 9
    Methods of Collection – types of vehicles – Manpower requirement – collection routes; transfer
    stations – selection of location, operation & maintenance; options under Indian conditions.
    UNIT IV OFF-SITE PROCESSING 9
    Processing techniques and Equipment; Resource recovery from solid wastes – composting,
    incineration, Pyrolysis - options under Indian conditions.
    UNIT V DISPOSAL 9
    Dumping of solid waste; sanitary land fills – site selection, design and operation of sanitary
    landfills – Leachate collection & treatment
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. George Tchobanoglous et.al., “Integrated Solid Waste Management”, McGraw-Hill
    Publishers, 1993.
    2. B.Bilitewski, G.HardHe, K.Marek, A.Weissbach, and H.Boeddicker, “Waste
    Management”, Springer, 1994.
    REFERENCES
    1. Manual on Municipal Solid Waste Management, CPHEEO, Ministry of Urban
    Development, Government of India, New Delhi, 2000
    2. R.E.Landreth and P.A.Rebers, “Municipal Solid Wastes – problems and Solutions”,
    Lewis Publishers, 1997.
    3. Bhide A.D. and Sundaresan, B.B., “Solid Waste Management in Developing Countries”,
    INSDOC, 1993.
    23
    101779 ECOLOGICAL ENGINEERING L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    This subject deals with the scope and applications of ecological principles for wastewater
    treatment and reuse. The student is expected to be aware of the various effects of
    industrialisation on ecology and ecological based waste purification methods.
    UNIT I PRINCIPLES AND CONCEPTS 9
    Scope and applications of Ecological Engineering – Development and evolution of ecosystems
    – principles and concepts pertaining to species, populations and community
    UNIT II ECOSYSTEM FUNCTIONS 10
    Energy flow and nutrient cycling – Food chain and food webs – biological magnification,
    diversity and stability, immature and mature systems. Primary productivity – Biochemical cycling
    of nitrogen, phosphorous, sulphur and carbon dioxide; Habitat ecology - Terrestrial, fresh water,
    estuarine and marine habitats.
    UNIT III ECOLOGICAL ENGINEERING METHODS 9
    Bio monitoring and its role in evaluation of aquatic ecosystem; Rehabilitation of ecosystems
    through ecological principles – step cropping, bio-wind screens, Wetlands, ponds, Root Zone
    Treatment for wastewater, Reuse of treated wastewater through ecological systems.
    UNIT IV ECOLOGICAL EFFECTS OF INDUSTRIALISATION 9
    Ecological effects of exploration, production, extraction, processing, manufacture & transport.
    UNIT V CASE STUDIES 8
    Case studies of integrated ecological engineering systems
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Odum, E.P., “Fundamental of Ecology”, W.B.Sauders, 1990.
    2. Kormondy, E.J., “Concepts of Ecology”, Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 1996
    REFERENCES
    1. Mitch, J.W. and Jorgensen, S.E., Ecological Engineering – An Introduction to
    Ecotechnology, John Wiley and Sons, 1996.
    2. Colinvaux, P., Ecology, John Wiley and Sons, 1996.
    3. Etnier, C & Guterstam, B., “Ecological Engineering for Wastewater Treatment”, 2nd
    Edition, Lewis Publications, London, 1996.
    24
    185765 CONTRACT LAWS AND REGULATIONS L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    UNIT I CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS 9
    Indian Contracts Act – Elements of Contracts – Types of Contracts – Features – Suitability –
    Design of Contract Documents – International Contract Document – Standard Contract
    Document – Law of Torts
    UNIT II TENDERS 10
    Prequalification – Bidding – Accepting – Evaluation of Tender from Technical, Contractual and
    Commercial Points of View – Contract Formation and Interpretation – Potential Contractual
    Problems – World Bank Procedures and Guidelines – Transparency in Tenders Act.
    UNIT III ARBITRATION 8
    Comparison of Actions and Laws – Agreements – Subject Matter – Violations – Appointment of
    Arbitrators – Conditions of Arbitration – Powers and Duties of Arbitrator – Rules of Evidence –
    Enforcement of Award – Costs
    UNIT IV LEGAL REQUIREMENTS 9
    Insurance and Bonding – Laws Governing Sale, Purchase and Use of Urban and Rural Land –
    Land Revenue Codes – Tax Laws – Income Tax, Sales Tax, Excise and Custom Duties and
    their Influence on Construction Costs – Legal Requirements for Planning – Property Law –
    Agency Law – Local Government Laws for Approval – Statutory Regulations
    UNIT V LABOUR REGULATIONS 9
    Social Security – Welfare Legislation – Laws relating to Wages, Bonus and Industrial Disputes,
    Labour Administration– Insurance and Safety Regulations – Workmen’s Compensation Act –
    Indian Factory Act – Tamil Nadu Factory Act – Child Labour Act - Other Labour Laws
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    REFERENCES
    1. Gajaria G.T., Laws Relating to Building and Engineering Contracts in India, M.M.Tripathi
    Private Ltd., Bombay, 1982
    2. Tamilnadu PWD Code, 1986
    3. Jimmie Hinze, Construction Contracts, Second Edition, McGraw Hill, 2001
    4. Joseph T. Bockrath, Contracts and the Legal Environment for Engineers and Architects,
    Sixth Edition, McGraw Hill, 2000.
    25
    101865 BRIDGE STRUCTURES L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of this course the student shall be able to choose appropriate bridge structure and
    design it for given site conditions.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
    Design of through type steel highway bridges for IRC loading - Design of stringers, cross girders
    and main girders - Design of deck type steel highway bridges for IRC loading - Design of main
    girders
    UNIT II STEEL BRIDGES 9
    Design of pratt type truss girder highway bridges - Design of top chord, bottom chord, web
    members - Effect of repeated loading - Design of plate girder railway bridges for railway loading
    - Wind effects - Design of web and flange plates - Vertical and horizontal stiffeners.
    UNIT III REINFORCED CONCRETE SLAB BRIDGES 9
    Design of solid slab bridges for IRC loading - Design of kerb - Design of tee beam bridges -
    Design of panel and cantilever for IRC loading
    UNIT IV REINFORCED CONCRETE GIRDER BRIDGES 9
    Design of tee beam - Courbon's theory - Pigeaud's curves - Design of balanced cantilever
    bridges - Deck slab - Main girder - Design of cantilever - Design of articulation.
    UNIT V PRESTRESSED CONCRETE BRIDGES 9
    Design of prestressed concrete bridges - Preliminary dimensions - Flexural and torsional
    parameters - Courbon's theory - Distribution coefficient by exact analysis - Design of girder
    section - Maximum and minimum prestressing forces - Eccentricity - Live load and dead load
    shear forces - cable zone in girder –Check for stresses at various sections - Check for diagonal
    tension - Diaphragms - End block - Short term and long term deflections.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Johnson Victor D., “Essentials of Bridge Engineering”, Oxford and IBH Publishing Co.,
    New Delhi, 1990.
    2. Rajagopalan, N.Bridge Superstructure, Alpha Science International, 2006
    REFERENCES
    1. Phatak D.R., “Bridge Engineering”, Satya Prakashan, New Delhi, 1990.
    2. Ponnuswamy S., “Bridge Engineering”, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 1996.
    26
    101866 STORAGE STRUCTURES L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    The main objective of this course is to impart the principles involved in designing structures
    which have to store different types of materials. The student at the end of the course shall be
    able to design concrete and steel material retaining structures.
    UNIT I STEEL WATER TANKS 12
    Design of rectangular riveted steel water tank – Tee covers – Plates – Stays –Longitudinal and
    transverse beams – Design of staging – Base plates – Foundation and anchor bolts – Design of
    pressed steel water tank – Design of stays – Joints – Design of hemispherical bottom water tank
    – side plates – Bottom plates – joints – Ring girder – Design of staging and foundation.
    UNIT II CONCRETE WATER TANKS 12
    Design of Circular tanks – Hinged and fixed at the base – IS method of calculating shear forces
    and moments – Hoop tension – Design of intze tank – Dome – Ring girders – Conical dome –
    Staging – Bracings – Raft foundation – Design of rectangular tanks – Approximate methods and
    IS methods – Design of under ground tanks – Design of base slab and side wall – Check for
    uplift.
    UNIT III STEEL BUNKERS AND SILOS 7
    Design of square bunker – Jansen’s and Airy’s theories – IS Codal provisions – Design of side
    plates – Stiffeners – Hooper – Longitudinal beams – Design of cylindrical silo – Side plates –
    Ring girder – stiffeners.
    UNIT IV CONCRETE BUNKERS AND SILOS 7
    Design of square bunker – Side Walls – Hopper bottom – Top and bottom edge beams –
    Design of cylindrical silo – Wall portion – Design of conical hopper – Ring beam at junction
    UNIT V PRESTRESSED CONCRETE WATER TANKS 7
    Principles of circular prestressing – Design of prestressed concrete circular water tanks
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Rajagopalan K., Storage Structures, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 1998.
    2. Krishna Raju N., Advanced Reinforced Concrete Design, CBS Publishers and
    Distributors, New Delhi, 1998.
    27
    101867 DESIGN OF PLATE AND SHELL STRUCTURES L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of this course the student shall understand the rudimentary principles involved in the
    analysis and design of plates and shells.
    UNIT I THIN PLATES WITH SMALL DEFLECTION 9
    Laterally loaded thin plates – governing differential equations – Simply supported and fixed
    boundary conditions
    UNIT II RECTANGULAR PLATES 9
    Simply supported rectangular plates – Navier’s solution and Levy’s method.
    UNIT III THIN SHELLS 9
    Classification of shells-structural actions – membrane theory
    UNIT IV ANALYSIS OF SHELLS 9
    Analysis of spherical dome – cylindrical shells – folded plates
    UNIT V DESIGN OF SHELLS 9
    Design of spherical dome – cylindrical shells – folded plates
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Bairagi N K, A text book of Plate Analysis, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 1996.
    2. G.S. Ramaswamy, Design and Construction of Shell Structures, CBS Plublishers,
    New Delhi, 1996
    3. S. Timoshenko & S. Woinowsky – Krieger, “Theory of Plates and Shells”, McGraw Hill
    Book Company
    REFERENCES
    1. Szilard R, Theory and analysis of plates, Prentice Hall Inc, 1995
    2. Chatterjee B. K., Theory and Design of Concrete Shells, Oxford & IBH, New Delhi, 1998
    3. Billington D. P., Thin Shell Concrete Structures, McGraw-Hill, 1995.
    28
    101868 TALL BUILDINGS L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of this course the student should have understood the problems associated with
    large heights of structures with respect to loads (wind and earthquake and deflections of the
    structure). He should know the rudimentary principles of designing tall buildings as per the
    existing course.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
    The Tall Building in the Urban Context - The Tall Building and its Support Structure -
    Development of High Rise Building Structures - General Planning Considerations. Dead Loads -
    Live Loads-Construction Loads -Snow, Rain, and Ice Loads - Wind Loads-Seismic Loading –
    Water and Earth Pressure Loads - Loads - Loads Due to Restrained Volume Changes of
    Material - Impact and Dynamic Loads - Blast Loads -Combination of Loads.
    UNIT II THE VERTICAL STRUCTURE PLANE 9
    Dispersion of Vertical Forces- Dispersion of Lateral Forces - Optimum Ground Level Space -
    Shear Wall Arrangement - Behaviour of Shear Walls under Lateral Loading. The Floor Structure
    or Horizontal Building Plane Floor Framing Systems-Horizontal Bracing- Composite Floor
    Systems The High - Rise Building as related to assemblage Kits Skeleton Frame Systems -
    Load Bearing Wall Panel Systems - Panel – Frame Systems - Multistory Box Systems.
    UNIT III COMMON HIGH-RISE BUILDING STRUCTURES AND THEIR BEHAVIOUR
    UNDER LOAD 9
    The Bearing Wall Structure- The Shear Core Structure - Rigid Frame Systems- The Wall -
    Beam Structure: Interspatial and Staggered Truss Systems - Frame - Shear Wall Building
    Systems - Flat Slab Building Structures - Shear Truss - Frame Interaction System with Rigid -
    Belt Trusses - Tubular Systems-Composite Buildings - Comparison of High - Rise Structural
    Systems Other Design Approaches Controlling Building Drift Efficient Building Forms - The
    Counteracting Force or Dynamic Response.
    UNIT IV APPROXIMATE STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS AND DESIGN OF BUILDINGS 9
    Approximate Analysis of Bearing Wall Buildings The Cross Wall Structure - The Long Wall
    Structure The Rigid Frame Structure Approximate Analysis for Vertical Loading - Approximate
    Analysis for Lateral Loading - Approximate Design of Rigid Frame Buildings-Lateral Deformation
    of Rigid Frame Buildings The Rigid Frame - Shear Wall Structure - The Vierendeel Structure -
    The Hollow Tube Structure.
    UNIT V OTHER HIGH-RISE BUILDING STRUCTURE 9
    Deep - Beam Systems -High-Rise Suspension Systems - Pneumatic High -Rise Buildings -
    Space Frame Applied to High - Rise Buildings - Capsule Architecture.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. WOLFGANG SCHUELLER " High - rise building Structures", John Wiley and Sons,
    New York 1976.
    2. Bryan Stafford Smith and Alex Coull, " Tall Building Structures ", Analysis and Design,
    John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1991.
    29
    REFERENCES
    1. COULL, A. and SMITH, STAFFORD, B. " Tall Buildings ", Pergamon Press, London,
    1997.
    2. LinT.Y. and Burry D.Stotes, " Structural Concepts and Systems for Architects and
    Engineers ", John Wiley, 1994.
    3. Lynn S.Beedle, Advances in Tall Buildings, CBS Publishers and Distributors, Delhi,
    1996.
    4. Taranath.B.S., Structural Analysis and Design of Tall Buildings, Mc Graw Hill,1998.
    30
    101869 PREFABRICATED STRUCTURES L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of this course the student shall be able to appreciate modular construction,
    industrialised construction and shall be able to design some of the prefabricated elements and
    also have the knowledge of the construction methods using these elements.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
    Need for prefabrication – Principles – Materials – Modular coordination – Standarization –
    Systems – Production – Transportation – Erection.
    UNIT II PREFABRICATED COMPONENTS 9
    Behaviour of structural components – Large panel constructions – Construction of roof and floor
    slabs – Wall panels – Columns – Shear walls
    UNIT III DESIGN PRINCIPLES 9
    Disuniting of structures- Design of cross section based on efficiency of material used –
    Problems in design because of joint flexibility – Allowance for joint deformation.
    UNIT IV JOINT IN STRUCTURAL MEMBERS 9
    Joints for different structural connections – Dimensions and detailing – Design of expansion
    joints
    UNIT V DESIGN FOR ABNORMAL LOADS 9
    Progressive collapse – Code provisions – Equivalent design loads for considering abnormal
    effects such as earthquakes, cyclones, etc., - Importance of avoidance of progressive collapse.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. CBRI, Building materials and components, India, 1990
    2. Gerostiza C.Z., Hendrikson C. and Rehat D.R., Knowledge based process planning for
    construction and manufacturing, Academic Press Inc., 1994
    REFERENCES
    1. Koncz T., Manual of precast concrete construction, Vols. I, II and III, Bauverlag, GMBH,
    1971.
    2. Structural design manual, Precast concrete connection details, Society for the studies in
    the use of precast concrete, Netherland Betor Verlag, 1978.
    31
    101870 WIND ENGINEERING L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of this course the student should be able to appreciate the forces generated on
    structures due to normal wind as well as gusts. He should also be able to analyse the dynamic
    effects created by these wind forces.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
    Terminology – Wind Data – Gust factor and its determination - Wind speed variation with height
    – Shape factor – Aspect ratio – Drag and lift.
    UNIT II EFFECT OF WIND ON STRUCTURES 9
    Static effect – Dynamic effect – Interference effects (concept only) – Rigid structure –
    Aeroelastic structure (concept only).
    UNIT III EFFECT ON TYPICAL STRUCTURES 9
    Tail buildings – Low rise buildings – Roof and cladding – Chimneys, towers and bridges.
    UNIT IV APPLICATION TO DESIGN 9
    Design forces on multistorey building, towers and roof trusses.
    UNIT V INTRODUCTION TO WIND TUNNEL 9
    Types of models (Principles only) – Basic considerations – Examples of tests and their use.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Peter Sachs, “Wind Forces in Engineering, Pergamon Press, New York, 1992.
    2. Lawson T.V., Wind Effects on Buildings, Vols. I and II, Applied Science and Publishers,
    London, 1993.
    REFERENCES
    1. Devenport A.G., “Wind Loads on Structures”, Division of Building Research, Ottowa,
    1990.
    2. Wind Force on Structures – Course Notes, Building Technology Centre, Anna University,
    1995.
    32
    101871 COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN OF STRUCTURE L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    The main objective of this programme is to train the student in the use of computers and
    creating a computer code as well as using commercially available software for the design of
    Civil Engineering structures.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
    Fundamentals of CAD - Hardware and software requirements -Design process - Applications
    and benefits.
    UNIT II COMPUTER GRAPHICS 9
    Graphic primitives - Transformations -Wire frame modeling and solid modeling -Graphic
    standards –Drafting packages
    UNIT III STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS 9
    Fundamentals of finite element analysis - Principles of structural analysis -Analysis packages
    and applications.
    UNIT IV DESIGN AND OPTIMISATION 9
    Principles of design of steel and RC Structures -Applications to simple design problems –
    Optimisation techniques - Algorithms - Linear Programming – Simplex method
    UNIT V EXPERT SYSTEMS 9
    Introduction to artificial intelligence - Knowledge based expert systems -Rules and decision
    tables –Inference mechanisms - Simple applications.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Groover M.P. and Zimmers E.W. Jr., “CAD/CAM, Computer Aided Design and
    Manufacturing”, Prentice Hall of India Ltd, New Delhi, 1993.
    2. Krishnamoorthy C.S.Rajeev S., “Computer Aided Design”, Narosa Publishing House,
    New Delhi, 1993
    REFERENCES
    1. Harrison H.B., “Structural Analysis and Design”, Part I and II Pergamon Press, Oxford,
    1990.
    2. Rao S.S., “Optimisation Theory and Applications”, Wiley Eastern Limited, New Delhi,
    1977.
    3. Richard Forsyth (Ed), “Expert System Principles and Case Studies”, Chapman and Hall,
    London, 1989.
    33
    101872 INDUSTRIAL STRUCTURES L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    This course deals with some of the special aspects with respect to Civil Engineering structures
    in industries. At the end of this course the student shall be able to design some of the
    structures.
    UNIT I PLANNING 9
    Classification of Industries and Industrial structures – General requirements for industries like
    cement, chemical and steel plants – Planning and layout of buildings and components.
    UNIT II FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS 9
    Lighting – Ventilation – Acoustics – Fire safety – Guidelines from factories act.
    UNIIT III DESIGN OF STEEL STRUCTURES 9
    Industrial roofs – Crane girders – Mill buildings – Design of Bunkers and Silos
    UNIT IV DESIGN OF R.C. STRUCTURES 9
    Silos and bunkers – Chimneys – Principles of folded plates and shell roofs
    UNIT V PREFABRICATION 9
    Principles of prefabrication – Prestressed precast roof trusses- Functional requirements for
    Precast concrete units
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Reinforced Concrete Structural elements – P. Purushothaman.
    2. Pasala Dayaratnam – Design of Steel Structure – 1990.
    REFERENCES
    1. Henn W. Buildings for Industry, vols.I and II, London Hill Books, 1995.
    2. Handbook on Functional Requirements of Industrial buildings, SP32 – 1986, Bureau of
    Indian Standards, New Delhi 1990.
    3. Course Notes on Modern Developments in the Design and Construction of Industrial
    Structures, Structural Engineering Research Centre, Madras, 1982.
    4. Koncz, J, Manual of Precast Construction Vol I & II Bauverlay GMBH, 1971.
    34
    101873 SMART MATERIALS AND SMART STRUCTURES L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    This course is designed to give an insight into the latest developments regarding smart
    materials and their use in structures. Further, this also deals with structures which can self
    adjust their stiffness with load.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
    Introduction to Smart Materials and Structures – Instrumented structures functions and
    response – Sensing systems – Self diagnosis – Signal processing consideration – Actuation
    systems and effectors.
    UNIT II MEASURING TECHNIQUES 9
    Strain Measuring Techniques using Electrical strain gauges, Types – Resistance – Capacitance
    – Inductance – Wheatstone bridges – Pressure transducers – Load cells – Temperature
    Compensation – Strain Rosettes.
    UNIT III SENSORS 9
    Sensing Technology – Types of Sensors – Physical Measurement using Piezo Electric Strain
    measurement – Inductively Read Transducers – The LVOT – Fiber optic Techniques.
    Chemical and Bio-Chemical sensing in structural Assessment – Absorptive chemical sensors –
    Spectroscopes – Fibre Optic Chemical Sensing Systems and Distributed measurement.
    UNIT IV ACTUATORS 9
    Actuator Techniques – Actuator and actuator materials – Piezoelectric and Electrostrictive
    Material – Magnetostructure Material – Shape Memory Alloys – Electro orheological Fluids–
    Electro magnetic actuation – Role of actuators and Actuator Materials.
    UNIT V SIGNAL PROCESSING AND CONTROL SYSTEMS 9
    Data Acquisition and Processing – Signal Processing and Control for Smart Structures –
    Sensors as Geometrical Processors – Signal Processing – Control System – Linear and Non-
    Linear.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Brain Culshaw – Smart Structure and Materials Artech House – Borton. London-1996.
    REFERENCES
    1. L. S. Srinath – Experimental Stress Analysis – Tata McGraw-Hill, 1998.
    2. J. W. Dally & W. F. Riley – Experimental Stress Analysis – Tata McGraw-Hill, 1998.
    35
    101874 FINITE ELEMENT TECHNIQUES L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of this course the student shall have a basic knowledge of finite element method and
    shall be able to analyse linear elastic structures, that he has studied about in core courses,
    using finite element method.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION – VARIATIONAL FORMULATION 9
    General field problems in Engineering – Modelling – Discrete and Continuous models –
    Characteristics – Difficulties involved in solution – The relevance and place of the finite element
    method – Historical comments – Basic concept of FEM, Boundary and initial value problems –
    Gradient and divergence theorems – Functionals – Variational calculus Variational formulation
    of VBPS. The method of weighted residuals – The Ritz method.
    UNIT II FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS OF ONE DIMENSIONAL PROBLEMS 10
    One dimensional second order equations – discretisation of domain into elements –
    Generalised coordinates approach – derivation of elements equations – assembly of elements
    equations – imposition of boundary conditions – solution of equations – Cholesky method – Post
    processing – Extension of the method to fourth order equations and their solutions – time
    dependant problems and their solutions – example from heat transfer, fluid flow and solid
    mechanics.
    UNIT III FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS OF TWO DIMENSIONAL PROBLEMS 10
    Second order equation involving a scalar-valued function – model equation – Variational
    formulation – Finite element formulation through generalised coordinates approach – Triangular
    elements and quadrilateral elements – convergence criteria for chosen models – Interpolation
    functions – Elements matrices and vectors – Assembly of element matrices – boundary
    conditions – solution techniques.
    UNIT IV ISOPARAMETRIC ELEMENTS AND FORMULATION 8
    Natural coordinates in 1, 2 and 3 dimensions – use of area coordinates for triangular elements
    in - 2 dimensional problems – Isoparametric elements in 1,2 and 3 dimensional Largrangean
    and serendipity elements – Formulations of elements equations in one and two dimensions -
    Numerical integration.
    UNIT V APPLICATIONS TO FIELD PROBLEMS IN TWO DIMENSIONALS 8
    Equations of elasticity – plane elasticity problems – axisymmetric problems in elasticity –
    Bending of elastic plates – Time dependent problems in elasticity – Heat – transfer in two
    dimensions – incompressible fluid flow
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOK
    1. Chandrupatla, T.R., and Belegundu, A.D., “Introduction to Finite Element in
    Engineering”, Third Edition, Prentice Hall, India, 2003.
    36
    REFERENCES
    1. J.N.Reddy, “An Introduction to Finite Element Method”, McGraw-Hill, Intl. Student
    Edition, 1985.
    2. Zienkiewics, “The finite element method, Basic formulation and linear problems”, Vol.1,
    4/e, McGraw-Hill, Book Co.
    3. S.S.Rao, “The Finite Element Method in Engineering”, Pergaman Press, 2003.
    4. C.S.Desai and J.F.Abel, “Introduction to the Finite Element Method”, Affiliated East West
    Press, 1972.
    101875 REPAIR AND REHABILITATION OF STRUCTURES L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    To get the knowledge on quality of concrete, durability aspects, causes of deterioration,
    assessment of distressed structures, repairing of structures and demolition procedures.
    UNIT I MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR STRATEGIES 9
    Maintenance, repair and rehabilitation, Facets of Maintenance, importance of Maintenance
    various aspects of Inspection, Assessment procedure for evaluating a damaged structure,
    causes of deterioration
    UNIT II SERVICEABILITY AND DURABILITY OF CONCRETE 11
    Quality assurance for concrete construction concrete properties- strength, permeability, thermal
    properties and cracking. - Effects due to climate, temperature, chemicals, corrosion - design
    and construction errors - Effects of cover thickness and cracking
    UNIT III MATERIALS FOR REPAIR 9
    Special concretes and mortar, concrete chemicals, special elements for accelerated strength
    gain, Expansive cement, polymer concrete, sulphur infiltrated concrete, ferro cement, Fibre
    reinforced concrete.
    UNIT IV TECHNIQUES FOR REPAIR AND DEMOLITION 8
    Rust eliminators and polymers coating for rebars during repair, foamed concrete, mortar and dry
    pack, vacuum concrete, Gunite and Shotcrete, Epoxy injection, Mortar repair for cracks, shoring
    and underpinning. Methods of corrosion protection, corrosion inhibitors, corrosion resistant
    steels, coatings and cathodic protection. Engineered demolition techniques for dilapidated
    structures - case studies.
    UNIT V REPAIRS, REHABILITATION AND RETROFITTING OF STRUCTURES 8
    Repairs to overcome low member strength, Deflection, Cracking, Chemical disruption,
    weathering corrosion, wear, fire, leakage and marine exposure.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Denison Campbell, Allen and Harold Roper, Concrete Structures, Materials,
    Maintenance and Repair, Longman Scientific and Technical UK, 1991.
    2. R.T.Allen and S.C.Edwards, Repair of Concrete Structures, Blakie and Sons, UK, 1987
    37
    REFERENCES
    1. M.S.Shetty, Concrete Technology - Theory and Practice, S.Chand and Company, New
    Delhi, 1992.
    2. Santhakumar, A.R., Training Course notes on Damage Assessment and repair in Low
    Cost Housing , "RHDC-NBO" Anna University, July 1992.
    3. Raikar, R.N., Learning from failures - Deficiencies in Design, Construction and Service -
    R&D Centre (SDCPL), Raikar Bhavan, Bombay, 1987.
    4. N.Palaniappan, Estate Management, Anna Institute of Management, Chennai, 1992.
    5. Lakshmipathy, M. etal. Lecture notes of Workshop on "Repairs and Rehabilitation of
    Structures", 29 - 30th October 1999.
    1
    AFFILIATED INSTITUTIONS
    ANNA UNIVERSITY OF TECHNOLOGY CHENNAI :: CHENNAI 600 113
    REGULATIONS 2010
    CURRICULA AND SYLLABI FOR VIII SEMESTER
    B.E. CIVIL ENGINEERING
    SEMESTER VIII
    Code No. Course Title L T P C
    THEORY
    101801 Engineering Economics and Cost Analysis 3 0 0 3
    E4 Elective – IV 3 0 0 3
    E5 Elective – V 3 0 0 3
    PRACTICAL
    101895 Project Work 0 0 12 6
    TOTAL 9 0 15 15
    2
    LIST OF ELECTIVES for B.E. CIVIL ENGINEERING
    SEMESTER VIII
    Code No. Course Title L T P C
    101865 Bridge Structures 3 0 0 3
    101866 Storage Structures 3 0 0 3
    101867 Design of Plate and Shell Structures 3 0 0 3
    101868 Tall Buildings 3 0 0 3
    101869 Prefabricated structures 3 0 0 3
    101870 Wind Engineering 3 0 0 3
    101871 Computer Aided Design of Structures 3 0 0 3
    101872 Industrial Structures 3 0 0 3
    101873 Smart Structures and smart Materials 3 0 0 3
    101874 Finite Element Techniques 3 0 0 3
    101875 Repair and Rehabilitation of Structures 3 0 0 3
    3
    101801 ENGINEERING ECONOMICS AND COST ANALYSIS L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    The main objective of this course is to make the Civil Engineering student know about the basic
    law of economics, how to organise a business, the financial aspects related to business,
    different methods of appraisal of projects and pricing techniques. At the end of this course the
    student shall have the knowledge of how to start a construction business, how to get finances,
    how to account, how to price and bid and how to assess the health of a project.
    UNIT I BASIC ECONOMICS 7
    Definition of economics - nature and scope of economic science - nature and scope of
    managerial economics - basic terms and concepts - goods - utility - value - wealth - factors of
    production - land - its peculiarities - labour - economies of large and small scale - consumption -
    wants - its characteristics and classification - law of diminishing marginal utility - relation
    between economic decision and technical decision.
    UNIT II DEMAND AND SCHEDULE 8
    Demand - demand schedule - demand curve - law of demand - elasticity of demand - types of
    elasticity - factors determining elasticity - measurement - its significance - supply - supply
    schedule - supply curve - law of supply - elasticity of supply - time element in the determination
    of value - market price and normal price - perfect competition - monopoly - monopolistic
    competition.
    UNIT III ORGANISATION 8
    Forms of business - proprietorship - partnership - joint stock company - cooperative organisation
    - state enterprise - mixed economy - money and banking - banking - kinds - commercial banks -
    central banking functions - control of credit - monetary policy - credit instrument.
    UNIT IV FINANCING 9
    Types of financing - Short term borrowing - Long term borrowing - Internal generation of funds -
    External commercial borrowings - Assistance from government budgeting support and
    international finance corporations - analysis of financial statement – Balance Sheet - Profit and
    Loss account - Funds flow statement.
    UNIT V COST AND BREAK EVEN ANALYSES 13
    Types of costing – traditional costing approach - activity base costing - Fixed Cost – variable
    cost – marginal cost – cost output relationship in the short run and in long run – pricing practice
    – full cost pricing – marginal cost pricing – going rate pricing – bid pricing – pricing for a rate of
    return – appraising project profitability –internal rate of return – pay back period – net present
    value – cost benefit analysis – feasibility reports – appraisal process – technical feasibilityeconomic
    feasibility – financial feasibility. Break even analysis - basic assumptions – break
    even chart – managerial uses of break even analysis.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Dewett K.K. & Varma J.D., Elementary Economic Theory, S Chand & Co., 2006
    2. Sharma JC “Construction Management and Accounts” Satya Prakashan, New Delhi.
    4
    REFERENCES
    1. Barthwal R.R., Industrial Economics - An Introductory Text Book, New Age
    2. Jhingan M.L., Micro Economic Theory, Konark
    3. Samuelson P.A., Economics - An Introductory Analysis, McGraw-Hill
    4. Adhikary M., Managerial Economics
    5. Khan MY and Jain PK “Financial Management” McGraw-Hill Publishing Co., Ltd
    6. Varshney RL and Maheshwary KL “ Managerial Economics” S Chand and Co
    5
    101895 PROJECT WORK L T P C
    0 0 12 6
    OBJECTIVE
    The objective of the project work is to enable the students to work in convenient groups of not
    more than four members in a group on a project involving theoretical and experimental studies
    related to Civil Engineering. Every Project Work shall have a Guide who is a member of the
    faculty of Civil Engineering of the college where the student is registered. The hours allotted for
    this course shall be utilized by the students to receive directions from the Guide, on library
    reading, laboratory work, computer analysis or field work and also to present in periodical
    seminars the progress made in the project.
    Each student shall finally produce a comprehensive report covering background information,
    literature Survey, problem statement, Project work details and conclusions.
    This experience of project work shall help the student in expanding his / her knowledge base
    and also provide opportunity to utilise the creative ability and inference capability.
    TOTAL: 180 PERIODS
    EVALUATION PROCEDURE
    The method of evaluation will be as follows:
    1. Internal Marks : 20 marks
    (decided by conducting 3 reviews by the guide appointed by the
    Institution)
    2. Evaluation of Project Report : 30 marks
    (Evaluated by the external examiner appointed the University).
    Every student belonging to the same group gets the same mark
    3. Viva voce examination : 50 marks
    (evaluated by the internal examiner appointed by the HOD with the
    approval of HOI, external examiner appointed by the University and
    Guide of the course – with equal Weightage)
    Total : 100 marks
    6
    ELECTIVES
    101865 BRIDGE STRUCTURES L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of this course the student shall be able to choose appropriate bridge structure and
    design it for given site conditions.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
    Design of through type steel highway bridges for IRC loading - Design of stringers, cross girders
    and main girders - Design of deck type steel highway bridges for IRC loading - Design of main
    girders
    UNIT II STEEL BRIDGES 9
    Design of pratt type truss girder highway bridges - Design of top chord, bottom chord, web
    members - Effect of repeated loading - Design of plate girder railway bridges for railway loading
    - Wind effects - Design of web and flange plates - Vertical and horizontal stiffeners.
    UNIT III REINFORCED CONCRETE SLAB BRIDGES 9
    Design of solid slab bridges for IRC loading - Design of kerb - Design of tee beam bridges -
    Design of panel and cantilever for IRC loading
    UNIT IV REINFORCED CONCRETE GIRDER BRIDGES 9
    Design of tee beam - Courbon's theory - Pigeaud's curves - Design of balanced cantilever
    bridges - Deck slab - Main girder - Design of cantilever - Design of articulation.
    UNIT V PRESTRESSED CONCRETE BRIDGES 9
    Design of prestressed concrete bridges - Preliminary dimensions - Flexural and torsional
    parameters - Courbon's theory - Distribution coefficient by exact analysis - Design of girder
    section - Maximum and minimum prestressing forces - Eccentricity - Live load and dead load
    shear forces - cable zone in girder –Check for stresses at various sections - Check for diagonal
    tension - Diaphragms - End block - Short term and long term deflections.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Johnson Victor D., “Essentials of Bridge Engineering”, Oxford and IBH Publishing Co.,
    New Delhi, 1990.
    2. Rajagopalan, N.Bridge Superstructure, Alpha Science International, 2006
    REFERENCES
    1. Phatak D.R., “Bridge Engineering”, Satya Prakashan, New Delhi, 1990.
    2. Ponnuswamy S., “Bridge Engineering”, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 1996.
    7
    101866 STORAGE STRUCTURES L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    The main objective of this course is to impart the principles involved in designing structures
    which have to store different types of materials. The student at the end of the course shall be
    able to design concrete and steel material retaining structures.
    UNIT I STEEL WATER TANKS 12
    Design of rectangular riveted steel water tank – Tee covers – Plates – Stays –Longitudinal and
    transverse beams – Design of staging – Base plates – Foundation and anchor bolts – Design of
    pressed steel water tank – Design of stays – Joints – Design of hemispherical bottom water tank
    – side plates – Bottom plates – joints – Ring girder – Design of staging and foundation.
    UNIT II CONCRETE WATER TANKS 12
    Design of Circular tanks – Hinged and fixed at the base – IS method of calculating shear forces
    and moments – Hoop tension – Design of intze tank – Dome – Ring girders – Conical dome –
    Staging – Bracings – Raft foundation – Design of rectangular tanks – Approximate methods and
    IS methods – Design of under ground tanks – Design of base slab and side wall – Check for
    uplift.
    UNIT III STEEL BUNKERS AND SILOS 7
    Design of square bunker – Jansen’s and Airy’s theories – IS Codal provisions – Design of side
    plates – Stiffeners – Hooper – Longitudinal beams – Design of cylindrical silo – Side plates –
    Ring girder – stiffeners.
    UNIT IV CONCRETE BUNKERS AND SILOS 7
    Design of square bunker – Side Walls – Hopper bottom – Top and bottom edge beams –
    Design of cylindrical silo – Wall portion – Design of conical hopper – Ring beam at junction
    UNIT V PRESTRESSED CONCRETE WATER TANKS 7
    Principles of circular prestressing – Design of prestressed concrete circular water tanks
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Rajagopalan K., Storage Structures, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 1998.
    2. Krishna Raju N., Advanced Reinforced Concrete Design, CBS Publishers and
    Distributors, New Delhi, 1998.
    8
    101867 DESIGN OF PLATE AND SHELL STRUCTURES L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of this course the student shall understand the rudimentary principles involved in the
    analysis and design of plates and shells.
    UNIT I THIN PLATES WITH SMALL DEFLECTION 9
    Laterally loaded thin plates – governing differential equations – Simply supported and fixed
    boundary conditions
    UNIT II RECTANGULAR PLATES 9
    Simply supported rectangular plates – Navier’s solution and Levy’s method.
    UNIT III THIN SHELLS 9
    Classification of shells-structural actions – membrane theory
    UNIT IV ANALYSIS OF SHELLS 9
    Analysis of spherical dome – cylindrical shells – folded plates
    UNIT V DESIGN OF SHELLS 9
    Design of spherical dome – cylindrical shells – folded plates
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Bairagi N K, A text book of Plate Analysis, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 1996.
    2. G.S. Ramaswamy, Design and Construction of Shell Structures, CBS Plublishers,
    New Delhi, 1996
    3. S. Timoshenko & S. Woinowsky – Krieger, “Theory of Plates and Shells”, McGraw Hill
    Book Company
    REFERENCES
    1. Szilard R, Theory and analysis of plates, Prentice Hall Inc, 1995
    2. Chatterjee B. K., Theory and Design of Concrete Shells, Oxford & IBH, New Delhi, 1998
    3. Billington D. P., Thin Shell Concrete Structures, McGraw-Hill, 1995.
    9
    101868 TALL BUILDINGS L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of this course the student should have understood the problems associated with
    large heights of structures with respect to loads (wind and earthquake and deflections of the
    structure). He should know the rudimentary principles of designing tall buildings as per the
    existing course.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
    The Tall Building in the Urban Context - The Tall Building and its Support Structure -
    Development of High Rise Building Structures - General Planning Considerations. Dead Loads -
    Live Loads-Construction Loads -Snow, Rain, and Ice Loads - Wind Loads-Seismic Loading –
    Water and Earth Pressure Loads - Loads - Loads Due to Restrained Volume Changes of
    Material - Impact and Dynamic Loads - Blast Loads -Combination of Loads.
    UNIT II THE VERTICAL STRUCTURE PLANE 9
    Dispersion of Vertical Forces- Dispersion of Lateral Forces - Optimum Ground Level Space -
    Shear Wall Arrangement - Behaviour of Shear Walls under Lateral Loading. The Floor Structure
    or Horizontal Building Plane Floor Framing Systems-Horizontal Bracing- Composite Floor
    Systems The High - Rise Building as related to assemblage Kits Skeleton Frame Systems -
    Load Bearing Wall Panel Systems - Panel – Frame Systems - Multistory Box Systems.
    UNIT III COMMON HIGH-RISE BUILDING STRUCTURES AND THEIR BEHAVIOUR
    UNDER LOAD 9
    The Bearing Wall Structure- The Shear Core Structure - Rigid Frame Systems- The Wall -
    Beam Structure: Interspatial and Staggered Truss Systems - Frame - Shear Wall Building
    Systems - Flat Slab Building Structures - Shear Truss - Frame Interaction System with Rigid -
    Belt Trusses - Tubular Systems-Composite Buildings - Comparison of High - Rise Structural
    Systems Other Design Approaches Controlling Building Drift Efficient Building Forms - The
    Counteracting Force or Dynamic Response.
    UNIT IV APPROXIMATE STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS AND DESIGN OF BUILDINGS 9
    Approximate Analysis of Bearing Wall Buildings The Cross Wall Structure - The Long Wall
    Structure The Rigid Frame Structure Approximate Analysis for Vertical Loading - Approximate
    Analysis for Lateral Loading - Approximate Design of Rigid Frame Buildings-Lateral Deformation
    of Rigid Frame Buildings The Rigid Frame - Shear Wall Structure - The Vierendeel Structure -
    The Hollow Tube Structure.
    UNIT V OTHER HIGH-RISE BUILDING STRUCTURE 9
    Deep - Beam Systems -High-Rise Suspension Systems - Pneumatic High -Rise Buildings -
    Space Frame Applied to High - Rise Buildings - Capsule Architecture.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. WOLFGANG SCHUELLER " High - rise building Structures", John Wiley and Sons,
    New York 1976.
    2. Bryan Stafford Smith and Alex Coull, " Tall Building Structures ", Analysis and Design,
    John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1991.
    10
    REFERENCES
    1. COULL, A. and SMITH, STAFFORD, B. " Tall Buildings ", Pergamon Press, London,
    1997.
    2. LinT.Y. and Burry D.Stotes, " Structural Concepts and Systems for Architects and
    Engineers ", John Wiley, 1994.
    3. Lynn S.Beedle, Advances in Tall Buildings, CBS Publishers and Distributors, Delhi,
    1996.
    4. Taranath.B.S., Structural Analysis and Design of Tall Buildings, Mc Graw Hill,1998.
    11
    101869 PREFABRICATED STRUCTURES L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of this course the student shall be able to appreciate modular construction,
    industrialised construction and shall be able to design some of the prefabricated elements and
    also have the knowledge of the construction methods using these elements.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
    Need for prefabrication – Principles – Materials – Modular coordination – Standarization –
    Systems – Production – Transportation – Erection.
    UNIT II PREFABRICATED COMPONENTS 9
    Behaviour of structural components – Large panel constructions – Construction of roof and floor
    slabs – Wall panels – Columns – Shear walls
    UNIT III DESIGN PRINCIPLES 9
    Disuniting of structures- Design of cross section based on efficiency of material used –
    Problems in design because of joint flexibility – Allowance for joint deformation.
    UNIT IV JOINT IN STRUCTURAL MEMBERS 9
    Joints for different structural connections – Dimensions and detailing – Design of expansion
    joints
    UNIT V DESIGN FOR ABNORMAL LOADS 9
    Progressive collapse – Code provisions – Equivalent design loads for considering abnormal
    effects such as earthquakes, cyclones, etc., - Importance of avoidance of progressive collapse.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. CBRI, Building materials and components, India, 1990
    2. Gerostiza C.Z., Hendrikson C. and Rehat D.R., Knowledge based process planning for
    construction and manufacturing, Academic Press Inc., 1994
    REFERENCES
    1. Koncz T., Manual of precast concrete construction, Vols. I, II and III, Bauverlag, GMBH,
    1971.
    2. Structural design manual, Precast concrete connection details, Society for the studies in
    the use of precast concrete, Netherland Betor Verlag, 1978.
    12
    101870 WIND ENGINEERING L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of this course the student should be able to appreciate the forces generated on
    structures due to normal wind as well as gusts. He should also be able to analyse the dynamic
    effects created by these wind forces.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
    Terminology – Wind Data – Gust factor and its determination - Wind speed variation with height
    – Shape factor – Aspect ratio – Drag and lift.
    UNIT II EFFECT OF WIND ON STRUCTURES 9
    Static effect – Dynamic effect – Interference effects (concept only) – Rigid structure –
    Aeroelastic structure (concept only).
    UNIT III EFFECT ON TYPICAL STRUCTURES 9
    Tail buildings – Low rise buildings – Roof and cladding – Chimneys, towers and bridges.
    UNIT IV APPLICATION TO DESIGN 9
    Design forces on multistorey building, towers and roof trusses.
    UNIT V INTRODUCTION TO WIND TUNNEL 9
    Types of models (Principles only) – Basic considerations – Examples of tests and their use.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Peter Sachs, “Wind Forces in Engineering, Pergamon Press, New York, 1992.
    2. Lawson T.V., Wind Effects on Buildings, Vols. I and II, Applied Science and Publishers,
    London, 1993.
    REFERENCES
    1. Devenport A.G., “Wind Loads on Structures”, Division of Building Research, Ottowa,
    1990.
    2. Wind Force on Structures – Course Notes, Building Technology Centre, Anna University,
    1995.
    13
    101871 COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN OF STRUCTURE L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    The main objective of this programme is to train the student in the use of computers and
    creating a computer code as well as using commercially available software for the design of
    Civil Engineering structures.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
    Fundamentals of CAD - Hardware and software requirements -Design process - Applications
    and benefits.
    UNIT II COMPUTER GRAPHICS 9
    Graphic primitives - Transformations -Wire frame modeling and solid modeling -Graphic
    standards –Drafting packages
    UNIT III STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS 9
    Fundamentals of finite element analysis - Principles of structural analysis -Analysis packages
    and applications.
    UNIT IV DESIGN AND OPTIMISATION 9
    Principles of design of steel and RC Structures -Applications to simple design problems –
    Optimisation techniques - Algorithms - Linear Programming – Simplex method
    UNIT V EXPERT SYSTEMS 9
    Introduction to artificial intelligence - Knowledge based expert systems -Rules and decision
    tables –Inference mechanisms - Simple applications.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Groover M.P. and Zimmers E.W. Jr., “CAD/CAM, Computer Aided Design and
    Manufacturing”, Prentice Hall of India Ltd, New Delhi, 1993.
    2. Krishnamoorthy C.S.Rajeev S., “Computer Aided Design”, Narosa Publishing House,
    New Delhi, 1993
    REFERENCES
    1. Harrison H.B., “Structural Analysis and Design”, Part I and II Pergamon Press, Oxford,
    1990.
    2. Rao S.S., “Optimisation Theory and Applications”, Wiley Eastern Limited, New Delhi,
    1977.
    3. Richard Forsyth (Ed), “Expert System Principles and Case Studies”, Chapman and Hall,
    London, 1989.
    14
    101872 INDUSTRIAL STRUCTURES L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    This course deals with some of the special aspects with respect to Civil Engineering structures
    in industries. At the end of this course the student shall be able to design some of the
    structures.
    UNIT I PLANNING 9
    Classification of Industries and Industrial structures – General requirements for industries like
    cement, chemical and steel plants – Planning and layout of buildings and components.
    UNIT II FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS 9
    Lighting – Ventilation – Acoustics – Fire safety – Guidelines from factories act.
    UNIIT III DESIGN OF STEEL STRUCTURES 9
    Industrial roofs – Crane girders – Mill buildings – Design of Bunkers and Silos
    UNIT IV DESIGN OF R.C. STRUCTURES 9
    Silos and bunkers – Chimneys – Principles of folded plates and shell roofs
    UNIT V PREFABRICATION 9
    Principles of prefabrication – Prestressed precast roof trusses- Functional requirements for
    Precast concrete units
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Reinforced Concrete Structural elements – P. Purushothaman.
    2. Pasala Dayaratnam – Design of Steel Structure – 1990.
    REFERENCES
    1. Henn W. Buildings for Industry, vols.I and II, London Hill Books, 1995.
    2. Handbook on Functional Requirements of Industrial buildings, SP32 – 1986, Bureau of
    Indian Standards, New Delhi 1990.
    3. Course Notes on Modern Developments in the Design and Construction of Industrial
    Structures, Structural Engineering Research Centre, Madras, 1982.
    4. Koncz, J, Manual of Precast Construction Vol I & II Bauverlay GMBH, 1971.
    15
    101873 SMART MATERIALS AND SMART STRUCTURES L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    This course is designed to give an insight into the latest developments regarding smart
    materials and their use in structures. Further, this also deals with structures which can self
    adjust their stiffness with load.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
    Introduction to Smart Materials and Structures – Instrumented structures functions and
    response – Sensing systems – Self diagnosis – Signal processing consideration – Actuation
    systems and effectors.
    UNIT II MEASURING TECHNIQUES 9
    Strain Measuring Techniques using Electrical strain gauges, Types – Resistance – Capacitance
    – Inductance – Wheatstone bridges – Pressure transducers – Load cells – Temperature
    Compensation – Strain Rosettes.
    UNIT III SENSORS 9
    Sensing Technology – Types of Sensors – Physical Measurement using Piezo Electric Strain
    measurement – Inductively Read Transducers – The LVOT – Fiber optic Techniques
    Chemical and Bio-Chemical sensing in structural Assessment – Absorptive chemical sensors –
    Spectroscopes – Fibre Optic Chemical Sensing Systems and Distributed measurement.
    UNIT IV ACTUATORS 9
    Actuator Techniques – Actuator and actuator materials – Piezoelectric and Electrostrictive
    Material – Magnetostructure Material – Shape Memory Alloys – Electro orheological Fluids–
    Electro magnetic actuation – Role of actuators and Actuator Materials.
    UNIT V SIGNAL PROCESSING AND CONTROL SYSTEMS 9
    Data Acquisition and Processing – Signal Processing and Control for Smart Structures –
    Sensors as Geometrical Processors – Signal Processing – Control System – Linear and Non-
    Linear.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Brain Culshaw – Smart Structure and Materials Artech House – Borton. London-1996.
    REFERENCES
    1. L. S. Srinath – Experimental Stress Analysis – Tata McGraw-Hill, 1998.
    2. J. W. Dally & W. F. Riley – Experimental Stress Analysis – Tata McGraw-Hill, 1998.
    16
    101874 FINITE ELEMENT TECHNIQUES L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    At the end of this course the student shall have a basic knowledge of finite element method and
    shall be able to analyse linear elastic structures, that he has studied about in core courses,
    using finite element method.
    UNIT I INTRODUCTION – VARIATIONAL FORMULATION 9
    General field problems in Engineering – Modelling – Discrete and Continuous models –
    Characteristics – Difficulties involved in solution – The relevance and place of the finite element
    method – Historical comments – Basic concept of FEM, Boundary and initial value problems –
    Gradient and divergence theorems – Functionals – Variational calculus Variational formulation
    of VBPS. The method of weighted residuals – The Ritz method.
    UNIT II FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS OF ONE DIMENSIONAL PROBLEMS 10
    One dimensional second order equations – discretisation of domain into elements –
    Generalised coordinates approach – derivation of elements equations – assembly of elements
    equations – imposition of boundary conditions – solution of equations – Cholesky method – Post
    processing – Extension of the method to fourth order equations and their solutions – time
    dependant problems and their solutions – example from heat transfer, fluid flow and solid
    mechanics.
    UNIT III FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS OF TWO DIMENSIONAL PROBLEMS 10
    Second order equation involving a scalar-valued function – model equation – Variational
    formulation – Finite element formulation through generalised coordinates approach – Triangular
    elements and quadrilateral elements – convergence criteria for chosen models – Interpolation
    functions – Elements matrices and vectors – Assembly of element matrices – boundary
    conditions – solution techniques.
    UNIT IV ISOPARAMETRIC ELEMENTS AND FORMULATION 8
    Natural coordinates in 1, 2 and 3 dimensions – use of area coordinates for triangular elements
    in - 2 dimensional problems – Isoparametric elements in 1,2 and 3 dimensional Largrangean
    and serendipity elements – Formulations of elements equations in one and two dimensions -
    Numerical integration.
    UNIT V APPLICATIONS TO FIELD PROBLEMS IN TWO DIMENSIONALS 8
    Equations of elasticity – plane elasticity problems – axisymmetric problems in elasticity –
    Bending of elastic plates – Time dependent problems in elasticity – Heat – transfer in two
    dimensions – incompressible fluid flow
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOK
    1. Chandrupatla, T.R., and Belegundu, A.D., “Introduction to Finite Element in
    Engineering”, Third Edition, Prentice Hall, India, 2003.
    17
    REFERENCES
    1. J.N.Reddy, “An Introduction to Finite Element Method”, McGraw-Hill, Intl. Student
    Edition, 1985.
    2. Zienkiewics, “The finite element method, Basic formulation and linear problems”, Vol.1,
    4/e, McGraw-Hill, Book Co.
    3. S.S.Rao, “The Finite Element Method in Engineering”, Pergaman Press, 2003.
    4. C.S.Desai and J.F.Abel, “Introduction to the Finite Element Method”, Affiliated East West
    Press, 1972.
    101875 REPAIR AND REHABILITATION OF STRUCTURES L T P C
    3 0 0 3
    OBJECTIVE
    To get the knowledge on quality of concrete, durability aspects, causes of deterioration,
    assessment of distressed structures, repairing of structures and demolition procedures.
    UNIT I MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR STRATEGIES 9
    Maintenance, repair and rehabilitation, Facets of Maintenance, importance of Maintenance
    various aspects of Inspection, Assessment procedure for evaluating a damaged structure,
    causes of deterioration
    UNIT II SERVICEABILITY AND DURABILITY OF CONCRETE 11
    Quality assurance for concrete construction concrete properties- strength, permeability, thermal
    properties and cracking. - Effects due to climate, temperature, chemicals, corrosion - design
    and construction errors - Effects of cover thickness and cracking
    UNIT III MATERIALS FOR REPAIR 9
    Special concretes and mortar, concrete chemicals, special elements for accelerated strength
    gain, Expansive cement, polymer concrete, sulphur infiltrated concrete, ferro cement, Fibre
    reinforced concrete.
    UNIT IV TECHNIQUES FOR REPAIR AND DEMOLITION 8
    Rust eliminators and polymers coating for rebars during repair, foamed concrete, mortar and dry
    pack, vacuum concrete, Gunite and Shotcrete, Epoxy injection, Mortar repair for cracks, shoring
    and underpinning. Methods of corrosion protection, corrosion inhibitors, corrosion resistant
    steels, coatings and cathodic protection. Engineered demolition techniques for dilapidated
    structures - case studies.
    UNIT V REPAIRS, REHABILITATION AND RETROFITTING OF STRUCTURES 8
    Repairs to overcome low member strength, Deflection, Cracking, Chemical disruption,
    weathering corrosion, wear, fire, leakage and marine exposure.
    TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
    TEXT BOOKS
    1. Denison Campbell, Allen and Harold Roper, Concrete Structures, Materials,
    Maintenance and Repair, Longman Scientific and Technical UK, 1991.
    2. R.T.Allen and S.C.Edwards, Repair of Concrete Structures, Blakie and Sons, UK, 1987
    18
    REFERENCES
    1. M.S.Shetty, Concrete Technology - Theory and Practice, S.Chand and Company, New
    Delhi, 1992.
    2. Santhakumar, A.R., Training Course notes on Damage Assessment and repair in Low
    Cost Housing , "RHDC-NBO" Anna University, July 1992.
    3. Raikar, R.N., Learning from failures - Deficiencies in Design, Construction and Service -
    R&D Centre (SDCPL), Raikar Bhavan, Bombay, 1987.
    4. N.Palaniappan, Estate Management, Anna Institute of Management, Chennai, 1992.
    5. Lakshmipathy, M. etal. Lecture notes of Workshop on "Repairs and Rehabilitation of
    Structures", 29 - 30th October 1999.
     
Loading...